DAILY CONTEMPLATIONS FOR READERS OF
THE
TUTU DOCTRINE
THE
NEW WORLD ORDER
Daily
contemplations for readers of the TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order
is created and manifested by Harishchandra Sharma TuTu and Solvejg Sharma
TuTu
Translated from Danish
PUBLISHED
BY 2
2’s
SOLFOND
Free Copyright
CONTENT
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
|
January
01 The Second Coming of Jesus Christ |
January
02 The Christ
Consciousness/the Mercy Consciousness |
January
03 The
spiritual path |
|
January 04 To
understand Reality through dreams |
January
05 The dead and the living |
January
06 The subconsciousness |
|
January
07 The Small Ring of Arrogance |
January
08 The thinking mind, the ego |
January
09 The Four Big Rings of Joy |
|
January
10
Trusting the True Self |
January
11
Self-praise |
January
12
The Tree of Life |
|
January
13
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order |
January
14
Improvement |
January
15
Holy
places |
|
January
16
To
draw nourishment from everything |
January
17
Death |
January
18
Psychotropics |
|
January
19
Accountability |
January
20
The pains of life |
January
21
The Ring of Emptiness and the Ring of Fulfillment |
|
January
22
Childhood faith |
January
23
Fear of love |
January
24
Building up an inner life |
|
January
25
Soul and Spirit |
January
26
Spiritual arrogance |
January
27
Limbo |
|
January
28
The meaning of life |
January
29
Artificial opiates |
January
30
The Holy Grail
|
| January 31 The soft heart |
January 01: The Second Coming of Jesus Christ
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE KING OF TRUTH, PAGE 76
It is said about Jesus that when he comes back he
will bear the name The King of Truth. TuTu was born on the 1st of
September 1956 in Madras, India. He bore the name Harishchandra, which
is the name of The King of Truth in Indian mythology.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 77
Many human beings have come across statements about the Second Coming of Jesus Christ and, nowadays, many are waiting for this event while many others think that such an event is an impossibility.
Yet others imagine that his promise of coming back again is not possible, and therefore they think that he spoke figuratively about his second coming and that, in Reality, he spoke about the return of his state of consciousness called the Christ.
However, the Christ Consciousness/the Mercy Consciousness has grown in humankind in the course of the past two thousand years, and it is thus not one event.
Most of us, who have read The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, have come to believe that the second coming of the person Jesus Christ has taken place, and that it ushers in a New World Order, like prophesied in the Bible.
Today’s contemplation
Today, I will open my mind to believing that Reality may hold events that I could not have dreamt up in my wildest imaginations.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1 THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE CHRIST CONSCIOUSNESS/THE MERCY CONSCIOUSNESS, PAGE 90,
Jesus was referred to as Christ.
Many use the two names at random but TuTu explained that it is essential to discern between the individual person Jesus and the universal field of consciousness called Christ, which Jesus came into the World to inform humanity about.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 90
The Christ Consciousness/the Mercy Consciousness expresses itself
differently in different people, depending on their personal inclination
and capacity, but for all who have attained the Christ Consciousness/the
Mercy Consciousness, it expresses itself in having a personal contact with
one’s chosen True Self, in having surrendered one’s will and one’s life to
the care of one’s chosen True Self, and in having achieved a spiritual
awakening to a state of mercy towards those, who are still suffering.
Today, many human beings have developed the Christ Consciousness/the Mercy
Consciousness.
This state of consciousness is achieved in many ways; one way, among
others, is by working the Twelve Steps in any of the 12-Step Fellowships
Anonymous.
Step Twelve is called the Step of Mercy, and this Step gives a human being
the capacity to practice love, care, compassion and mercy by passing on
existential information to those who suffer, both inside and outside one’s
12 Step Fellowship, so that existential burdens of the suffering become
easier to bear.
Today’s contemplation
Today, I will practice mercy with a fellow human
being by honestly sharing about my recovery experiences in an area that
brings this human being suffering.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
January 03:
The
spiritual path
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 2, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT LOVE WITHOUT LIMITS, PAGE 357
He and she began to form images
of their return, but depending on their capacity for image formation,
more or less precise images arose of the goal, which they called God,
but no matter how refined the images were, The Reality at the root
seemed to escape them, because no one could form an image which held
the sublime calm, the total unity and the perfect love that
reverberate in the cosmic being.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 359
Deep down,all creaturesmanifestations know that they
are an omnipresent, omniscient, omnipotent and immortal Spirit having a
temporary experience as a limited, ignorant, powerless and mortal
creaturemanifestation, and that their true Self, their Spirit, is
unconditionally loving, caring, compassionate and merciful.
When the Spirit of the creaturemanifestation originally projected
Himself-Herself into the first createdmanifested form that is called the
Soul, the Spirit's adventure as a creaturemanifestation began.
Gradually, as the Soul of the Spirit was filled up with experiences from
his/her long journey of life through creation’smanifestation’s many planes
of existence, the Soul began to long to return to his/her origin, and as
an answer to this longing, the Spiritual path opened up to him/her.
On the spiritual path, the aspirant gradually learned to become one with
hid/her true Self, his/her Spirit, and thereby it became possible for
him/her to experience life as his/her true Self, his/her Spirit.
Today's contemplation
Today, I choose to surrender to my true Self, my Spirit, and thus to my unconditional love, care, compassion and mercy towards myself, others and the World around me.JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 2, FACE TO FACE WITH THE MASTER,
THE SECTION A CLAIRVOYANT DREAM, PAGE 34
I thought it was best to avoid the mistakes and pondered over how to avoid the dream from coming true, but then realized that I couldn’t figure out how to avoid something which I didn’t know as to what it could be.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 36
Each night during the deep dreamless sleep, the creaturesmanifestations pick up life energy for yet another day.
On the way into the deep dreamless sleep, the movement goes through various planes of existence, where one can experience various happenings that can appear to be a dream, when the creaturemanifestation 'wakes' up and return to his/her physical Reality.
At times, teachings about future events take place on one of these planes of existence so as to make it easier for the creaturemanifestation in question to handle the events when they occur, and such dreams are called Clairvoyant dreams.
However, most dreams are recovery dreams that is about healing of nicks and wounds and lacerations that has been experienced in the course of the day, and for many, an understanding of their dreams is thus a path to Self-realization.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will keep a notepad and a pen next to my bed. I will write notes about my dreams from the night as soon as I wake up. I will use the content of my dreams to try to learn to understand myself and my Reality better.JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 5, CHAPTER 1, MY LIFE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION THE DEAD AND THE LIVING, PAGE 386
I told him that TuTu was with me most of the time, and he said that it
wasn’t good to hold on to the dead.
You should let go of them, so
they could move on and go to where they were going to be, and you
yourself could move on with your life.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 390
Many
human beings have had
experiences of being in contact
with a deceased person,
but this experience has
often been labelled as
madness by society, and
therefore many have kept
these experiences a
secret.
Now, however, researchers
have collected data about these
experiences at World level.
They have found out that
people, who experience their
life as a success, have
specific characteristics in common,
and one of these
is that they feel that
they are in contact with their
beloved deceased people.
In the New World Order
death shall seize to be as
prophesied in the Bible and
this is due to the release of humankind's
collective experiences in
this area.
Because this information is
supported by scientific research, it
can be confirmed by anyone,
who wants it, that
death is not the end of everything,
but merely a shape
shifting for both the
physical form and for that consciousness, who is leaving the physical
form.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will explore
my thoughts about
life and death and take
those thoughts to heart,
that brings me joy.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1 CHAPTER 4, THE PILGRIMAGE, THE SECTION 1001 NIGHT’S ADVENTURES, PAGE 72
These statements mystified me and made me think that there was some part of my consciousness knowing something, which the rest of me did not know, but it turned out that everything came to light.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 73
One can look at the subconsciousness as compared to the day-consciousness by comparing the subconsciousness with a ball the size of the Universe.
If one puts a small dot on the inside or on the outside of the ball, this can illustrate the day consciousness, and the ball can illustrate the subconsciousness.
Normally, one uses one's day
consciousness in the course of the day to make decisions and solve
tasks, and sometimes it can happen that the omniscience of Spirit, which
is the subconsciousness, breaks through the day consciousness so as to
use the thinking mind, the ego as a sounding board.
In this way this human being's Highest Self, his/her Spirit, sends a
vibrational impulse though his/her thinking mind, his/her ego so as to
give him/her guidance in an area that he/she has prayed for guidance on.
Then, his/her thinking mind, his/her ego translates the vibration into words that contains knowledge that he/she did not know that he/she possessed, and he/she can choose himself/herself whether he/she wants to follow the guidance now or later or not at all.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will pay attention to the guidance that comes from my Highest Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE RING OF PAIN OF THE WEST, PAGE 138
When The Ring of Arrogance becomes active in us, we feel above others when our needs are met (Superiority), and below others when our needs are not met (Inferiority).
When we feel we are less than others, we stay by ourselves to hide our vulnerability and our feeling of worthlessness (Isolation), and when we feel we are more than others, we fill up our time and space with people and activities to show off our superiority by the help of the number of people present in our lives and the numerous activities we undertake (Over-crowding).
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 141
Most have experienced that the energies of the Small Ring of Arrogance are active in them without them necessarily being aware that it is this particular energy field that they are in.
All creaturesmanifestations are limited, ignorant, powerless and mortal/changeable, and in that sense all creaturesmanifestations are brothers and sisters on an equal footing with each other; so, if existentially a human being perceives himself/herself as being superior or inferior to others existentially seen, it is not true, whether the others come from the mineral kingdom, the plant kingdom, the animal kingdom or the human kingdom.
Thoughts of being superior or inferior to others separates a human being from others, whether it happens by him/her isolating himself/herself from them when he/she feels inferior, or it happens by him/her making use of them to show off to others, when he/she feels superior.
When a human being is arrogant in his/her social life, he/she feels alienated from himself/herself and his/her life and others, whether the others come from the mineral kingdom, the plant kingdom, the animal kingdom or the human kingdom, and as a result he/she suffers.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will remember that all creaturesmanifestations are my brothers and sisters, whether they come from the mineral kingdom, the plant kingdom, the animal kingdom or the human kingdom.JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
January 08: The Thinking Mind, the ego
FROM THE CHAPTER THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT GOOD AND EVIL,
PAGE 358, PART 4
The darkness became deeper and
deeper, until she, in the end, lived in the outermost darkness,
completely isolated within herself, with only a spark of life-force
left, because the rest she had given to her thought
creaturesmanifestations.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 352
THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT Good and Evil describes how the thinking mind, the ego came into being, and how their ego createdmanifested the myth of good and evil.
The ego named as good the pleasant experiences in the Pendulum of Life, and the ego named as evil the unpleasant experiences in the Pendulum of Life.
By stepping back from the ego’s perception of good and evil, a human being can realize that all is good.
There is the pleasant good that gives joy, and there is the unpleasant good that gives wisdom and mercy.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will enjoy the pleasant good in my life, and I will make use of the unpleasant good to achieve wisdom and mercy.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM THE CHAPTER APPENDIXES, SECTION APPENDIX F, SIDE 401, PART 6
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 401
|
The Ring of Fulfillment with its fulfillment,
interest, meaningfulness
and oneness is the
root to let in all
the blessings of the World
into the life of a human being.
|
|
Today’s contemplation
Today, I will use the Ring of Fulfillment in everything I do.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM THE CHAPTER THE ANGELIC WEDDING, THE SECTION TAKING LEAVE OF THE
MASTER, PAGE 241
I waited for something to happen, but after a few moments, I accepted the idea that our departure would take place without any special reaction from his side.
At that moment, everyone was asked to leave the Master’s room, so he could rest.
People got up and streamed out, and when the last one had left, I hurried to step in, ready to withdraw if I ran into the slightest hindrance, but nobody objected and the doors were closed behind me.
I went over to his bed and sat down on the floor in
front of him.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 442
Many human beings often think that they have to do something extraordinary or that they have to push themselves or others to do something that does not feel like the right action for themselves or others so as to have their desires fulfilled.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION THE RING OF
SELF-CENTEREDNESS AND THE RING OF GOD-CENTEREDNESS.
Instead of praising myself for the successes I think I have achieved today and thereby creatingmanifesting a short-lived euphoria or elation about how good I think I am, I choose to focus on my gratitude, because my inner guides or the people in my environment were willing to help me by thinking empowering thoughts on my behalf and thus helping me neutralize my failures or transform them into successes.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 179
Many have experienced feeling so joyful that they actually felt euphoric, just to feel so pain stricken emotionally that they actually felt depressed a few hours later without them being able to understand how their mood could change that fast
Some got so scared of this shift in mood, that they got scared of getting to joyful about anything, because they did not want the depression that they believed would follow later.
Only, when they read The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, they understood that this change happened, because they had confused euphoria with joy, and that these two attributes belong in two different fields of energy.
Euphoria belongs in the Ring of Self-centeredness with its euphoria, depression, self-criticism and self-praise, and joy belongs in the Ring of God-centeredness with its joy, empowerment, open-mindedness and gratitude
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 5, CHAPTER 1, MY LIFE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION THE TREE OF
LIFE, PAGE 398.
As soon as I wrote it down, I knew that it concerned The Tree of Life, which is a graph, illustrating the power structures in the unfolding of life in the same way as the library-tree in a computer shows the branching out of programs, folders, files and their interrelation.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 398
The
intention of
the knowledge of the
Tree of Life – The Kabbalah
- is to
enable the user of the Tree to
study the emotional energies
that can show up
in his/her destiny
or his/her daily life,
so that he/she can
use these energies to his/her advantage.
In The Old World Order
many perceived their
emotional feelings as
evil when they pained
and as good
when they felt joy, and therefore the World Teachers/Teacheresses
mercifully ensured in
earlier times that people, who judged
their emotional energies
on the basis of good and evil, did not get
access to the Tree
of Life, as this
knowledge could bring
them suffering instead of the
freedom, which was the intention with the knowledge.
Today, the New World Order
has come into being, because humanity's
existential understanding has
reached a stage where every
human being can inventory his/her painful
emotional feelings without
perceiving them as
evil, because they
pain, and therefore
the World Teachers/Teacheresses
have now released
this wisdom to
anyone, who might want to
make use of it.
When, therefore, they use the Tree of Life to look
at the painful structures
in the trajectory of their
life, or at the
painful emotional structures in their daily
life, they can now delve
into the wisdom
at the root of the
pain, after which they can
use their self-healing
powers to recover
from the pain, and
then complete the process by transforming
their pain to
joy over their
new-found wisdom.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will inventory
my emotional
pains to obtain the
wisdom that lies at
the root of the
pain, and then
I will use my self-healing
powers to transform the pain to
joy
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION TUTU,
THE MASTER OF THE MASTER, PAGE 188.
Shri Krishna had used the Pranahuti process when he performed his
spiritual work, of which the most renowned example took place when he
taught Arjuna in the battle of Mahabharata.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 188
These are
times where great and
unusual events take place, because
the divine incarnation,
who let Himself be manifested
on Earth as
Lord Rama more
than seven thousand years ago in
Ajodhya, India, and
as Lord Krishna more
than five thousand years ago
in Mathura,
India, and as Lord Jesus
more than
two thousand years ago in
Bethlehem, Judea has
again chosen to let Himself be manifested on Earth, this time
as Lord Harishchandra in
Madras, India.
His manifestation on
Earth always and
without exception heralds
the reopening of the up sanded path
that leads back to the origin.
As prophesied in the Bible his
birth heralds a new Heaven and
a new Earth, because
the information he passed on
before his death to the Fellowship of
humankind, will give
humanity a new understanding
of existence.
His life's journey as Lord Rama was described in the
holy scripture the Ramayana, his life's Tierney as Lord Krishna was
described in the holy scripture the Mahabharata, his life’s Tierney as
Lord Jesus was described in the holy scripture the Bible, and his
life's Tierney as Lord Harishchandra is described in the holy
scripture The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, which is now
accessible at World level.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will use
the TuTu Doctrine -
The New World Order so as to
open my mind to the principles of
the New World Order and
thus to the miraculous
nature of Reality.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 3, THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, THE SECTION TUTU´S ILLNESS 3, PAGE 298
"Don’t they understand that your situation is acute?" I asked.
"Yes," he said, "but it is illegal for them to help me."
"Yes, but there are long waiting times in the treatment system," I said, "couldn’t they have given you some medicines to keep the alcoholism at bay until then?"
"That is also illegal," he said, "but you need not worry. I will try to find a solution."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 301
The spiritual level of a
society is seen in the way in which this society treats those
citizens, who need help the most.
Despite the fact that the Danish society, in which TuTu lived and
taught, is one of the World's richest and most humane societies and
treats its citizens with great love, care, compassion and mercy, there
are still areas that can be improved, like there are always and
without exception areas that can be improved in each person's
individual life.
This may mislead some of the members of the society to direct their
anger against the society, if they or one of their loved one’s have
suffered under areas that need improvement in this society.
This attitude is not conducive for the individual’s desire for
improvement of his/her society, neither for the him/her personally nor
for the society, whereas a loving, caring, compassionate and merciful
attitude towards the society can trigger miracles concerning those
improvements that the individual citizen in a society could wish for.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will use the principles of the New World Order to
improve my individual life and my attitude to my society and in that
way improve my character and the life in the society of which I am a
part.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 4, PILGRIMAGE, THE SECTION SECOND MEETING WITH TUTU, PAGE 66
After dinner, the conversation soon entered
spiritual issues and TuTu told us that his spiritual elevation had begun
already before he went further up the mountains.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 66
In India, the Himalayan Mountains are
perceived to be a shrine, and therefore many spiritual aspirants wish to
visit these mountains at least once in their lives.
All over on Earth, there are many such holy places that radiate a
vibration, which gives a spiritual aspirant the option of experiencing
spiritual states that the aspirant otherwise would not have access to.
These vibrations open the aspirant's mind in a new way, and as a result, he/she therefore experiences a new perspective on life, and some aspirants get addicted to these experiences in the same way as a heroin addict gets addicted to heroin, and they travel from place to place to intoxicate themselves in the vibration of the holy places.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 1, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE MASTER OF THE UNIVERSE, PAGE 345
By listening to the high
and the low, the inner and the outer, and evaluating how you can best
extract the essence of this and thereby
draw nourishment from everything.
Then, you must act accordingly.
Through this, the maximum harmony is achieved in this Master's field,
and your reward will be great."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, side 349
Many have a
tendency to feel uncertain
about what their
next right action could
be, and therefore it is difficult
for them to make a decision.
That can make them throw
themselves into action by
the help of the first thought that
comes to their mind, and when then they see
the result of their action,
frequently, they discover that
this action has not been to
their advantage.
Little by little this
teaches them to use level-headedness before
they decide what their
next right action should
be.
Therefore, they take time out
to listen to the
impulse from their omnipresent,
omniscient, omnipotent and
immortal/unchangeable true
Self, their Spirit
and to their limited,
ignorant, powerless and
mortal/changeable human Self,
before they act.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will use
the principles of the New
World Order to determine
what my next right
action should to be.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
I told her what I had experienced.
"When was that?"
"Around two weeks ago."
"Now let me tell you something in return," she said, "one week ago,
both his son and I dreamt about him on the same night, and we haven’t
dreamt about him since his death. In the dream, he said that we did
not have to worry about him anymore. He felt good now, and now he was
going to proceed."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 336
Many have learned
to fear the physical death,
while they were growing up, even
though they are actually surrounded by death
every single moment of every
day.
Constantly, every moment dies
into the next moment and all that
was in their field of experience a
moment ago has passed away with the moment that has passed, and also
their physical body is
in a state of constant
death.
Their baby-body is no
more, their
childhood-body is no more,
and yet most of them do not
lament this fact, and when their adult
body grows old and
is no longer functional, they know
that they are approaching the
final separation from their
physical body, and if they have not received
correct information, they might
think that it is
the end of everything.
However, a great many have
had experiences where they
have been in contact with their
departed loved ones, and
others have had near-death
experiences, and therefore
these people know that separation
from their physical body is
not the end of everything, and those, who
have not had such experiences can
choose to explore the
experiences of others so as to find out
if they find these experiences
plausible and trustworthy and thereby find
peace from their fear of the separation from their physical body.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will study
the death experiences
described in the TuTu
Doctrine - The
New World Order so as to find out
if I can find strength
in my relationship with
death by the help these
narratives.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 1, THE INITIATION, THE SECTION PSYCHOTROPICS 1, PAGE 18
I, my sister and her husband were excited about the World that opened up to us by the help of the hemp, and in the end, we smoked daily.
In particular we used the expanded states of consciousness to listen to music and talk about life.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 19
In the past spiritual teachers often used to initiate their disciples to the next step in their spiritual development by using psychotropics that were extracted from various plants.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 1, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE MASTER
OF THE UNIVERSE, PAGE 345
"Then, how do I choose among life and growth, sustenance and
maintenance, degradation and destruction?"
"By wishing. Your wish is the law of the Universe."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page
For most it is
easy to take responsibility
for that part of their
life, which is filled
with desires
that lead to actions that
createmanifest growth and joy for
themselves and others, and many can also
relatively easily take responsibility for that
part of their life,
which is filled with
desires that lead to
actions that maintain status
quo and preserve what
they and others have
achieved.
However, many have difficulties
taking responsibility for that part of
their life that is filled
with desires
that lead to actions that
createmanifest degradation and destruction
to themselves and others,
but as a spiritual aspirant, a human being has a need to
take full responsibility for his/her
desires, whether they lead to life
and growth, preservation and maintenance
or degradation and
destruction.
These powers have each their
role to play in the
drama of life, and only when a human being
accept full responsibility, he/she
can begin to examine how he/she uses
these energies.
Thus he/she becomes able to separate the energies that he/she no longer wants to make use of in specific situations and enhance the energies that he/she wants to make use of in specific situations instead.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 4, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS WHO WALK ON THE EARTH, PAGE 368
"Pain is a short-lived signal to act. Suffering is any attempt to avoid that action which the pain ordains."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 377
Life
holds many types of
pain, so a human being can experience
physical pain, energetic
pain, emotional pain,
mental pain and social pain.
In order to be able
to handle various pains, a
human being needs to first acknowledge
his/her responsibility for the
pains.
After that he/she needs to seek information about how best he/she can activate his/her self-healing powers to become able to recover from his/her pain on his/her various levels of existence.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION THE HIERARCHY OF THE ARCHETYPAL RINGS, PAGE 178
In Greek mythology the Ring of
Emptiness is called Pandora’s Box.
Pandora’s Box is said to bring all the sufferings of the World to the
one, who opens the box, and it is perceived to be the origin of all
our defects of character.
In the Fellowships Anonymous the Ring of Fulfillment is called the God
Box and in Hinduistic mythology it is called Sudarshan Chakra.
The God Box/Sudarshan Chakra is said to bring all the blessings to the
one, who opens the box and it is perceived at the origin of all of our
virtues.
TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 178
The Ring of Emptiness
holds mankind's most
painful thoughts and
emotions, and those actions that
spring from being in this Ring can lead to
the most painful states a human being can experience, and in
some instances the pains can be so intolerable for the person, who
experience them that he/she commit suicide or soothe his/her pain with
powerful drugs or alcohol.
By using the Ring of
Fulfillment instead of the Ring
of Emptiness a human being can replace
emptiness with fulfillment,
boredom with interest,
meaninglessness with
meaningfulness and
loneliness with oneness.
The Ring of Emptiness holds
pain and the
Ring of Fulfillment holds
joy, so when a human being
choose to use the Ring
of Fulfillment instead of
the Ring of Emptiness he/she moves
from pain to joy.
Many people imagine that it is difficult to use the Ring of Fulfillment, but is is not as difficult as they imagine, because if they can find just one thing that is meaningful for them to do, like for example taking a shower, go for a walk and so on, they have already set the Ring of Fulfillment into vibration and thereby all the energies in the Ring vibrates.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 1, INITIATION, THE SECTION CHILDHOOD FAITH, PAGE 14
God invented various ways to torment the evil ones until they became good.
Even if you shouldn’t think so, God loved the evil ones too and you could know that because he grieved when he had to torment them.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 14
In the Old World Order humankind createdmanifested
an image of God, which was in their own image and therefore were
subjected to their human limitation, ignorance, powerlessness and
mortality/changeability, and as such God could be unloving, uncaring,
hard-hearted and merciless, and therefore God could be revengeful over
human fallibility.
This perception of God’s revengefulness was connected with humankind's
immature existential understanding of God, whereas people in the New
World Order has grown in abstract thinking capacity, and therefore
they have the opportunity to createmanifest a perception of God as an
energy that is unlimited, omniscient, omnipotent and
immortal/unchanging, and therefore unconditionally loving, caring,
compassionate and merciful, and God therefore unconditionally forgives
human fallibility.
The image of God from the Old
World Order is still passed on to children in many places, and
without considering the human limitation,
ignorance, powerlessness and
mortality/changeability of adults, a child
believes that the
adults around him/her are
flawless and therefore
that the information that adults
provide him/her with
is also flawless.
The most intelligent
and courageous of
the children may ask to get a more
detailed explanation about the
information they have received, which
scares them, but
they are often rejected by adults,
who have difficulties admitting their
human ignorance.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will courageously
admit my ignorance, if
a child asks me a question
that I cannot answer on
the basis of my own experience.
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH
APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGUST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
PART 3, CHAPTER 1, THE EARTHLY WEDDING, THE SECTION THE FEAR OF LOVE, PAGE 194
I decided to write a letter to the Master instead
even if he had not met TuTu.
I wrote that I had met him in
Madras, and I felt like a leaf in the wind that would be swept wherever
the wind took it.
I feared that the wind took me away from him, and as I did not want
that, I would now leave the case in his hands.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 194
Many
imagine that when the
mutual love between themselves and a
partner
comes into their life,
love will fulfill them in such a way that
their happiness is assured.
When the meeting with
the mutual love between
themselves and a partner takes place,
they discover, however, that when the initial
joy of the meeting with
their partner has subsided, they begin
to experience emotional and
mental pains of
various kinds, and as a result fear
in many forms arises, especially
if the partner, who comes
into their lives is their
Spirit Mate.
Love cleanses them from
all false perceptions of
Reality, and this
cleansing process is both
painful and scary for
most.
However, they can ease their
fears and their pains
by taking earthly and
spiritual principles to
heart and use
them in their coupleship.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will take
earthly and
spiritual principles to heart
and use them in my coupleship.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 3, CHAPTER 3,
THE DIVINE WEDDING,
THE SECTION CAST OUT
OF SOCIETY, PAGE
276
To crown the work, the police
had gradually put together an
indictment, and I was convicted to 40 days in prison for
possession of heroin, which meant that now I had a criminal
record, and thereby, I was cut off from returning to my job and
had thus been cast out of society.
TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 277
For many it is important to feel as a part of society so as to be able to createmanifest an outer life that is satisfactory.JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 4, CHAPTER 5,
THE TUTU DOCTRINE, THE SECTION
THE FERTILIZED EGG, PAGE 373
"Be Aware that
you are
aware of your awareness."
TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 373
Many
people have
only a vague sense of their
Soul and
their Spirit, and
furthermore they have the impression that Soul
and Spirit are one and the
same.
In the The TuTu
Doctrine - The
New World Order he perspective on Soul
and Spirit is that the Spirit is the merged masculine and feminine
principle, and the Soul is the first createdmanifested body of the
Spirit, where the masculine and the feminine principle has been split
into two Soul Mates, a man and a woman.
The Soul Mates createdmanifested the thinking mind, the ego and
observe, how their creaturemanifestation put words on different parts
of existence.
The Spirit also observes HisHer creaturemanifestation, the Soul, and a
human being can come into contact with his/her true Self, his/her heir
Spirit by being aware that he/she is aware of his/her awareness.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will
let go of maintaining my focus on observing my thoughts, and instead
I will observe my Soul as often as I am
able to during my day.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 3, CHAPTER 1,
THE EARTHLY WEDDING,
THE SECTION TUTU AND
THE PRECEPTOR, PAGE
219
She said that she had had enough
now.
She had not come here to be taught by such a green pea.
TuTu Doctrine
- The New World Order,
page 219
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 3, SPIRITUAL
EXPERIENCES, SECTION SUICIDE, PAGE 45
During the meditation, I had a vision.
I saw a bright figure in front of a dark house.
Everything was in darkness, and the house wasn’t visible, but I knew that it was there.
In the distance, far behind it, I saw a whitish gleam.
The bright figure rushed restlessly back and forth in front of the house.
I could see the entrance of the
house and did not understand why he did not go through it so that he
could reach the light in the distance, but then I realized that he
could not see the door
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 46
Over
the centuries, information has circulated among humankind about
Limbo that is a place for the deceased, who cannot go through the
Gate of Death for some reason or other.
A person, who has committed suicide, is unable to go through the
Gate of Death, because he/she cannot see it.
That state of despair that drove him/her to suicide, is the state
he/she will find himself/herself in, until he/she is released from
it, when his/her true time to leave his/her earthly life has come.
Besides, such a human being will also feel a need to solve that
problem, which drove him/her to commit suicide, in an incarnation to
come, so that similar circumstances does not drive him/her to
despair anymore.
Today's contemplation
Although sometimes, I can be in a state of despair, I choose
to use the principles of the New World Order to take care of my
despair instead of harming my Mother Earth body.
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH
APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGUST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 2, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT
LOVE WITHOUT LIMITS, PAGE 357
The createdmanifested parts spread out
to acquire the experience of life, which was the purpose of
creationmanifestation, and to meet and separate and meet again and
thereby acquire knowledge of the pain of separation and the joy of
reunion, which is the life condition of the createdmanifested.
TuTu
Doctrine - The New World Order, page 359
Many have asked themselves the question: What is the meaning of life?
From the beginning of
creationmanifestation and at all times, the meaning of life has been the
same for all creaturesmanifestations, namely to experience life as a
creaturemanifestation on different planes of existence.
As pure Spirit the masculine and the feminine principle is one being,
the ManWoman - Ardhanarishvara – who rested in the Absolute merged in
perfect bliss, until a desire arose to experience the Eternal Beloved,
the One and Only, in a new perspective.
This desire set the ManWoman into movement, and thereby
creationmanifestation began anew with the purpose of experiencing life
as a creaturemanifestation in life after life so as to see the beloved
in a new perspective.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will remember that my purpose in life is to experience
life as a human being.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 3, THE DIVINE WEDDING, THE SECTION PREPARATION FOR
THE SPIRITUAL REBIRTH, PAGE 280
TuTu
said that Methadone was illegal in India because it dried out the
marrow of the bones and destroyed the fertility as opposed to
heroin, which is a natural opiate that does not createmanifest any
organ damage.
TuTu Doctrine - The New World
Order, page 280
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 4, THE FAIRYTALE
ABOUT THE GODS WHO WALK ON THE EARTH, PAGE 368
He lifted her compassionately and beamed
towards her with love, until she melted into The Ocean of Love.
Thus blessed, the Woman slowly and peacefully went out of the temple
yard to take her new life into possession.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 377
Ardhanarishvara
– the ManWoman, who holds
the merged masculine and
feminine principle, holds
both their individuality
and their
oneness, and these
are not
limited by any form.
Their oneness is called
the Ocean of Love, The Holy
Grail, God's Heart's
Heart, their
mutual innermost heart, their mutual
true Self, their mutual
Spirit, who holds the warmth.
Their individuality is called the Ocean of Creation, the Holy Seed and
the Holy Egg, God's Heart, their individual personal innermost Heart,
their individual true Self, their individual Spirit, who holds the cold.
All spiritual aspirants
yearn to drink from the
Holy Grail, the Ocean of Love, and
thus become able
to meet themselves and
everything and everybody everywhere
at all levels of existence
with unconditional love,
care, compassion and mercy.
Today's contemplation
Today,
I will
drink from the Holy Grail
and thus meet myself
and others with unconditional
love, care, compassion and mercy.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 2, THE ANGELIC WEDDING, THE
SECTION THE MELTED HEART, PAGE 245,
Little by little, as our talks progressed, my
heart gradually became softer and softer in compassion with the
sufferings of my former boyfriend, and when he asked me to stay
overnight, I said yes immediately.
We lay in each other’s arms, when suddenly I became aware of my heart.
It felt as if it melted, oozed out of my body like steam and left an empty hole.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 249
Gradually, as the spiritual development takes place for a spiritual
aspirant, he/she becomes more and more aware that all other
creaturesmanifestations are like himself/herself, because all forms have
that in common that they are limited, ignorant, powerless and
mortal/changeable forms of consciousness.
As a result of this understanding, it becomes easier for the spiritual
aspirant to identify himself/herself with the problems that other
Spirits may have with the forms that they have taken up residence in for
the time being.
Instead of hardening his/her lower heart in solar plexus against the
existential pains of others for fear of coming face to face with his/her
own pains, the aspirant allows his/her heart to be open to the
existential pains of others, and thereby the lower heart, the solar
plexus of the aspirant becomes softer and softer.
In this was the aspirant achieves a better and better contact with
his/her higher heart and thereby with his/her Christ Consciousness/the
Mercy Consciousness and this makes it possible for the aspirant to be
able to meet his/her own and others’ existential pains with love, care,
compassion and mercy.
Today's contemplation
Today I will use my own and others' existential pains to grow in
Christ Consciousness/the Mercy Consciousness by the help of the
principles of the New World Order, so that I can begin to live a happy
life on Earth.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
|
February 01
To return home |
February 02 Building
up of the psychological landscape |
February
03
The opening of The Third Eye |
|
February
05 Archetypes |
February
06
Return to the origin |
|
|
February
07
Constant Remembrance |
February
08
The four marriages |
February
09
Recovery from existential suffering |
|
February
10
God the Father and Goddess the Mother |
February
11
The Fruit |
February
12
To say no |
|
February
13
God's will |
February
14
The continuation of the Christ Consciousness/the Mercy
Consciousness |
February
15 Fear
of the consequence of love |
|
February
16
The Krishna-consciousness |
February
17
The Rainbow Goddess |
February
18 |
|
February
19
Lucifer |
February
20
The reincarnation thought |
February
21
Dharma and karma |
|
February
22
Radiation |
February
23
The humanity of the great spiritual teachers/teacheresses |
February
24
Bird Phoenix |
|
February
25
Confirmation |
February
26
The Light of Love |
February
27
Fear of fear |
|
February
28
The principle of anonymity |
February
29
Active Addictions Anonymous |
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 1, THE INITIATION, THE SECTION
GOALS OF LIFE, PAGE 18
I had had my wishes fulfilled, but they did not
extinguish that peculiar longing that I had within me, and which I
no longer could put a name to.
Christs Anonymous – The Thirteenth page 18
Many spiritual aspirants grow up and feel confused about not having
the same desires as their peers.
The general desires for human beings are to secure one’s material
welfare, preferably with a profession or a job that gives him/her
joy and to feel loved and safe in one’s social interactions.
For a spiritual aspirant, all these desires can be fulfilled without
him/her feeling his/her inner longing satisfied, and such people
become a seeker, seeking high and low for that, which can satisfy
him/her.
In the end, it becomes clear to the aspirant that only ‘coming home’
can createmanifest the satisfaction that he/she craves for.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will use the principles of the New World Order to
'return home` to my true Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 5, CHAPTER 1, MY LIFE WITH THE MASTER,
THE SECTION THE COMING INTO BEING OF THE BRIDGE, PAGE 392
"How many confirmations do you need?" he said
softly with a dry undertone, and his tone of voice made me realize
that I had received so many confirmations already that it was
about time that I started trusting my own perceptions of things.
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 385
Although all people have an inner life that they
cannot show to others just like that in the same way that they can
show the table in the living room, still, they all have an inner life
besides their outer life in the form of their sense of how their
health is, whether they have more or less energy today, whether their
emotions are joyful or painful, whether their thoughts are creative,
destructive, or neutral, whether their social life is harmonious or
disharmonious and whether their spiritual life enriches them or not.
Just like their outer life is individual and personal, their inner
life is individual and personal, and yet many have tried to have
confirmed from others that exactly their individual and personal inner
life is the true Reality compared to that of all others.
This attempt to do away with their doubts about whether their inner
experience is healthy or not, has even given rise to conflict among
some.
In the New World Order, human beings do not try to make others
confirm their perception of Reality, but they contribute with their
personal perspectives on Reality to those who show an interest in
that, and they take to heart from the perception of Reality of others
what they find useful for building up of their individual and personal
perception of Reality.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will build up my psychological landscape and my
spiritual life in a way that suits my individual and personal life
experiences and my understanding of the principles of the New
World Order.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 4, THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, THE
SECTION PREPARATION FOR CROSSING THE BOUNDARY OF DEATH, PAGE 305
One day, a couple of months after TuTu’s death,
I was in a café with a small group from one of The Fellowships
Anonymous, and one of those present told me that he stopped
smoking nicotine after a shamanic travel.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 305
Before human beings come to their spiritual path, they normally use their inner eye, also called their Third Eye, only when they dream in the night or form a memory image of an event or of a person.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE INDIVIDUAL, THE SECTION
DREAM INTERPRETATION, PAGE 181
Over the years, I tried to learn something about
dreams and I often returned to the dream I had the first time I
visited the Master, to find out what its message was.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 186
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 2 CHAPTER
1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE
SECTION ARCHETYPES, PAGE
104
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 102
Every single human being’s body form is unique even if the body form of a human being normally consists of the same elements; a head, a torso, two arms and two legs.
All these unique forms are createdmanifested in the archetypal field of energy called The Human Being, which is an energy field in the Totality that includes every aspect of being a human being, from the lowest to the highest.
Every human being is thus a part of the archetype called The Human Being and every human being holds all of humankind’s consciousness in his/her personal energy field.
This means that the spiritual experiences, social interactions, thoughts, emotions and actions of each human being are all registered in the archetype called The Human Being, and his/her way of being in the World is thus affecting all of humankind, if not in a conscious and awake state, then in an unconscious and sleeping state and in that way one person's happiness or unhappiness affects all of humankind.
Today's contemplation
Today I will choose to
cultivate my spiritual life, my social life, my thought life, my
emotional life and my actions in a way that is beneficial both to
myself and to all of humankind.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 2, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT LOVE WITHOUT LIMITS, PAGE 357
The perfect love of The Creator melted into the innermost recesses of her heart, which brought her back to the point before the initiation of creation.
Here, the perfect unity of the ManWoman lay in
serene calm, as uncreatedunmanifested thought, latent in the cosmic
being, resting in its perfection.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 58
Deep
down,
every creature knows that his/her
true Self, his/her Spirit
holds The Ocean of Love,
the Holy Spirit of the Fellowship that holds the warmth and the
Ocean of Creation, the Holy Spirit of Individuality that hold the
cold.
In The Ocean of Love,
the love that crosses the boundary of death is found, and in the
Ocean of Creation is found all of those latent thoughts that has
sprung from each and every form that his/her true Self, his/her
Spirit has brought to life from the beginning of Creation til now.
The latent thoughts that are an expression of the
individuality are decisive for
which forms will come into being at the beginning of
a New Creation, so this Creation is
not the first,
nor the last,
but is merely
an expression of the
breathing of the Universe.
Since 'the big bang'
took place, the Universe has
been expanding in
one long exhalation, but now the
inhalation has begun and that means
that the return to the origin has begun,
and the sleeping Spirits are about to wake up so as to
createmanifest a New World Order with wake Spirits
and thus a World Order with unconditional love, care, compassion
and mercy.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will use
the principles of New World Order to
allow my true Self, my Spirit to wake up.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
1, CHAPTER THREE, SPIRITUAL
EXPERIENCES, THE SECTION
CONSTANT REMEMBRANCE, PAGE
40
I also began reading his books and in one of these it said that
what I was doing is called Constant Remembrance, and that this was
one of his suggestions for training one’s capacity to focus
spiritually.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 40
The graph below is intended to illustrate
different states of mind.
The circles are intended
to illustrate the mind and
the dots to illustrate the
thoughts.
Normal Reflection Contemplation Concentration Meditation
The common movement from normal thinking activity to meditation goes
through reflection, contemplation and concentration and then to
letting go of all thought activities and enter into meditation.
In
meditation, human beings are in
oneness with their
true Self, their
Spirit, and thus
they are also in
oneness with God and
thereby with everything
and everyone everywhere at all levels
of consciousness too.
By constantly returning to the meditative state they train their
capacity to be in oneness with their true Self, their Spirit and
with God and thus with everything and everyone everywhere at all
levels of consciousness.
Today's contemplation
Today,
I will use Constant Remembrance to constantly
return to my true Self, my Spirit by being present in the NOW.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
3, CHAPTER 2,
THE ANGELIC
WEDDING, THE SECTION PURIFICATION
FOR SEXUAL JEALOUSY
AND POSSESSIVENESS 1,
PAGE 234
"It is wise of
TuTu to confront
me with a
woman who arouses my
compassion rather than
my jealousy," I thought, "it
will make it easier for me to
overcome my jealousy."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 235
A couple
can experience four
marriages.
The first one is
the earthly marriage,
which is the union of the
two physical bodies, and the
second one is the angelic marriage,
which is the union of
the two hearts.
The third one is
the Divine marriage, which
is the union of the two
Souls, and the fourth one is
the spiritual marriage, which is
the union of the two spirits.
In the earthly marriage
the biggest challenge is that the couple is
coming face to face with their sexual jealousy
and possessiveness, which inflict
excruciating pain on the couple until
those feelings have been
transformed to compassion with one
another.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will work
on liberating myself from my
sexual jealousy and
possessiveness by the help of
the principles of the New World Order.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
Till this point, I had not thought of myself as arrogant or impatient, but after the sitting I decided that I will not allow myself to be like that anymore.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 29
Gradually, as the thoughts of a spiritual aspirant leads to more and more emotional pain, he/she begins to investigate his/her thought life to find out what thoughts lead to emotional pain, and what thoughts lead to emotional joy.
Little by little, as he/she maps out his/her psychological landscape, he/she becomes aware that the thoughts leading to painful emotional feelings, are the thoughts, which in the old days were called sins and in modern use of language for defects of character, and that they are called defects of character, because they do not fulfill the unconditionally loving, caring, compassionate and merciful intention behind his/her use of them.
As a result of the discoveries of the aspirant, he/she wants to find a way out of the pain, because it leads to suffering, if he&she does not act as the pain ordains, and little by little he/she becomes aware that he/she needs help to learn to let go of his/her defects of character and the pain they cause to have her desires fulfilled.
He/she can seek help to map out his/her psychological landscape by following the guidance about the use of The Constructive and The Destructive Rings as suggested in The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order and by taking the Doctrine itself to heart like described in part four of The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will investigate The Constructive and The Destructive Rings in The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order plus the Doctrine itself to find out how best I can liberate myself from existential pains.JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
2, CHAPTER
1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE
SECTION GOD THE
FATHER AND GODDESS
THE MOTHER, PAGE 81
TuTu explained that God the Father holds the power of creation and
Goddess the Mother holds the power of manifestation.
Creation took place as a result of the love between the power of creation and the power of manifestation.
TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 81
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4. CHAPTER 5, THE TUTU DOCTRINE, THE SECTION THE FRUIT, PAGE 386
THE
FRUIT
GOD IS EVERYTHING.
EVERYTHING IS GOD.
I AM GOD.
YOU ARE GOD.
HE IS GOD.
SHE IS GOD.
IT IS GOD.
WE ARE GOD.
YOU ARE GOD.
THEY ARE GOD.
THE
PATH IS YOUR LOVE
TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 386
For many human beings it has been a long journey to accept themselves as Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
4, CHAPTER 3,
THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT GOOD AND EVIL, PAGE
363
By thus veiling the pain of the process of creationmanifestation,
the first alienation arose in the form of the first light veil
around part of her Spirit’s knowing mind, and seen through this
veil, the expulsion transformed into a rejection.
TuTu Doctrine
- The New World Order,
page 364
The pain of
rejection goes all the
way back to the beginning
of Creation, because the Soul veiled
the original pain that
occurred when the
masculine and the feminine principle
was split in two,
a ‘he ‘and a ‘she’ in that nuclear
fission which is called 'the big
bang' in modern
use of language.
By veiling
the pain from the expulsion of the
cosmic womb, the expulsion
could be perceived as a
rejection and this primordial
pain is stirring every time a human being
encounter resistance
or receive a no to
any one of
his/her desires.
As he/she does not want to inflict
the pain of rejection on another
creature, it may be difficult for most
human beings to say no,
when another creature
wants something from them.
However, the primordial
pain was not a
rejection, but the
pain of the process of Creation, and it
is important for the
integrity of a human being and for others’
perception of Reality that he/she has the
strength to say yes, when he/she means yes, and to
say no when he/she means
no.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will explore how to
say yes and no in various
ways that
I am comfortable with.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 2, FACE TO FACE WITH THE
MASTER, THE SECTION GOD’S WILL, PAGE 27
One day, another disciple asked the Master about it, and laughingly
he answered: "Yes, but the opposite is also true.
God’s will does not move without the creatures wanting it."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 28
Many imagine
that God wants something
specific from them,
and therefore they
want to know God's will so
they can surrender to it
and in that way make God like them and give them what they want.
Since God is omnipresent,
omniscient, omnipotent and
immortal/unchangeable and thus
holds everything and everybody
everywhere at all
levels of existence, there is nothing they can
give to God
that God not already has.
God in turn can give
them everything they want, and
every desire, they express
to God will be fulfilled
in the long run, unless they choose
to let go of it.
When nevertheless they seek to know
God's will for them, in Reality they are
seeking to know their own will for
themselves, as it
expresses itself at this stage in
their understanding of Reality.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will seek
to know God's will for me
so that I can know my
own will for me as
it is at the present time in
my existential
understanding.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
2, CHAPTER
1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE
SECTION THE PRINCIPLES IN CHRIST
AND THE PRINCIPLES IN TUTU,
PAGE 91
A person can merge his/her consciousness into the field of
consciousness called Christ by carrying out the 12 Steps in the 12
Step Program of Active Addictions Anonymous – The Wild Life and then
direct his/her consciousness towards TuTu by working the Program of
Christs Anonymous – The Thirteenth Step, and in that way prepare
himself/herself to attain the field of consciousness called TuTu by
the help of his/her Other Half – his/her Eternal Beloved.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 91
Some believe that they do
not need the opposite sex to
achieve perfection and
that it has been obtained,
when the masculine and
the feminine pole in a
human being has come into
perfect balance, so that the
thinking man has become emotional
and the emotional woman
has become thinking, but
this balance is entirely
an internal personal
balance between thoughts
and feelings.
Such a human being still
needs to createmanifest balance between
the inner and the outer,
and this is
achieved most easily in interaction with his/her Spirit Mate, where
he/she is the inner for himself/herself and her Spirit Mate is the
outer for him/her, and furthermore he/she needs to createmanifest
balance between the high and the low,
and this happen by
the help of the TuTu Consciousness,
which is the
continuation of the Christ Consciousness/the Mercy Consciousness,
and in the Christ Consciousness/the Mercy Consciousness a
human being has achieved a conscious contact
with his/her True Self, has surrendered
his/her will to his/her True Self’s care and is compassionate to
those that still suffer.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
3, CHAPTER 4,
THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING,
SECTION FEAR
OF THE CONSEQUENCE OF LOVE, PAGE
291
After we made love, I said that I would like him to move back home.
He said yes, and at that moment I got scared.
So often, I had some spiritual experiences together with TuTu that led me into a state of ecstasy, just like now, but all of which turned out to fade again at little later.
Just think, if I relapsed into heroin from living together with him.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 291
Love
is
a revolutionary Power
that can change a
person's life completely by turning
his/her values upside down
in a very short time.
Besides this love purify a human being from all false perceptions
that he/she has about himself/herself and about God.
In the Old World Order
this was called
the Purgatory in the
New World Order it is called to live
through the purifying Power of Love by
moving through the Magical Forest of dancing peacocks and daemons.
Therefore, when a person stands face to face with
love, he/she
is seized by great fear, despite
the fact that he/she has
imagined that the only thing he/she
wants is to meet his/her
Spirit Mate, his/her Eternal
Beloved.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will make
myself ready to meet my
Spirit Mate as best as I can,
by purifying my mind
from all false perceptions
of Reality by
the help of the principles of the New World
Order.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 1, THE EARTHLY WEDDING, THE SECTION THE SEED OF LOVE, PAGE 207
Lord Krishna is that archetypal sphere
of consciousness in the seventh dimension which radiates The Seed
of Love.
To achieve the Krishna consciousness, the spiritual aspirant has to empty his/her lower heart of all earthly desires.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 207
First
time a consciousness
took birth
on Earth descending straight
from the field of consciousness of Lord Krishna,
he opened the spiritual path for
everyone on Earth in
a new way by the help of the Seed of
Love that Earth now
received a direct injection
of by the help of Shri
Krishna and the
144,000 empty, lower hearts that he
impregnated with the Seed of Love by the help of
the Pranahuti process.
These 144,000 had
had all of their earthly desires
fulfilled in the course of life
after life, and now
their only desire was
to experience love, and
it was this desire that
brought Lord Krishna down to
Earth in flesh and blood as
Shri Krishna.
He injected the
Seed of Love on the
same day into the empty, lower hears of
all the 144,000 men
and women, and
he also taught humankind
how they could make
themselves ready to
receive the Seed of
Love by emptying their
lower heart from
all earthly desires.
They can empty their
hearts from
all earthly desires by
doing their best to
fulfill all their desires and
furthermore seek help
to fulfill those desires
that they can not fulfill on
their own, and slowly, this empties their
lower heart from all
earthly desires, and thus
their lower heart, their solar plexus becomes ready
to receive the Seed of
Love.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will do
my best to fulfill my
desires, and I
will seek help
to fulfill
those desires that I can
not fulfill on my own.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
4, CHAPTER 1, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE MASTER OF THE UNIVERSE, PAGE
345
She bent reverently and said:
"Oh Rainbow Goddess!
You, the wisest of all women.
I have come to you to seek wisdom.
I have been told that you can enlighten me about
the Master of the Universe.
Then, tell me, how do I find him?"
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 346
The sixth
dimension is the
plane of wisdom where
all thoughts about life
as a creature comes
into being by the help of the thinking mind,
the ego that takes a
stand on all the experiences
of a human being and ascribe
certain characteristics to them.
A human being, who has
become able to look
at life with wisdom,
have discovered that words
can be used to point to the
physical Reality, but
they are not physical Reality itself,
and therefore such
a human being choose to
use words with great caution.
In the spiritual
life of humankind such
a human being is called an enlightened human
being, a Buddha, if
it concerns a man
and a Tara, a Rainbow
Goddess if it concerns
a woman.
Many people have perceived the
thinking mind, the
ego to be the villain
in their adventures
as creatures, but
now time has come where
they can begin to see their
thinking mind, their
ego as that being
that expresses himself/herself in
all the colors of the rainbow and that being that eventually will
lead them to wisdom.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will
choose to look at my
thinking mind, my ego
as a multi-faceted diamond
that shines in all the colors of the rainbow and
that will lead me to wisdom
gradually, as my
existential understanding
develops.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
3, CHAPTER 3,
THE DIVINE WEDDING,
THE SECTION SEXUAL
FREEDOM, PAGE 278
I wanted the freedom to respect and follow the swing
of my own sexual feelings during lovemaking, and that wasn’t
possible in connection with prostitution, because the man paid for
me to respect and follow his sexual feelings and put aside my own
if they weren’t in harmony with his, and that I did not want to do
anymore.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 278
In the
Old World Order, it was common
for spouses to
think that it was the job of their
spouse to make them happy, and
generally that implied that it was
the job of any spouse to
satisfy his/her spouse
sexually.
In the New World Order,
each person is responsible for his/her
own life and thus for his/her
sexual life.
This implies that each spouse needs to give himself/herself permission to take care of his/her own sexual needs without having to feel that he/she has to pretend that he/she has some sexual feelings that are not there, or that he/she does not have some sexual feelings that are there so as to take care of his/her partner’s feelings and make him/her feel safe.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1. THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION LUCIFER, PAGE 99
They began cursing the day they were createdmanifested, and said that they would not have gone out if he who went out first had not done so.
His name was Lucifer, the light carrier, whom God loved, because he loved life under all circumstances.The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 99
When Spirit emanated from
the Absolute so as to
experience life as a creature,
his/her long journey as
a creature began on the
Soul Plane, where
his/her Soul was his/her first
limited, ignorant, powerless and mortal/changeable body.
In this process, the merged masculine
and feminine principle was
split into two - the
masculine principle and the
feminine principle - and
also the merged darkness
and light was split into
two - the
darkness and the
light.
He, who went
out as a creature first
was called Lucifer,
the light bringer, because
his action brought
light into the World in
the form of the first visible form, the Soul.
He loved life as a creature under all circumstances, because he held on to remembering his true self, his Spirit and thereby he remembered love under all circumstances.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 4, PILGRIMAGE, THE SECTION THE PALM LEAF ARCHIVES, PAGE 60
One day, I managed to get access to the Palm Leaf Archives, which were found in this city.
I heard about these archives at the Master’s farm.
They were said to be spread out all over India, and they were supposed to contain information both about past, present and future lives for everybody who has ever incarnated in Madras.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 60
The first time the spiritual aspirant encounter the
idea that he/she has lived as a human being in life after life after
life, many of his/her experiences come to stand in a new light.
For many of the spiritual aspirants, the new light that he/she sees
his/her life in can be so rewarding that it may appear to him/her that
the idea of reincarnation is too good to be true.
If he/she therefore wishes to confirm the idea of reincarnation
through his/her own experience, he/she can get together with others,
who want the same thing, and who are doing inner travels on their own
time track or participating in regression therapy .
When thereby he/she comes into contact with his/her previous life,
he/she can know from personal experience that reincarnation is the
fact according to his/her opinion.
Today's contemplation
Today I want to explore the idea of reincarnation by finding
information or participate in groups that can make it possible for
me to take it to heart.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 2, THE ANGELIC WEDDING, THE SECTION DHARMA AND KARMA, PAGE 229
I had learned that dharma is that part of my destiny which has createdmanifested ties from where I have to go through the effects of my constructive acts, and karma is that part of my destiny from where I have to go through the effects of my destructive acts.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 229
Those people who
desire to return to the
origin, has been
on the spiritual path in
life after life.
They have searched high
and low for a direction that could lead
them to their origin, and many
of them had got the
impression that they should become
saints, people who
exclusively make use of constructive
actions, so they could achieve
an advantageous destiny.
Furthermore, they should
avoid destructive
actions so as to avoid a
painful destiny.
Gradually, as their
existential understanding
grew, they realized that
it was neither beneficial for the
fulfillment of their desire
to try to achieve an
advantageous destiny or to
try to avoid a
painful destiny, but on the contrary to
receive whatever
came to them from their
neutral point, the
point of their true Self, their
Spirit.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will accept
what comes to my lot from
my neutral
point, the point of my true
Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 2, FACE TO FACE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION THE MASTER’S RADIATION, PAGE 36
The quivering unrest which surrounded them vibrated through the sublime peace that existed on the Master’s farm, and which I had become a part of.
First, when I experienced the contrast, I
understood how the Master’s radiation had affected my state of
being.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 36
When a spiritual aspirant moves around in his/her psychological landscape, he/she can make short or long stays in various energy fields that are called Painrings and Joyrings in the TuTu Doctrine - the New World Order.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 4, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS WHO WALK ON THE EARTH, PAGE 368
I have been told that you can enlighten me about
the Gods who walk on the Earth.
Then, tell me how it happens."
"They project their heart down on Earth, and attire it in flesh and blood."
"How do they attire their heart in flesh and blood?"
"By emerging from the love between man and woman
and letting themselves be born by the woman like anybody who is born
on Earth."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 369
Through the ages,
humankind has attempted to imagine
what it would be like
to be one of the great
spiritual teachers/teacheresses, who
came to Earth to teach humankind about the
components of existence.
Many of these fantasies have
have given the impression that
they were not limited, ignorant, powerless
and mortal/changeable,
like it is the case for
each and every creature.
This has been great
detriment to the spiritual
aspirants, who wanted walk
the path that their chosen spiritual
teacher had done, because
it gave the impression that the
spiritual teacher in question was the
only one, who could walk that path.
The task of
the spiritual teacher in question
was exactly to come to Earth
and show how you could
walk the spiritual path, although
you are a limited, ignorant, powerless
and mortal/changeable
human being.
Today's contemplation
Today, I
will in particular study how my
spiritual teacher walked the
spiritual path in spite of his/her
human limitation, ignorance,
powerlessness and mortality/changeability.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION ANGER AND REVENGEFULNESS, PAGE
One day, I came across a guideline in one of his books, which read: "Don't be revengeful about mistakes done by others. Receive them in gratitude as heavenly gifts."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 168
When
a spiritual aspirant becomes angry and revengeful because of
mistakes, which he/she thinks that others have done towards to
him/her, it is connected with that he/she believes it makes his/her
life more difficult than it needs to be.
Gradually, as the spiritual aspirant becomes able to apply the
principles from The TuTu Doctrine - the New World Order,
he/she becomes able to choose to look at the pain he/she experiences
as a gift, which gives him/her an opportunity to grow in
wisdom/Buddha-consciousness and mercy/ Christ-consciousness, instead
of being stuck in the pain by becoming angry and revengeful because
of it.
The process, which the spiritual aspirant uses to transform his/her
pain to Buddha-consciousness and Christ-consciousness, is called
Bird Phoenix, because the aspirant rises from the ashes of his/her
pain to new life, when the pain itself has been burnt to ashes.
By using the principles of the New World Order a person can achieve
rising to a new life on a daily basis like the Bird Phoenix that is
burned to ashes every single day only to resurrect as a new, wiser
and more compassionate being the following day.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will use
the principles of the
New World Order to handle my
life's pains
like
the Bird Phoenix,
so I can rise
from the ashes of the
pain as a new, wiser
and more merciful
human being
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 1, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE MASTER OF THE UNIVERSE, PAGE 345
"The Universe is one but the
perspective is different for the atom and for the galaxy.
Thus, there is an infinite number, and it cannot be said about one
that this is The Universe and about another that it is not."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 346
The Universe
offers a human being an infinite number of
possible perspectives on
Reality, and
even when two people
look at the same
flower, it will not be possible for
them to have the same perspective on
the flower.
Many times, human beings imagine, however,
that their perspective on
Reality is more in line
with Reality than
other people's perspective.
This idea is an expression
of their need to have confirmed
that their perception
of Reality is in line with Reality
itself
This need can lead to many long discussions with people, who do not have the same perspective on Reality as they do themselves, or it can lead to others, who understand their need for confirmation, confirm their perception on Reality, even though their perspective on Reality is different, and thus they miss out on the inspiration others have to offer.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 4, THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, THE SECTION THE REALM OF DEATH, PAGE 316
According to his opinion, TuTu was in the mildest of the conditions, which could be due to a person dying under the circumstances that he did.
Then he asked if I would like to help TuTu to move on.
"Can you do that? I always believed that it was the departed people who helped us and not the other way around"
"It happens both ways."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 316
After having left the
physical form a person enter into a
meditation, where he/she
meets God's Light of Love
and looks at
his/her life in two days in the Light
of Love.
In that state, he/she
look at his/her life
from a perspective that
he/she did not have in many cases,
when he/she found himself/herself in the
physical form.
However, it is a
short-lived wisdom, which often
runs out when the
meditation is completed
and the deceased moved
on to life in the
Higher Worlds, and
in some cases the
deceased is so dazed
that he/she believes that he/she
is dreaming.
After the meditation,
the deceased usually
returns to the state of
wisdom, which corresponds
with the state of wisdom that he/she
had while he/she lived on
earth, and his/her life in the Higher Worlds is
formed accordingly.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will invest
my time, energy and
interest in achieving
wisdom by expanding my existential
understanding.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 5, THE 2©2
DOCTRINE, THE SECTION THE SEED OF LOVE, PAGE 379
THE
SOUTH
THE FEMININE
THE EMOTIONAL
Don’t fear the fear of fear
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 379
The feminine principle, the
emotional, both in men and women is to be compared to the feet, that
walk on the Earth, and the masculine principle, the mental, both in
men and women, can be compared to the head, protruding into the
Heaven.
The person use the feet to feel
his/her way forward on Mother Earth
to find out how he/she can
best move forward safely.
The head protrudes into
the Heaven so as to
make contact with his/her true
Self, his/her Spirit that holds the
direction in which the feet
need to go.
The masculine principle is the giving and the
feminine principle is the receiving, and the biggest hindrance in
both men and women for the opening of the
capacity to receive of the feminine principle,
which makes him/her able to receive the gifts of life is the fear of
a future consequence of a
present action or the
fear of what kinds of fear
could be the future consequence of a
present action.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will
let go of the
fear of experiencing fear
because of future
consequences of my present actions.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE FOUNDATION OF THE NEW WOLD ORDER, PAGE 95
Anonymity is the spiritual foundation of The New
World Order, and that means that it is not the personal data, life
story or behavior of the individual person which shall be focused on
but how earthly and spiritual principles work in this person’s life,
and therefore no person can evaluate another person or another
person’s life or behavior by looking at it from the outside.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 96
To achieve the unconditional joy
in his/her social life, his/her Soul Life, the spiritual aspirant
needs to be able
to meet his/her fellow human beings
with unconditional
love, care, compassion and mercy, and
those spiritual aspirants, who use the TuTu Doctrine – The New World
Order as a guideline for their actions, use
the principle of anonymity for this
purpose.
This means that they do
not try to judge
their fellow human beings with
a yard stick which is
about right or wrong, good
or evil, but instead, they choose to
look at them as at themselves,
namely as a Spirit,
who experiments with
life as a human being.
If their
fellow human being does
something, that their own
experience has shown them, will lead to pain
for their fellow human being or
their fellow human being’s
surroundings, they know from their
own experience that it
is because their fellow human being is yet in the
middle of his/her process of
learning.
So the spiritual aspirant does not
interfere in the process of learning of his/her fellow human beings
unless asked for help and even so, the spiritual aspirant only
chooses to help, if it would bring himself/herself joy to help out.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will use
the principle of anonymity in
my social life by
refraining to judge another human being’s pain by looking at if
from the outside.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE COMPLETE BRIDGE TO THE NEW WORLD ORDER, PAGE 94
TuTu said that, to
complete the Bridge to the New World Order, AcAdAn,
which stands for the 12 Step
Fellowship of Active Addictions Anonymous also has to come
forth.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 94
Since the majority of humankind has forgotten their
their true Self, their Spirit, the World Teachers/Teacheresses have
createdmanifested a portal to the New World Order where a human being
can return to his/Her true Self, his/her Spirit.
This portal is the Twelve Step Programs of the Fellowships Anonymous,
which makes it possible for the spiritual aspirants to achieve a
spiritual awakening to their true Self, their Spirit.
Active Addictions Anonymous is the basic Twelve Step Program that
embraces the sufferings that spring from the painful dissatisfaction
of the spiritual aspirants with their human limitation, ignorance,
powerlessness and mortality/changeability, and furthermore a long
series of sufferings are to be found that are being addressed by
specific Twelve Step Programs with focus on that one suffering.
The miraculous recoveries, which happens as a result of a person’s
participation in a Twelve Step Program has given a great deal of the
World’s spiritual aspirants their personal spiritual awaking, so that
they are now part of the New World Order, where a person asks his/her
own heart for guidance instead of asking priests, rabbis, mullahs and
brahmins.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will to use the principles of Active Addictions
Anonymous to recover from my dissatisfaction with my human
limitation, ignorance, powerlessness and mortality, so that I can
achieve oneness with my true Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
|
March 01
|
March 02 |
March 03
To see beyond the physical |
|
March
05 Belief-systems |
March
06
Evil |
|
|
March
07
Dracula |
March
08
Fairy tales |
March
09
To seek guidance |
|
March
10
Telepathy |
March
11
Our physical heart |
March
12
Parents and children |
|
March
13
Fellowship and individuality |
March
14
Hearsay |
March
15
Self-createdmanifested
limitations |
|
March
16
Admittance |
March
17
Unselfishness |
March
18
The Truth |
|
March
19
The twice born |
March
20
The Kabbalah's
perception of God |
March
21
than... |
|
March
22
The Purgatory |
March
23
The Light and the Darkness |
March
24
To
help others |
|
March
25
Destruction |
March
26
The sleeping beauty |
March
27
The Ruler of the Universe |
|
March
28
Reincarnation |
March
29
Karma |
March
30
Shiva, the Destroyer |
| March 31 Demons |
FROM PART 6, CHAPTER 1, APPENDIXES, THE SECTION APPENDIX R: THE SMALL, MINI, MICRO AND NANO RING OF TRUTH, PAGE 420
The Small Ring of
Truth: Humility, honesty, individuality and Fellowship.
The Mini Ring of Truth: Equality, tolerance, accuracy and
affiliation.
The Micro Ring of Truth: Respect, genuineness, precision and
togetherness.
The Nano Ring of
Truth: Sincerity, simplicity, reliability and familiarity.
Christs Anonymous – The Thirteenth Step 421
In
the psychological
landscape of humankind a human being
comes into contact with many different
energies, both single energies
and energy patterns.
Many are stuck in an
energy field that they actually
want to move out
of, because it pains them,
and moreover, they want to
remain in another energy field,
because it is joyful for them without them being capable of
remaining in the field that is joyful for them.
In order for it to
become possible for them to have their
desires fulfilled, they need to
receive information about
that, which can make
it possible for them to fulfill
their desire to leave a
particular energy field or
extend their stay
in another energy field.
Readers of the TuTu
Doctrine - The
New World Order receive the
required information that they can use
for the required training to achieve
the capabilities that enables
them to fulfill their
desire.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will follow
the suggestions in the TuTu
Doctrine - The
New World Order so as to develop
my capacity to
fulfill my desire to make
my stay in pain short lived and
my stay in joy long
lived.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION LUCIFER, PAGE 99
We chose to manifest as
Quadruplets together with another couple, who wanted the same, and
thus we manifested in four directions - the North, the South, the East
and the West - and in that way, Four
became the first positive power factor in the creationmanifestation
where the invisible is the negative, the darkness or the Spirit, and
the visible is the positive, the light or matter.
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 99
Most spiritual aspirants are so used to seeing the negative as
something they want to avoid that it has distorted their view on
existence, because the negative is the unmanifested, who is Spirit,
who is their true Self.
Any pain, whether it is material, physical,
space-time-energy-related, emotional, mental or social is due to the
separation from the aspirant’s true Self, his/her spirit.
Until the spiritual aspirant began to get glimpses of oneness with
his/her true Self, his/her Spirit, he/she had lived in complete
oblivion of who and what he/she is deep down and it has caused so
huge existential pains for him/her that he/she eventually had only a
desire.
The desire consisted in stopping the denial of his/her true Self,
his/her Spirit and return home to himself/herself in the inner and
experience his/her outer journey by the help of the unconditional
joy inside his/her true Self, his/her Spirit.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will remember my true Self, my Spirit and thereby
become myself again so I can become able to rejoice in
experiencing life through all my createdmanifested forms.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 5, CHAPTER 1 , THE SECTION THE AVATAR OF SYNTHESES, PAGE 395
Until
I ‘looked’ at the photo, I had put the merged form of the
ManWoman in the middle of an oval with two sharp edges, but when
I ‘looked’ at the photo, this graph got its final form.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 397
When
many spiritual aspirants were newcomers
on the spiritual path,
a great deal of them got confused
when their mentor
or spiritual teacher
said that they should look
inwards instead of outwards.
They wondered how they
could possibly do that, but
little by little as their
understanding of what it
meant to look inwards grew,
they realized that it
meant that they observed their
emotions and thoughts about
the physical Reality that
surrounded them while at the same
time, they observed the physical Reality.
As a result,
they began to take a stand on the
thoughts and emotions that they
experienced in context with their
physical Reality,
and thus they discovered
that their mental
and emotional Reality held
information about their physical
life that they advantageously could take a stand
on.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 4, PILGRIMAGE, THE SECTION TUTU'S EGO DEATH, PAGE 64
On a foggy night on his way to Kathmandu, he had lost his ego.
He was walking alone on the road and for no reason he was seized by fear, and in his agony, he walked and walked.
At some point in time, it became clear to him that it was not he who felt this fear but his ego.
He had some
visions, and when they stopped, he
became completely calm and understood that he had passed through
the ego death.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 64
The
thinking
mind,
the ego
holds joyful, painful and
neutral thoughts plus a state of
no thoughts.
Many spiritual aspirants have been
very preoccupied with the painful
thoughts that go
through their thinking
mind, their ego
and have seen
them as their personal
thoughts without being aware
of that it is
part of the human condition to
experience pain in various
areas of their existence,
so their painful thoughts
are not theirs alone,
but they belong to the entire Fellowship
of humankind, and as a result of
this realization they began
to stop taking their thoughts so
seriously.
Next, they began to
put a question mark on those of their
thoughts that pained
them, and often they also
chose to reframe those
thoughts so they were transformed
to joyous thoughts,
and eventually they stopped letting
their actions be
dictated exclusively by their thoughts.
When they no longer let their
thoughts dictate their
actions, their thoughts had lost
their power over them, and they had
now become the Lord
or the Lady
in their own house by
choosing to act from
the Soul plane
and thus act with
love, care, compassion and mercy towards
themselves and others no matter what
took place in their
thinking mind, their
ego, and thereby they
were said to have gone through the ego death.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will put a question mark on
those of my thoughts that
pain me by choosing
to hold on to a new thought that feels better, and,
thus I will make myself the Lord/the
Lady in my own house.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1 , CHAPTER 1, THE INITIATION, THE SECTION CHILDHOOD BELIEF, PAGE 14
One
day, a priest threw me out of the church saying that it wasn’t a
place for children.
That convinced me that God and Jesus really didn’t like me, and
now I joined the evil ones, who thought that God didn’t exist,
and who spoke about him in demeaning ways, if he was mentioned
at all.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 17
As children
have no clear perception of what
is true and false about
life on Earth, they take the
information from their surroundings to heart, until
the opposite is proven.
When they receive information
from their parents, their
teachers or other adults,
they have confidence in that adults
inform them in ways that are
to their advantage, because
innermost they know that the
adults mostly have their best
interest in mind.
When therefore, they receive information about
areas that are not
visible to the naked eye, they
believe that they need
to take this
information to heart to
get an advantageous life
experience.
If the adults around
them are misinformed
about the invisible
Reality, they pass on this
information to the children, and
therefore the children need
to examine their
belief systems
as young adults so as to
let go of the information that
is not in conformity with
their own experiences of Reality.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will use
the principles of the New World
Order to examine my
belief systems
and put those away
that I do not want
to preserve and strengthen
those that I do want to preserve.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 3, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT GOOD AND EVIL, PAGE 363
As evil, the ego designated the unpleasant and frightening images, which she felt an irresistible urge to investigate and thus createmanifest excitement in the monotony of the imprisonment, and by this urge she createdmanifested life and growth in these ideas and in these images, and thus she herself gave life to the unpleasant pole of the pendulum of life.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 365
When Spirit, decided to experience
life as creatures, Spirit was the only being that was, so the
opportunity to experience life as a creature demanded a work of
creation that put a limit on the unlimited, and thus began the
process of creating a form by crystallizing Spirit into a form.
The first crystallized form of Spirit is the Soul that consists of
a light veil of crystallized Spirit that limits the omnipresent
Spirit from His/Her omnipresence.
The next crystallized form is the thinking mind, the ego that
consists of a form that is a more compact form crystallized by
Spirit.
The newly createdmanifested thinking mind, the ego continued the
creative process by creating strings of thoughts of pain and joy,
which are thought forms in many varieties.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will remember that my thoughts has no physical
Reality unless I choose to manifest them in action, whether they
are painful or joyful.
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH
APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGUST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
FROM PART 3,
CHAPTER 1, THE EARTHLY
WEDDING, THE SECTION
DRACULA, PAGE 197
He had found out that when love for the beloved is powerful, fear
could rise that love would overpower him/her to such an extent
that he/she lost his/her own willpower and was transformed into a
zombie whose life energy is sucked out by the vampire, because the
he/she could not resist his/her urge to serve her love in ways
that were contrary to his/her own desires.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page198
Many human beings have
been fascinated by
the archetypal description of Count Dracula,
who stays alive
by sucking blood
from others.
Thus he transforms
them into zombies -
the living dead, who
are not in touch with their own
heart, and thus with their own
desires, and their only
purpose becomes to
serve his desires, and many have
shuddered from fear
by thinking that
such a destiny might
come to their lot.
This fear can come
into play, when they meet their
great love, their Spirit Mate because
their natural impulse
is to surrender unconditionally
to their love and
do everything in
their power to delight and
please their beloved.
The fear of becoming a
zombie, whose life
is only concerned about delighting
and pleasing their beloved can
cause many disturbances
in their love
life, but those
people who have entered the New World
Order, follow the principles
that make it possible
for them to surrender to the
love of themselves in
such a way that they do not have to
be afraid of losing
themselves in the
love for another.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will use
the principles of the
New World Order to learn to
love myself unconditionally so
that I need not fear
to
loose myself in
my love for
another human being.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
2, CHAPTER
2, THE PERSONAL,
THE SECTION THE
FEMININE ARCHETYPE OF THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, PAGE
170
In my opinion, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT
the prince on the white horse is an archetypal description of
that couple that wish to
return to the Absolute love, seen from the feminine perspective.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 170
Many spiritual aspirants have given up hope that fairy tales are part of Reality, but readers of the TuTu Doctrine – the New World Order discoverer little by little that fairy tales express the Highest Reality in a symbolic form.
Fairy
tales are
archetypal descriptions of
various experiences that a
person can encounter, described
so simple that even
children can understand the
spiritual principles inherent in
a given fairy tale.
THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT the
prince on the white horse that
comes to a woman and
completes her life
in the big wedding
– the spiritual
wedding – is
thus not a fantasy, as
many seem to think,
but wisdom about the
core of existence that
is passed on to children,
which may make many
little girls take some
major decisions about
how they want to live their
lives.
THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT the
poor boy, who heroically
sets out on a
dangerous mission so as to win the heart of the
princess and thus achieve completion
of his life
in the big
wedding - the
spiritual wedding –
is in the same way also an archetypal description,
intended to transfer
the basic principles of
existence that can make many
little boys make some major
decisions about how they
want to live their lives.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will
investigate, which fairy tale
fits into my secret perception of Reality, so
that I can investigate what energies that play out in my
archetypal/energetic Reality.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER
1, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE MASTER OF THE UNIVERSE, PAGE 345
"Time is short, and therefore, you may approach all
Masters at the same time by addressing them with the word Master
or the word God.
In the course of the day, any time,
you may address them in this way and ask for help and guidance,
and then you can be confident that help will come, and they will
reveal to you what is your most important decision, in the HERE
and NOW."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 348
In
the course of
a day, most people receive a lot of
help from others with
their projects, and they actually have
so many options to
choose from that sometimes they can
find it hard to decide
what their next right
action could be.
Thus, they find themselves in the
field of pain from
the Nanoring of Envy with
its uncertainty,
uncultivatedness, indecision and
rashness.
They can move to
the field of joy
from the Nanoring of
Hope with its certainty,
cultivatedness, resoluteness and
level-headedness, which is the antidote to the Nanoring of Envy,
by seeking guidance from
their chosen True Self
about, what they need
to do, if anything, right HERE
and right NOW.
If they find it
difficult to surrender to the
guidance that comes to
them, they can use the principles of the
New World Order to make themselves
entirely ready to surrender.
Today's
contemplation
Today, I
will both use guidance
from my chosen True
Self and from the
principles of the New World Order so
as to find clarity, when I
need help to make
a decision right HERE
and right
NOW.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 1, CHAPTER 2,
FACE TO FACE
WITH THE MASTER, THE
SECTION TELEPATHY, PAGE
24
Slightly stooped, he came towards us, and at that instant a
thought that I knew wasn’t my own arose in my mind: "Who disturbs
the peace?"
In a breathless moment I realized that telepathy exists.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 24
In
Reality telepathy
takes place all the time,
and the reason why most
people are not aware of it, is
that they believe that all their thoughts
are their own, and
that nobody else have the same thoughts.
They can develop their
capacity of discernment in
this area by beginning to observe,
when thoughts pass
through their mind that
they do not recognize as their
habitual way of thinking.
Little by little, as
they observe these
special areas of telepathic
transfers of thoughts from others to their
thinking mind, their
ego, they become better
and better at discerning
their own thoughts
from those of others.
However, this does not liberate them from the
responsibility of taking care of these
thoughts, in the same way as their interactions
with others in their social
life do not liberate them from taking a
stand on those people they interact with.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will take
responsibility for the thoughts
that pass through my
thinking mind, my ego,
whether they emanate from
myself or others.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 3, CHAPTER
2, THE ANGELIC
WEDDING, THE SECTION
TUTU'S HEART, PAGE
251
He answered that it was my own heart I heard, but I thought that
at least I was able to decide if it was my own or his heart I
heard, and I decided to pray for the poor galloping heart.
Now, I understood that he had spoken the truth, and that it was thus my own heart I had been praying for.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 252
When a human being surrenders to his/her innermost heart by giving and receiving unconditional love, care, compassion and mercy, even his/her physical heart becomes calm.
Readers of the TuTu Doctrine – the New World Order choose to use the principles of the New World Order to learn to act, feel and think in ways that are unconditionally loving, caring, compassionate and merciful, so their physical heart can feel good.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER
1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE FIFTH STATEMENT, PAGE 159
The child, at all times, has the right to follow his/her own
ideas and perceptions of what will make him/her happy, while at
the same time, being willing to listen and follow the guidance and
advice of the parents, but having the right to respectfully
decline the suggestions from the parents, if there is a conflict
between the two.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 160
For
thousands of years
humankind has
lived in tribal
communities, where it
was important that they submitted
themselves to the norms and rules of
their tribe, and this has lead to that
human beings have tried to educate
their children to
follow the norms and
rules of their tribe, so that the
children could achieve
the best possible life.
In the last two
thousand years, humankind has
had a need to step out of the
flock mentality, and that
has happened by the help of the
masculine principle, God, the Father and God, the Son, who
holds the individuality.
The development of humankind's
individuality has now
reached a stage, where the
human being needs to
learn to love, care for and be
compassionate and merciful
to their own individuality and that of others by the help
of the feminine principle Goddess, the Mother and Goddess, the
Daughter, and this
also applies to the individuality
of their children.
The children are
dependent on the parents in many ways,
but it does not give the parents the permission
to neglect the
children's individuality or to fail
to respect it, and therefore
it is essential both for
the parent's own and for their
children's development that
they use the principles of the
New World Order so as to
find a way, where they can
respect both their own and their
children's individuality in their
interaction with them.
Today's contemplation
Today, I
will respect my own individuality
and that of others, also if it is people,
who are given in
my care by my
True Self, and who is therefore completely in my power.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 4, CHAPTER 4
THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE
GODS WHO WALK ON
THE EARTH, PAGE 368
"Yes, I came back to separate the sheep from the goats and to
lift the veil from The Veiled Woman, The Holy Spirit, and thereby
make clear the distinctions between the feminine and the masculine
and thus put everything in its right place."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 370
When
humankind at large lived in
a
tribal society, their
survival depended on that the
tribe acted as a group and
thus achieved greater power
of action and capacity to survive and
as a result the flock mentality became predominant.
Gradually, as
humankind built up larger and
larger groups in
cities, the flock mentality became an obstacle for the
development of the life of humankind.
Thereby time had
become ripe to develop the
individuality of a human being by
the help of the mental that is held by
the masculine principle – God,
the Father and God, the
Son – a man and
his Soul, and today, the
individualization of humankind has
reached a stage, where the development
of unconditional love, care, compassion
and mercy for each
person's individuality is required.
This is most easily done through
Fellowships that adhere to Spiritual
principles, and therefore,
the World Teachers/Teacheresses createdmanifested
a portal for this
development by the help of the feminine
principle – Goddess, the Mother and Goddess, the daughter, in
woman and her Soul – in the form of the12
Step Programs that are to be found
in the Fellowships
Anonymous.
Today's contemplation
Today I give
myself permission to
respect my individuality with
unconditional love, care,
compassion and mercy.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 3, THE DIVINE WEDDING, THE SECTION IGNORANCE, PAGE 272
I was relieved to be able to exclude what I had read about handling chemically dependent people, and asked TuTu to move back home again, and that he did.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 273
In
the
attempt to understand their
existence, the spiritual aspirants can make
use of many sources
to form an impression of, how they can
achieve their spiritual goal while at the same they live their
daily human life.
Many choose to seek
information in humankind's
sacred books and many other books and
writings that are written about existence,
and many also choose to seek
information from spiritual
teachers/teacheresses that they feel
attracted to, and who holds a variety of
convictions and creeds.
Wherever they seek their
information, the
information they receive is
and will remain hearsay no matter how
many books that
are written about the same topic
or how many spiritual
teachers/teacheresses they listen to even
if these spiritual teachers/teacheresses maybe agree
with each other about a particular
area of existence.
Even if this information can give the spiritual aspirants a
pointer about what direction it can be to their advantage to put
to the test, they can not know
the usefulness of the
information they receive, until they have
tested the theories in
practice and decided,
what is true for them
personally.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will put the
principles of the TuTu Doctrine – the
New World Order to the test so as to
determine what is true for me
personally.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 3, SPIRITUAL EXPERIENCES, THE SECTION SELF-CREATEDMANIFESTED LIMITATIONS, PAGE 43
My disappointment was so intense that I decided to go to India again even if I did not have the money for it.
I
took a closer look at my finances and found that it could be
done comparatively easily, and thereby, for the first time, I
made the discovery that many things I did not think possible
proved to be so if I began to act as if they were.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 43
If
a human being find himself/herself in
the Small
Ring of Envy with
its disbelief,
superstition, submission and defiance,
it createsmanifests many
obstacles for him/her to begin his/her
projects or fulfill
his/her desires.
When he/she finds himself/herself in
this energy field he/she does not
believe that what he/she wants
is possible to get, and
furthermore, he/she
imagines that God, his/her
spouse, family,
friends or boss,
should give him/her, what
he/she wants, without him/her
even having to do anything to
get it.
So he/she submits to what
he/she believes God, his/her
spouse, family,
friends or boss wants
from him/her, hoping that
this will set
his/her project in
motion or
fulfill his/her desires.
When then he/she finds that it
didn't give any results, he/she
becomes defiant and
gives up his/her project and
any attempt to get
his/her desires fulfilled, and
thus he/she refuses
to make that effort, which is
needed from his/her
side, while at the
same time he/she believes that there
were so many obstacles that
his/her project was impossible
to carry out or his/her
desires could not be fulfilled.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will
investigate the obstacles that
I believe are
blocking me from completing my project
or fulfill my desire.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION ARROGANCE 2, PAGE 167
Then, I was told that I had to first accept possessing the feeling of arrogance to be able to investigate under which circumstances it arose and what results I achieved from the actions I did under the influence of my arrogance.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 168
In
the Old World Order, many called the use of various
characteristics for sins, and for example, it could revolve around
avarice, envy, hatred/suppressed
anger and arrogance, and in the New World Order these
characteristics are called defects of character.
In the past, sins were perceived as a flaw in the character of a
person, and when they came to expression they were perceived to be
bad people, and this has lead to it being hard for people to admit
their use of their sins or defects of character.
Instead, they try to suppress them or to hide them, but in the New
World Order, they need to admit their use of their defects of
character, so they can begin to investigate their effect in their
life and the ways in which their use makes their life
unmanageable.
As a result of admitting how they use their defects of character,
they achieve the capacity to transform them by the help of the
Destructive and the
Constructive
Rings as described in The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will admit my use of the characteristics of the
Destructive Rings and begin to replace them with the
characteristics of the Constructive Ring as described in TuTu
Doctrine - The New World Order
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 4, PILGRIMAGE, THE SECTION THE MAGICAL RING, PAGE 53
"Yesterday I
helped an old man, and today we come into possession of a magical
ring which was made from
seventeen metals," I said, "that makes me think of the fairy tales
from my childhood, where an old man comes out of the forest in
need of help. If someone helps, the person
receives a magical present."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 53
In
most situations, people try to maintain balance on all levels by
the help of an equal distribution of their resources, and
therefore,
they contemplate what benefits
there might be for them in
spending their time, energy, money
and interest in
those contexts they are
part of.
Sometimes, it can
happen that they want to contribute
their time, energy,
money and interest
without considering what
the benefit for them might be by
doing so.
This is call unselfishness, and
the fairy tales/the
archetypal narrations, describe
the consequences of
such unselfish actions
that normally results in the
unselfish person receiving a
magical gift, which he/she could have
not imagined.
The fairy tales/the
archetypal narrations also
tell that if a person tries
to act unselfishly in
an attempt to achieve
a magical gift,
the action is no longer unselfish,
but done in order to
gain an advantage and this does not release the
magical gift.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will
give myself permission to openly
stand by what I
hope to achieve by
investing my time, money,
energy and interest
in a project and leave to
my True Self to give
me an impulse to
be so unselfish that it releases a magical
gift.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 4, CHAPTER
5, THE TUTU DOCTRINE,
THE SECTION THE SEED OF LOVE, PAGE
379
THE NORTH
THE MASCULINE
THE
MENTAL
The Truth is that the truth is not the truth.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 379
Many
spiritual aspirants
have
read many books to
find the path ahead, and
they have received guidance
from many spiritual
teachers/teacheresses with information
about the characteristics
they must cultivate so as to
become one with their
true self, their
Spirit, and in this context, they have often
heard that they must tell
The Truth at all costs to
get to the core of any issue.
However, many of them did not know that Truth
can not be thought,
said or written, because
no matter how many times they think,
say or write the word
chair, the word will
never become the chair
so the word is a mere pointer pointing
to the chair that is
The Truth to some
extent, because he chair is crystallized
Spirit and as such,
it is the only
The Truth to a certain
extent, because Spirit
is the only Truth
there is.
When spiritual
teachers/teacheresses nevertheless
urges the spiritual aspirants to tell The Truth,
it is because they need
to createmanifest pointers
that their thinking
mind, their ego
can relate to, when
they try to express their existential
understanding, so that
they can achieve inspiration by sharing it with others.
When the spiritual aspirants share their perspectives with
others, they know that they share a
limited understanding of
their limited perspective
on Reality as
it unfolds right NOW
and right HERE,
no matter how far they have
come on the
spiritual path..
Today's contemplation
Today, I will accept
that The Truth can
not be thought, said or written,
so my Truth consists
in my limited
understanding of
my limited
perspective on Reality,
as I perceive it right NOW and
right HERE.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 4, THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, THE SECTION THE TWICE BORN, PAGE 292
“I was exposed to a car crash," she said, "both I and the car were completely smashed, and I was unconscious for a long time.
When I came around, I could neither stand nor walk and had to rebuild myself from square one.
During the rehabilitation, I had to reconsider everything that I had felt and thought until then, and I changed viewpoints on practically everything.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 293
The
physical birth
of a human being is his/her
entrance to Mother
Earth, and it
gives him/her a Mother
Earth body, who needs time
to reach his/her full maturity.
His/her parents and
his/her surroundings
give him/her many
explanations concerning his/her joys
and pains that sometimes
make his/her life easier, and
sometimes make his/her
life more difficult.
When he/she is fully grown as
30-year old, he/she therefore needs
to go through a rebirth
by taking a stand on all
the information he/she has received in
life until now.
This process he/she can use to rid himself/herself of the painful information that is not true for him/her and take those to the heart, which are true for him/her and this way he/she is reborn into a new life that is entirely his/her own.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 5 , CHAPTER 1, MY LIFE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION THE TREE OF LIFE, PAGE 398
Meaning of 0:
God.
Definition: Everything and nothing.
Explanation: God is nothing in Himself/Herself/Itself, but changes
everything's value by being added to the right side, the
hierarchy, or left side, the Fellowship, like 0 is nothing in
itself, but changes the value of all numbers being added to the
number.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 400
Mathematics is the most precise and neutral symbolic language that is available to humankind, and by the help of mathematics the spiritual teachers/teacheresses of the past have createdmanifested the Tree of Life, which is a mathematical system human beings can use to study the energy structures of their life.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION THE SMALL RING OF ARROGANCE, PAGE 150
When we feel we are less than others, we stay by ourselves to hide our vulnerability and our feeling of worthlessness (Isolation), and when we feel we are more than others, we fill up our time and space with people and activities to show off our superiority by the help of the number of people present in our lives and the numerous activities we undertake (Over-crowding).
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 150
People have many
reasons to try to make themselves smaller than they are, because
they fear the envy of others, if they give themselves permission to
show their strongest and most beautiful characteristics.
When they became familiar with the Constructive and the Destructive
Rings of the New World Order, they became aware that such an action
belongs in the Small Ring of Arrogance with its superiority,
inferiority, overcrowding and isolation.
They also discovered that the twin of the Small Ring of Arrogance is
the Small Ring of Hatred with its denial, manipulation, illness and
insanity, and that their use of the Small Ring of Arrogance
activates the Small Ring of Hatred in others.
Their loving intention with
making themselves smaller than they are
simply was an attempt to make
others feel comfortable in their
company, so they could achieve a flowering
social life, but
their loving
intention towards themselves
and others is
not being fulfilled by the help of
the pain of arrogance
and hatred that
they unknowingly inflict
on themselves and others by making themselves smaller than they
are.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 2, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT LOVE WITHOUT LIMITS, PAGE 357
They were together both to clean themselves of false images of Reality and to help each other to live through difficult facets of the experience of life, and also to merge their knowledge into as perfect an image of Reality as they held in between them, before they went out wandering in the cosmos again.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 360
In contemporary
society it has become common for os both as men and women to openly
acknowledge that we are waiting for our Spirit Mate, our One and
Only.
Artists in many genres have formed an image of what it means to meet
our Spirit Mate, our One and Only, and these images are often full
of sweetness, passion, fidelity and otherworldly love.
Therefore, it comes as a shock for most of us that this is only one
half of the picture, because the other half of the picture consists
in an intense painful purification.
All false notions about God, about love, about life and death, and
about good and evil are cleared away, and this enables both of us to
double our spiritual growth in a single lifetime.
Today's contemplation
Today I will let go of my fear of mental-emotional pain,
remembering that it leads to wisdom, because I use the Rings of
Pain and Joy from the spiritual Program of the ToTo Doctrine for
the transformation of the pain.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 4, THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, THE SECTION SURRENDER TO GOD THE FATHER AND GODDESS THE MOTHER, PAGE 317
[Crying of
relief, feeling deeply moved and grateful for the beauty of what I
experience I acknowledge my true nature].
Yes… and I am of the light, and I am of the
darkness.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 327
Through
years in the thousands the Light has been considered to be good,
and the Darkness was considered to be the evil without most of us
having wondered whether this is true.
Gradually, as we move forward on the spiritual path through
studies of the big religions of the World however, we discover
that the light and the darkness are equal partners.
The Light represents matter, which is all the created and
manifested, and the Darkness represents the spiritual, which is
all the uncreated and unmanifested.
The Light and Darkness meet in Grey that is the love-making act
between the Light and the Darkness, and therefore it is said that
dawn and dusk are the ideal timings to meditate to get in touch
with the highest expression of love of the Universe.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will meditate at dawn or at dusk to make it easier for myself to get in touch with the highest expression of love of the Universe.JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 4, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS WHO WALK ON THE EARTH , PAGE 368
"How do I decide if it is my task to help?"
"If you, in your heart, once stood in the same place as your neighbor and would enjoy helping, it is your task to help."
"If I never stood in the same place in my heart, is there nothing I can do then?"
"You can show your neighbor the way to someone else, who once stood in the same place in his/her heart and would enjoy helping."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 372
Most
of
us want to help our neighbor, if we can, but it is not as easy and
straightforward as we maybe think, because if we do not have experiences
with the problem, our neighbor is facing, in Reality we cannot help.
Even when we have found a solution to a similar problem in our life, it
may not be a solution our neighbor wants to use, so we let go of the
desire to help if our neighbor does not want to use our solution.
If
that
is the case, we admit to our neighbor that we are unable to help
further, and if we wish and would be happy to do so, we can refer our
neighbor to another helper.
If
our
neighbor is interested in this, we can connect the two, and when this
work is completed, we can let go of the task in question, knowing that
we have made our full contribution to a solution.
Today's contemplation
Today I will contemplate if I have the capacity and would be rejoice
in helping to help a neighbor who has asked for my help, before
deciding for myself whether it is the right thing for me to help
.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 3, THE DIVINE WEDDING, THE SECTION INITIATION TO SHIVA, PAGE 278
We went home, and he stood in front of a poster of Shiva, who danced with flowing hair in a ring of the fire of the sun on top of a little green dwarf.
"This
dwarf is a symbol of the ignorance," he said, "Shiva is dancing
his cosmic dance on top of ignorance, and slowly breaks it down,
while he beats his drum: BUM, BUM, BUM, BUM, BUM, BUM…”
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 279
Many of us connect
destruction and annihilation with the painful and the unpleasant and
creation and manifestation with the joyful and the pleasant.
When we as human beings want to create and manifest something new
however, we need to destroy and annihilate the old that stands in
the way of the new.
When we begin creating and manifesting, we discover that it can be a
painful process to give birth to what we want to create and
emanifest.
As a result of this realization, we gradually let go of our
reluctance towards destruction and annihilation of the old even if
it can lead to sorrow and pain.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will use my realizations about the true nature of
destruction and creation to let go of my fear of destruction and
annihilation at all levels of my existence.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 1, CHAPTER
3, SPIRITUAL
EXPERIENCES, THE SECTION SIGNS
FOR MY MEETING WITH TUTU, PAGE
43
Later,
it would prove that the dream showed the state
of confusion and weakness I was in when
TuTu came into my life, and that this was actually the energy
pattern or archetype of The Sleeping Beauty that I experienced in
this context.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 46
At
the beginning of creation and manifestation the merged masculine
and feminine principle projected a mirror image of himherself into
the The Sea of Love.
In the projection a nuclear fission took place, where the merged
masculine and feminine principle was split into two, a 'he' and a
'she', each with their personal Soul that were the first
manifestations of crystalized Spirit.
When the two Spirit Mates are full of days as creatures in the
crystallized manifestation, the journey back to the origin begins
by both of them beginning to withdraw all of their projections
from form-identity.
Approaching the end of their separation his and her only desire is
to become one again with his and her Spirit Mate, and this is
described in the fairytale about the Sleeping Beauty, where he
wakes her up to the eternal love with a kiss.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will give the fairytale about the Sleeping Beauty the
Reality value that is due to it, and therefore I will open my
mind to seeing that life on Earth is a fairytale in space and
time.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 1, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE MASTER OF THE UNIVERSE, PAGE 345
"You are, beyond
any doubt, the unlimited ruler of the Universe.
It is you who decides if you wish to
be in the light or in the darkness.
If you wish to serve well or poorly.
If you wish to be loved and honored or feared and despised."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 350
When we as human beings acknowledge
our true Self, our Spirit, at the same time the work with taking
full responsibility for our bodies begins - our physical body,
energy body, emotional body, thought body and social body.
As the manifestation process evolved, as our true Self, our Spirit
we manifested our bodies in our personal energy field, and thus
the work began with further developing and refining our bodies.
In our social body, our Soul, who is our Spirit’s, first
crystalized body, our true Self, our Spirit has stored all
knowledge about all of our bodies that are our creatures, from the
beginning of creation until now.
The work consists in fulfilling the needs and desires of our
creatures and thus take care of ourselves physically, time-space
wise, emotionally, thought wise, socially and spiritually as the
Absolute ruler of our personal Universe that we are.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will take good care of all my bodies by making sure
that they are well-rested, well-groomed, well-nourished and
well-exercised.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE ETERNAL LIFE, PAGE 152
TuTu explained that many years ago the consciousness of The Eternal Life was only present in prophets and spiritual teachers/teacheresses who had the task of guiding humankind.
Today, it is
present in many who have memories from their previous incarnations
and in many others who have chosen to have confidence in that
reincarnation is a fact.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World
Order, page 152
When
we as Spirit projected a crystallized form of part of ourselves
out into our personal energifield, the intention were to
experience ourselves from a new perspective as a Soul that were
limited by form and thus ignorant, powerless and mortal
In our Soul’s manifestation we split in two, and this split made
it possible for us to interact with each other in a new way, but
at the same time this created fear of loosing our connection with
our other half.
As Soul we encapsulated this fear in it’s own energy field and
this became our causal body that consists in our thinking mind,
our Ego and our knowing mind, our Godmind.
Our Egomind overshadow our Godmind with it’s fear of everything
that gives rise to all angerforms, until we choose to meet our own
and everybody else’s Egomind with mercy, so the fear can be
transformed to wisdom.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will use the 12 Step Program of the TuTu Doctrine’s
Fellowship to attain access to my Godmind and the knowledge of
the Eternal life.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 2, THE ANGELIC WEDDING, THE SECTION TIME TRACK TRAVELS , PAGE 262
After a conversation with the group, they wanted to show me what they were able to do and offered me a free test of four sessions.
I moved into different previous incarnations on my own time track and was impressed by the process.
Afterwards, I
discovered that a chronic bladder infection
that I had had for sixteen years had disappeared as a
result of the four sessions.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 262
In
the same way that we can travel consciousness wise back to a
memory from our childhood, we can travel back in time using the
tecnique of time track travels to travel to memories of previous
lives in a process called regressions.
The purpose of time-track travels is to find a greater
understanding of present time pain that is our karma, which is
that side of our destiny where we live through the painful
consequences of our previous dysfuntional actions.
In the 12 Step Program of the TuTu Doctrine’s Fellowship/TTDF, we
learn to stop our spiritual, social, mental, emotional, energetic,
physical and material pains by transforming them to wisdom with
the help of the Constructive and Destructive Rings.
By using these Rings to transform our existential pains to wisdom
we come under the Law of Mercy and thereby the slate is wiped
clean from karma in the area in question from all the incidents
where we expressed that particular dysfunction.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will pair the pain of the Destructive Rings with the
joy of the Constructive Rings and thus attain wisdom in an area
that pains me today.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 3, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT GOOD AND EVIL PAGE 363
The love of The DestroyerDestroyeress radiated mercifully towards her, and she humbly sat down at the foot of the throne to meditate.
The
Destroyer’sDestroyeress's perfect mercy melted into the innermost
recesses of her heart, which brought her back to the time after the
initiation of the creation and manifestation, and she found herself as
a manifested creature when time came into being.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 364
Many of us as spiritual aspirants associate destruction with the undesirable, but when we begin to work with the principles that are described in The TuTu Doctrine - New World Order, we take a closer look at this perception.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION DEMONS , PAGE 175
For a long time, the concept of demons had appeared scary to me, but when, at long last, I acknowledged my defects of character and compared them to descriptions of demons, I realized that the concept of demons is used to symbolize the various characteristics and their consequences, which are also described in the form of the defects of character found in the Rings of Pain.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 175
So
many of us perceive a demon as a being that loves to torment and
torture others, and because we perceive ourselves as good human beings
we therefore perceive a demon to be a being outside ourselves.
As members of the 12 Step Fellowship of The TuTu Doctrine – The New
World Order however, we receive new information about demons as
being energy fields, called defects of character that is found in our
psychological landscape.
In Step Four we learn how they expressed themselves in our life from
childhood till now and in Step Six we learn to consciously move into and
out of them by the help of the Destructive and Constructive Rings.
This
work
also helps us to stop identifying ourselves with our thinking mind, our
Ego and begin to use our knowing mind, our Godmind most of the time and
thus become one with the unconditional love that we are.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will use the principles of the Destructive Rings of Pain
to transform my inner and outer demons to inner and outer angels by
the help of the Constructive Rings of Joy and thus achieve the healing
power of wisdom and forgiveness.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
|
April 01
The Four Big Rings of Pain |
April 02 Fear
of God |
April
03
The
Dark Night of the Soul |
|
April
05 The
reluctant Messiah |
April
06
The third eye |
|
|
April
07
The love that crosses the boundary of death |
April
08
Extra sensory experiences |
April
09 Karma
bindings |
|
April
10
The ego Death |
April
11
Help to the suffering humanity |
April
12
To let go of safety in
things |
|
April
13
The help of the Spirit Mate |
April
14
Sexual purity |
April
15
Cosmic Twins |
|
April
16
Gods and Goddesses, who walk on the Earth |
April
17
Refulgence |
April
18
edifying |
|
April
19
Most important of all |
April
20
The angelic wedding |
April
21
The devil |
|
April
22
The awareness of the awareness |
April
23
Sudarsan Chakra |
April
24
The Creator of thoughts |
|
April
25
Loss of energy |
April
26
Prestige |
April
27
Morphic resonance |
|
April
28
Wisdom |
April
29
Cosmic consciousness |
April
30 Inspiration |
FROM PART 6, CHAPTER 1, APPENDIXES, THE SECTION APPENDIX A, PAGE 403
|
When we use the Ring of Emptiness with its emptiness, boredom, meaninglessness and loneliness we let into our human lives all the sufferings of the World.
The next suffering we open up ourselves to is the Ring of Codependency with its savior role, seducer role, victim role and offender role. Then the sufferings of the Big Ring of Pain with its avarice, envy, hatred and arrogance opens up to us with it’s attached four Small-, Mini-, Micro- and Nano Rings of pain. |
|
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 402
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 1, THE INITIATION, THE SECTION HAVING IT OUT WITH GOD, PAGE 17
My fear of death slowly piled up into a feeling of hopelessness and melancholy, to such an extent that I began longing for death to get it over with and to get to know if God existed and wanted revenge, or if death was a black hole like my parents thought.
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 18
Many
of us have developed our perception of God in accordance with the
thought system of our thinking mind, our Ego, who is a fear energy
devoid of love and that has made us fear God for many reasons.
Also growing up we were told many stories about Heaven and Hell, about
fire and brimstone, about being undeserving of love, about being
sinners/sinneresses in need of salvation, and that increased our fear.
However, in our work with TTDF’s 12 Steps we got acquanted with the
unconditionally loving thought system of our true Self’s, our Spirit,
so our knowing mind, our Godmind could take over the reign of our
mind.
Our Ego has been searching for love in his/her own thought system
without finding it, but gradually as we acknowledged, who we truly
are, we became able to surrender our Egomind to the loving guidance of
our Godmind.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will use the unconditionally loving, caring, compassionate
and merciful thought system of my knowing mind, my Godmind to
protect and guide my thinking mind, my Egomind.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 4, THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, THE SECTION THE DARK NIGHT OF THE SOUL, PAGE 292
The concept
of The Dark Night of the Soul holds that condition where a
person goes through those experiences that he/she fears most of all,
while at the same time, he/she feels abandoned by God and humans
alike, and this condition comes immediately ahead of a spiritual
rebirth.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 292
Until
we came to the 12 Step Fellowship of The New World Order, fear and the
anger towards that, which we fear, was our greatest obstacles to get
to know our true Self, our Spirit.
The fear of our thinking mind, our Ego has many disguises that give us
reasons to be angry such as fear of pain, of illness, of death, of
life, of other people, of making mistakes, and the list goes on and
on.
When we as spiritual aspirants live through our worst fears and at the
same time feel abandoned by God and humankind alike, our state of mind
is called the Dark Night of the Soul.
In this process we are liberated from our special forms of fear by
living through what we fear the most, because thereby we discover that
our fears have a lesson to teach us that we could not have learned in
any other way.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will accept that even my worst fears are beneficial to
me, because they teach me something that only they can teach me.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 1, THE EARTHLY WEDDING, THE SECTION THE EVIL I DID NOT WANT....., PAGE 200
When I remembered what he often said whenever I felt repentant about unwillingly having harmed him: "Love is to never have to say you are sorry," my pain began to lift, because I perceived this phrase to be his way of stating that he knew I acted out of love for him, and the damages I brought forth were due to my ignorance rather than a desire to harm him.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 201
Our
human limitation, ignorance, powerlessness, and
mortality/changeability lead us to make many mistakes in context
with what we want to achieve, and this can offend others without us
intending to offend.
When others feel offended, we can try to figure out what others
might be offended by in an attempt to avoid the anger that others
might react with if they feel offended or hurt by us.
When we do this, the pain in the Ring of Codependency with its
savior role, seducer role, victim role, and offender role becomes
active within us, and therefore we need to achieve wisdom by pairing
it with the joy of the Ring of Emotional Sobriety.
Thus, when we experience the content of this Ring with its
detachment, integrity, respect for self, and respect for others, we
become able to gain the wisdom that says we are all responsible for
our own hurts.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use the Ring of Emotional Sobriety to free myself
from the pain of my codependency, so that I may attain the wisdom
that frees me from that which is not my responsibility.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION GOD'S WISH, PAGE 77
TuTu called himself
the reluctant Messiah, because it was not the achievement of a
personal desire which necessitated that he accepted to live through
those sufferings that came to his lot but a life he took on
according to God’s wish to carry out a specific task, like it was
the case for Jesus too.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 77
Most of us come to Earth from the fifth
dimension, but we all come to Earth with our personal task that we
have decided to fulfill before we embarked on our life journey in
the third dimension.
Some of us come to Earth from the seventh dimension both to fulfill
a task for ourselves personally, but also to pass on information to
others about our true Self, our Spirit.
Often this leads to us having to take on a difficult task, like
Jesus of Nazareth, who reluctantly accepted a crucifixion to
illustrate the unconditional forgiveness of the Christ
consciousness.
His illustration of the unconditional forgiveness of the Christ
consciousness is an inspiration to the rest of us, who come from the
7th dimension and may be reluctant to take on a difficult life task.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use my Christ Consciousness/Mercy Consciousness to
unconditionally forgive a brother or sister, whom I feel has
wronged me.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 1, CHAPTER 1, THE INITIATION, THE SECTION INITIATION 1, PAGE 20
Immediately,
I got a vision, where I saw a beam of
light that streamed from her third eye in my direction, and I
got the impression of moving with great speed towards something
that I did not know what was.
TuTu Doctrine - The New
World Order, page 20
Many
of us hear about the third eye when we begin our spiritual journey,
and we also hear that what we can see with the third eye is not the
physical Reality that surrounds us.
Furthermore, we hear about life-changing visions that other
spiritual aspirants and great Masters have had, and when we imagine
what that entails, we do not think about that we actually use our
third eye every day.
At night, when we dream, we see many things with our third eye that
we do not see at the same time with our physical eyes, and we may
have memory pictures in our third eye of a person, who is not
physically present.
When we want something, like a new car, we usually begin the process
of getting it by imagining the looks and qualities of it by the help
of our third eye so as to manifest it.
Today's Contemplation
Today, I will be aware of how often I use my third eye in
different contexts.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 5, CHAPTER
1, MY LIFE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION THE MORNING GIFT, PAGE 391
I told him with my inner voice that I always believed that the
expression ‘the love which crosses the boundary of death’
was a metaphor, and I was glad that now I had been granted this experience
together with him.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 391
Many
of us imagine that the love between us and our partner has something
to do with our physical appearance, so we spend a much time making
our Mother Earth body as presentable as possible.
Therefore, we can become anxious when we discover many years after
our Earthly Wedding has taken place that the physical attraction
between us and our partner may fade.
However, in The ToTo Doctrine – The New World Order we learn about
the Four Weddings – the Earthly, the Angelic, the Divine and the
Spiritual, and that only the physical is connected to our physical
body.
In doing so, we recognize the truth of the statement that love
springs from the heart and crosses the boundaries of death, because
our love springs from our true Self, our Spirit.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will let go of my fear of losing my one and only Spirit
Mate and all the other people I love through the thought that we
can all choose to meet again after we leave Mother Earth.
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH
APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGUST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER
3, SPIRITUAL EXPERIENCES, THE SECTION THE
MASTER’S ANSWER TO A LETTER, PAGE 40
At one point in time, I had imagined that experiences with
extrasensory phenomenon such as telepathy would satisfy my longing
to get an answer to something that I still did not know what could
be, but the extrasensory experiences that I
had together with the Master had not brought me any closer to
my goal, which I was not aware of what could be either.
TuTu Doctrine - The New
World Order, page 40
Until
we experience extrasensory phenomena, many of us have the idea that
an experience of the extrasensory will give us the reassurance that
we are on the right path to finding out what exists beyond our
physical existence.
In Reality, we experience extrasensory phenomena every single day
without thinking about that it does not necessarily have got
anything to do with our five senses or with our physical body in
general.
We may think of a friend, whom we have not seen for several years,
and later that day or the next day we hear from this friend and
wonder if our friend has picked up on our thought.
Our lives on our different planes of existence, whether they are
material, physical, energetic, emotional, mental, social or
spiritual, make us realize that we exist on many planes
simultaneously.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use my extrasensory experiences to confirm to myself
that I am a multidimensional being, currently focused in the third
dimension.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER
2, THE ANGELIC WEDDING, THE SECTION RUKMINI AND SISHUPALA, PAGE 266
Just
like the prince, my former boyfriend imagined that he would attain
a satisfactory life if only I loved him in the right way, and he
got every opportunity to achieve his wish.
I had lived
together with him for five years before I met TuTu, but he had also
complained that my love was not satisfactory for those five years.
TuTu Doctrine - The New
World Order, page 267
In our Earthjourney we meet other
manifested creatures, who have some of the characteristics of our
one and only Spirit Mate, and we discover that strong feelings arise
in us, because we fall in love.
Often, it turns out upon closer acquaintance, that this person also
has many characteristics that does not belong to our Eternal
Beloved, and on these areas many conflicts arise between us and our
partner.
This is due to the fear of losing the beloved, which leads to
conflicts that are about making the beloved fit perfectly into the
image we have in our innermost heart of our Spirit Mate.
The hurts we inflict on each other, knowingly or unknowingly can
lead to having to make amends in a karmic connection, if we have not
used our Christ Consciousness to mercifully forgive our partner for
the hurts we felt.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will make amends to my partner that I knowingly or
unknowingly have inflicted on him/her, whether he/she is my one
and only Spirit Mate, a Soul Mate or a karmic connection.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER
2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION EGO DEATH, PAGE 187
Besides this,
at long last, I achieved the ego death.
When I became
acquainted with this concept, I imagined it to mean that all my
defects of character would disappear in one stroke one day when time
was ripe, almost like a miracle like it happened to TuTu on his way
to Kathmandu, but in my case, it merely happened by my
identification with my thinking mind, my ego slowly stopped and
instead I identified more and more with my true Self, my Spirit.
TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 187
We
used the 12 Steps of the TuTu Doctrine Fellowship to slowly liberate
ourselves from our identification with our thinking mind, our Ego,
and instead vi began to identify ourselves with our knowing mind,
our Godmind.
As the intuitive thought system of our knowing mind, our Godmind,
became our preferred thought system, our perception changed both of
the thought system of our Egomind and of our bodies.
We came to perceive both our physical body, our energy body, our
emotional body, our thought body, and our social body as the
limited, ignorant, powerless, and mortal/changeable form-identities
of ourselves.
The more our knowing mind, our Godmind became our basis for action,
the more we achieved the courage to face the aspects of our lives
that we previously perceived to be frightening, when we looked at
them through our Egomind’s thought system.
Today's contemplation
Today
I will use the Twelve Steps of the TuTu Doctrine Fellowship to let go
of my identification with my thinking mind, my Ego
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER
3, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS TO WALK ON THE EARTH, PAGE 370
"How
can I improve life on Earth?"
"By
improving your own life."
TuTu Doctrine - The New
World Order, page 371
Many
of us want to help ease the suffering of all humankind by passing on
uplifting information to those of us, who suffer from painful
misunderstandings of our existence.
We imagine that we must make an extraordinary effort to ease the
suffering of humankind, even at our own expense, but this is a
painful misunderstanding of this task.
In our work with our 12-Step Program in the TuTu Doctrine
Fellowship, we have learned that we, as humankind, are one energy
field from which we all spring in one unique individualized form,
but with the same basic form.
This means that the improvements we make to our life become part of
the consciousness in the energy field, whether we personally pass on
to others our discoveries for improvement or not.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will work on improving my own life as a limited,
ignorant, powerless and mortal/changeable human being and thereby
I will improve the life of all of humankind.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER
4, PILGRIMAGE, SECTION DISCLOSURE OF THE MAGICAL RING, PAGE 67
When I
carried the ring, I felt protected.
I felt more and more defenseless as time passed, and when half an hour had passed, I began crying.
After crying for a while, I found it absurd that I was sitting here crying about the loss of the ring.
I turned my thoughts towards the Master, and slowly I came at ease and slid into meditation.
TuTu Doctrine - The New
World Order, page 68
As
children, many of us heard fairy tales about persons being given a
magical object because of their loving nature, and the object opened
doors to other worlds that could not be opened in any other way.
This could make many of us want to acquire a loving nature, so that
we could also get a magical object and enter other worlds, but as
adults, most of us lost faith in that it was possible.
When we as adults chose to walk the spiritual path, we gradually
acquired existential qualities that opened the possibility of
receiving a magical object that could open doors to the Higher
Worlds.
When we gradually achieved the ability to open the doors without
using our magic object, spiritual principles state that we must pass
it on to the next person we met, who needed it.
Today's contemplation
Today, I
will
give myself permission to face the magic of Reality in my everyday
life.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER
2, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE LOVE WITHOUT LIMITS, PAGE 359
However,
the
manifested creatures had formed complicated images and could no longer
find themselves, because their own manifested creations of forms stood
in the way, and many could not even trace out that it was themselves
they were looking for.
For
this
purpose, they could find help in many places, but the biggest help
they received when they met the manifested creature, who represented
that part they belonged together with in their whole selves in The
Cosmic Egg, when they were created and manifested.
TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 362
As
we collect more and more life experiences and store them in our Soul, we
become big old Souls, who hold an infinity of knowledge and experiences
in our Soul from our many lives in various dimensions.
Part of our understanding of these experiences are not in conformity
with the Reality at the root that is the unconditional love, care,
compassion and mercy of our true Self, our Spirit.
When the time is ripe, we want to purify our Soul of all false
perception of Reality by going through the Purgatory, where we purify
ourselves of the unloving, uncaring, hard-hearted and merciless inside
us.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE
PATH TO THE ABSOLUTE SELF-REALIZATION, PAGE 85
To
get access to the Absolute, the sexual power also has to be
active, but for this purpose, it has to be pure.
The
sexual power is pure when the person has attained the capacity to
honestly follow the swing of his/her own sexual feelings during
lovemaking without denial of the intensity or lack of it in
his/her sexual feelings.
TuTu
Doctrine - The New World Order, page 86
When
we have a sexual interaction and are completely focused on the
sexual feeling, there is nothing else in our consciousness but the
pure experience of the sexual power.
For many of us, our sexual interactions take place with a person,
who is not our Spirit Mate, but we can use these interactions to
purify our sexual feelings together with the partner in question.
The earthly wedding takes place when we have a sexual interaction
with our partner, whether our marriage has been approved by our
family, our society, or the World at large.
When the physical attraction fades, time is ripe for the angelic
wedding, and if that cannot happen with our current partner, we can
move on with our search for the love that we experience with our
Spirit Mate.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will strive to be completely focused on my physical
feelings in my sexual interaction, whether my partner is my Spirit
Mate or not.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER
3, THE DIVINE WEDDING, THE SECTION COSMIC TWINS, PAGE 283
"You
are my cosmic twin. We were born together, when the Universe came
into being," I exclaimed without knowing where that came from.
TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 284
God,
our FatherMother, has created and manifested our true Self, our
Spirit, which, like God HimHerself, holds the merged masculine and
feminine principle of unconditional love, care, compassion and
mercy.
Our true Self, our Spirit, has created and manifested our Souls by
projecting a crystallized form of our true Self, our Spirit into two
separate forms, a 'male' and a 'female', who became our first
formidentities.
When we came into being as two cocmic twins instead of being one
Spirit, fear arose and we wrapped it in a veil that was supposed to
ease the pain of fear, and this veiled energy field became our
thinking mind, our Ego.
As the cosmic twins of our Souls, we have come to Earth to liberat
our thinking mind, our Ego from loveless fear, so we ourselves can
return to the oneness in our true Self, our Spirit.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will liberate my thinking mind, my Ego from fear by the
help of my unconditional love, care, compassion and mercy.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER
4, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS TO WALKS ON THE EARTH, PAGE 370
"Yes,
all sons and daughters of humankind are Gods and Goddesses who
walk on the Earth."
"If we all are Gods and Goddesses, then why do we live as ignorant human beings on this Earth?"
"To experience life in the third dimension and to contribute towards improving it."
TuTu
Doctrine - The New World Order, page 371
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER
2, FACE TO FACE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION ARRIVAL AT THE MASTER,
PAGE 24
I rushed over to them furiously and said to one of them: "Do you
think you can stand by what you did?" but when he turned his face
towards me, I came to a halt and stared at him, astonished.
His face had a peaceful refulgence, which had not been there when I
saw him twelve hours earlier in New Delhi.
TuTu Doctrine - The New
World Order, page 24
When
we have reached a point, where our contact with our true Self, our
Spirit happens on a daily basis, we will look increasingly radiant to
a higher and higher degree, whether we are young or old.
The radiance that surrounds us is described in the archetype
Cinderella, who walks on the Earth by the help of the glass shoe,
which symbolizes that she walks on the Earth as that transparent
being, who is her true Self, her Spirit.
The transparent glass-clear shoe shows her spiritual stage that the
fairtale explains can not be achieved by chopping a heel and cutting a
toe, because the radience of Spirit cannot be achieved by denying any
part of ourselves.
The prince, who is a symbol of her Spirit Mate, recognizes her because
of the radiance of her high spiritual state, which is a necessary
prerequisite for it to be possible for her Spirit Mate to recognize
her as his other half.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will develop my spiritual condition by liberating my
thinking mind, my Ego from fear and anger by the help of Step Six
from the 12 Step Program of The TuTu Doctrine
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
When
our
spiritual development takes off, we can have many experiences that
cannot be described by the help of 3D words that are about what we
experience by the help of our five senses.
Therefore,
we
may have to describe our spiritual experiences by the help of parables,
where we use comparison of our spiritual experience with different
earthly experiences that are familiar to most people.
We
can
use our spiritual experiences to uplift our everyday life by earthing
them, and we do this by first experiencing them, then describing them
and finally confirming them for ourselves by reading literature about
them.
In
the
literature we can find help from others, who describe their spiritual
experiences in their personal way as well as from the descriptions of
the World Teachers, which can be found in the World' religions and other
spiritual creeds.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will read some literature that helps me to better be
able to understand how I can get the best possible advantage out of my
spiritual experiences in my daily life.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 3, CHAPTER 4, THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, THE SECTION TUTU'S DEATH,
PAGE 303
"How typical of him," I thought, "first he gives me the shock of
his impending death by getting a cramp seizure that appears
as if he is dying, while he is here and can himself help me through
the worst, and on the day itself, he calls me in a completely sober
state and tells me how happy and optimistic he is, so that I don’t
have to pain from uncertainty and unrest by the thought that he
might have felt lonely or abandoned on this day."
He also told me the most important of all and gave me the chance of
saying the same: "I love you."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 306
In
the
God Realm we are one being that holds us and our Spirit Mate, but at
beginning of the manifestation of creation we separated ourselves from
the God Realm by creating and manifesting our first form identity.
Thus
we
created and manifested our Souls, and because of the limitation of our
Soul form, our unconditional love, care, compassion and mercy became
conditioned by the form of our Soul.
From
our
limited, ignorant, powerless and changeable Soul sprang our fear that
our Soul isolated in the fear’s own energy field as out thinking mind,
our Ego.
Deep
down
we know that Love is most important of all, and that we are here to
liberate our thinking mind, our Ego from fear and anger over the fear by
the help of our oneness with our true Self, our Spirit.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 2, THE ANGELIC WEDDING, THE SECTION THE ANGELIC WEDDING, PAGE 270
TuTu said that this was a wedding between our hearts, an angelic wedding, and it could not be broken with a divorce like our Danish wedding.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 270
Our
text
in The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order describes our love
life as it manifests itself on all levels of our existence, whether in
our physical life or in our spiritual life.
On
our
journey back to the origin, we will experience The Four Weddings – the
earthly, the angelic, the divine and the spiritual wedding – and then
follows the marriages that prepare us for the next wedding.
Our
earthly
marriage can be broken if the love between us and our partner fades,
when the physical attraction fades, and this liberates us to move on in
our search for our Spirit Mate, who is our eternal love.
If
the
love does not fade, we are ready for the angelic wedding, where our and
our partner’s heart merge, and the angelic marriage cannot be broken by
separation like our earthly marriage can.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 1, THE INITIATION, THE SECTION CHILDHOOD FAITH, PAGE 14
The
devil and the deviless were easy to know from all others as they
always had a trident with them and were either black or red and very
ugly, and besides, they had a tail and horns on their brow like an
animal, but they were so very sly that they had learned to make
themselves invisible or hide in the darkness, so they became
difficult to discover.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 16
The
devil
and the deviless is an energy field, which holds our consciousness as it
is, when we have just left the animal realm to take on our human form.
This
field
of consciousnesses we have chosen to portrait as a person with horns,
tale and cloven hoofs, and here we are the lowest form of consciousness
in the human realm as the we animal man and the animal woman, who use
any means to survive.
We come in from one of the animal archetypes – the dog line, the cat
line, the pig line, the hoof and the cloven hoof carrying animal lines,
where we lived together with human beings to study their behavior in our
preparation to step into the human realm.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 5, THE TUTU DOCTRINE, THE SECTION THE SEED OF LOVE, PAGE 380
THE
EAST
THE MASCULINE
THE SUN
Be aware that you are aware of your awareness
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 380
When
we
are in the energy field of our thinking mind, our Ego, we judge about
good and evil on Earth, and that which brings us pain we perceive as
evil, and that which brings us joy we perceive as good.
When
we
become aware that we are aware of our awareness, we discover that when
we are in this all pervasive energy field we are in oneness with our
true Self, our Spirit, who does not judge on good and evil on Earth.
As
spiritual
aspirants we have come to Earth to liberate our thinking mind, our Ego
from judging about good and evil by transforming the judgements of our
thinking mind, our Ego into wisdom.
In
our
TTDF Program, we use Step Six to figure out which Pain Ring we wish to
use to transform the pains of the Ring into wisdom by pairing the Pain
Ring with the corresponding Joy Ring.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, , THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION SUDARSAN CHAKRA, PAGE 178
As
a result of this inner purification work, I also became able to
use Sudarshan chakra, which, in my opinion, is the divinely
simplest way of working on my defects of character.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 178
When we feel lonely, empty and bored, and everything
appears to us to be meaningless, it means that we find ourselves in the
archetypal energy field called the Ring of Emptiness.
This energy field is called Pandora's box in Greek Mythology and is said
to release all the World's miseries into the life of us, if we open the
box, which holds emptiness, boredom, meaninglessness and loneliness.
In Hinduistic Mythology the antidote to Pandora's box is called Sudarsan
Chakra that is a whirling Ring of Light, called the Sun Wheel that chops
off the head of all defects of character, called demons in spiritual
science.
We can choose to use the Sun Wheel, which in our Program is called the
Ring of Fulfillment with its fulfillment, interest, meaningfulness and
oneness to move out of the Ring of Emptiness and thus achieve wisdom.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 3, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT GOOD AND EVIL, PAGE 364
He and
she were deep sky-blue and sat on a throne that shone
from a radiant, fluorescent, spring-green
color, and his and her power consisted in the ability to break
down the manifold walls of the ego-thoughts around the trapped
part of her Soul.
He and she did this by merging them into the mind of the Soul and
thus resurrect them to oneness with their creator and manifestoress,
and for each thought he and she merged, the Souls regained yet
another spark of their power of love.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 368
When we, as our true Self, our
Spirit, created and manifested our Souls, who were our first
crystallized forms of a part of ourselves, we experienced great pains of
fear inside our Soul Consciousness.
We
had
projected a spark of our consciousness into the form of our Souls, who
are a mirror image of ourselves, split in two, and we experienced our
unconditional love become conditioned by the limited form of our Soul.
As
Souls, we laid a veil around the pain of the fear, who thus became our
first created manifestation, who came to live isolated on an energy
plane of their own as our thinking mind, our Ego.
As
our
thinking mind, our Ego, we searched for love, but could not find it on
our own loveless energy plane, so we asked God for help to return home
to our Soul’s love.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 4, THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, THE SECTION THE POWER OF THE JAGUAR, PAGE
Rebirth means that longstanding hurts at long last begin to heal, and with the healing, that person who has the jaguar as his or her Power Animal or Totem would achieve the regaining of the power that was lost at the time the hurts occurred.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 311
In
the
early stages of developing our social skills, we have a very deficient
self-perception, and therefore we are easily influenced by others'
equally deficient perceptions of us.
Deep
wounds
arise in the encapsulated part of our Soul, who is our thinking mind,
our Ego, if we are met with contempt, belittling, disrespect and anger
from the scared and paining Ego of others in our social life.
If
others'
perceptions of us spring from their scared and paining Ego, we can get a
distorted self-image of who and what we are, and therefore we can become
unable to believe that we are our true Self, our Spirit.
This
causes
great energy losses on all planes of our existence, because we get a
need to use all our resources on healing our wounds, whether they are
physical, energetic, emotional, mental, social or spiritual.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will open myself to to healing of my existential wounds by the help of
my Program in the Fellowship of the TuTu Doctrine.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE JUDGEMENT, PAGE 80
TuTu
called
the great harlot prestige and said that these people think they can
have their desire for the power and the glory fulfilled by the help of
the great harlot.
They court the favor of the harlot by acquiring all the riches of the
Earth, but the riches do not belong to them, and in that way they
become robbers and robberesses and assaulters and assaulteresses,
although they are dressed in gold and purple.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 80
When
we
cannot accept our limitation, ignorance, powerlessness, and
mortality/changeability, one of the means we may choose to use to escape
our humanness is an attempt to achieve prestige.
We
may
imagine that if we achieve prestige, it means that others love and honor
us and bow to our wisdom and our will that has made it possible for us
to achieve prestige.
To
achieve
prestige, we may perform many self-supressing actions and many attempts
to suppress others in order to show off ourselves to the World as if we
are not limited, ignorant, powerless, and mortal/changeable.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 1, THE EARTHLY WEDDING, THE SECTION THE 144.00 CHOSEN ONES, PAGE 211
The principle of
morphic resonance states that when a certain number of individuals
from a specific species, for example, monkeys, have achieved a
specific skill, it spreads to the whole species even if the
individuals haven’t been in contact with others from whom they could
have learned it.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 211
To
Step
into the New World Order, we need to activate our intrinsic Christ
Consciousness/Mercy Consciousness by the help of our intuitive
interaction with our true Self, our Spirit.
We
do
this by letting go of acting on the thought system of our thinking mind,
our Ego, and instead we surrender the care of our will and our life to
the intuitive thought system of our knowing mind, our God mind.
When
we
uplift our own consciousness to a higher sphere, at the same time we
contribute to the ascension of Mother Earth to a higher energy system,
including the ascension of the mineral, plant, animal, and human realms.
We
use
Step Three of our TTDF Program to surrender our will and our life to our
Higher Power’s care and Step Four to Ten to help our scared thinking
mind, our Ego to adjust to the ascension.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH
APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGUST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 1, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE MASTER OF THE UNIVERSE , PAGE 346
"In your heart, the
high and the low, the inner and the outer, meet.
Here, the wisdom of your bodies and the wisdom of your Spirit merge
into emotional conditions, which give life direction."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 348
In
our Mother Earth body, our heart, which beats silently and faithfully
for us twenty-four hours a day, is considered to be the dwelling place
of God, and therefore we do our best to follow our heart.
This
means that we can advantageously do what we want to do in the blissful
flow of the present moment, and this sometimes leads to pain, and
sometimes to joy, and thus we develop our capacity to discern.
As
we develop our discernment, we stock a lot of knowledge about what it is
like to live within a manifested form, and with this wisdom we develop
higher and higher forms of consciousness.
The
fear that our choices will lead to pain can make us refrain from doing
what we want to do in the now, but in doing so we at the same time cut
ourselves off from developing existential wisdom.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 2, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE LOVE WITHOUT LIMITS, PAGE 358
Since the cosmic consciousness was the very fundamental structure in each and every particle, in each and every being, it slowly became clear that it was necessary to get into the root of one's own being to find the path back.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 361
Our
whole
purpose with manifesting created forms and moving our consciousness into
them is to experience what it feels like to be separate, limited,
ignorant, powerless and mortal/changeable.
We
manifested
our created figures by crystallizing a part of our omnipresent,
omniscient, omnipotent and immortal/unchangeable true Self, our Spirit
in a separate masculine and feminine form that became our Souls.
We
then
moved a seed of unconditional love that is the essence of our
consciousness into the form and began to identify with the form, and
that could make us forget who and what we are.
When
we
forget, who and what we are, we become scared, and when the fear becomes
overwhelming, we want to return home to our true Self, our Spirit, and
thus our journey back to our origine begins.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 5, CHAPTER 1, MY LIFE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION THE COMING INTO BEING OF THE BRIDGE, PAGE 393
The biggest job consisted in the editing, because I discovered that many of the things I had written under the impression of inspiration were not expressed in a way that was clear to others, so I kept working with the expression until I felt understood by at least one other person, and in this process, my intuitive perceptions also became clearer to myself.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 394
In
our
daily Eleventh Step, we use the Two-Way Prayer to seek inspiration from
our Higher Power about what we can advantageously do today and to seek
guidance about how we best can carry out the suggestions we receive.
When
what
we do during the day is done under the influence of inspiration, we
automatically receive the power to do the tasks, because the love of our
Higher Power flows as a power through our inspired actions.
Love
holds
the joy without opposites, which is the happiness we have been seeking,
and the love that flows through our inspired actions makes us happy and
makes our path easy.
When
we
interact with others in our tasks for the day, our inspired state will
affect those we interact with in such a way that our social life also
will become a happy experience.
Today’s
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
|
May 01
The doubters and the supporters |
May 02 Death
travels |
May 03
Root sounds |
|
May
05 The
empty wells |
May
06
The synchronous Reality |
|
|
May
07
To be ready |
May
08
The Ring of Fulfillment |
May
09 The
desire for contrast |
|
May
10
The Four Small Pain Rings |
May
11
Myths and fairy tales |
May
12
To be better than others |
|
May
13
The ignorance |
May
14
Self-created and self-manifested limitations |
May
15
Rituals |
|
May
16
God's holy altar |
May
17
The axe-stroke and the pinprick |
May
18 Energy
fields |
|
May
19
The Being of mercy |
May
20
The gifts of pains |
May
21
Experience |
|
May
22
The first positive power factor |
May
23
The Rings of Social Interaction |
May
24
Freedom from taking responsibility |
|
May
25
Without exception |
May
26
Magical gifts |
May
27
The pleasant good and
the unpleasant good |
|
May
28
Totem |
May
29
To stand by our Christ Consciousness also called our
Mercy Consciousness |
May
30
Be in the Blissful Flow
of the Present Moment |
| May 31 The radiation of a Master |
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 1, THE INITIATION, THE SECTION DOUBTS, PAGE 21
I told others about my experiences and expected that they would want to investigate the Master’s transmission, but instead they doubted my sanity.
That
made me uncertain, and I began doubting it too.
The TuTu Doctrine – The Thirteenth Step 21
When
we
begin our spiritual journey back to the origin of our true Self, our
Spirit, we get cosmic glimpses, which are glimpses of spiritual states
that cannot be described in Earthly words.
If
we
wish to express the inexpressible to others, we need to use parables and
comparisons to something from our three-dimensional reality in order to
be better understood.
Whether
others
understand what we are trying to express or not, we will encounter an
attitude from others that support our understanding of our path in life
or doubt that it is good for us to continue moving on in our path.
Regardless
of
whether those we share our choices with support our choices or doubt
them, we choose to make use of both to either strengthen our resolve or
to pause and consider the value of our choices.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 4, THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, THE SECTION DEATH HELP, PAGE 334
I lay down on the
mattress of the shaman and made myself ready for my third death
travel, when I changed my mind about my traveling purpose, which was
to help Joe Ben.
I would also help that woman with whom
TuTu had lived together if I could.
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 334
Many
of
us imagine that when we leave our Mother Earth body and move on to the
Higher Worlds, we automatically become a male or a female sage in one
stroke, and there is a grain of truth in that.
We
look
at our lives for two days in the Light of unconditional Love, and that
gives us the wisdom of unconditional Love, but the wisdom fades when we
move on, if we did not aquired this wisdom in the course of our life.
If
we
have used our Eleventh Step to acquire this wisdom, we can contribute to
our own lives and the lives of others on all planes of consciousness by
making conscious journeys to the Death Realm and the Higher Worlds.
Here
we
can sometimes help if a deceased person is not aware that he or she has
died by making the person aware of the situation and helping him or her
to pass through the Death Realm and move on further.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION GAYATHRI MANTRA, PAGE 93
TuTu
explained that it helps in this work to use the Gayathri mantra or
to use the essence of this mantra as a prayer that corresponds with
the vibration the mantra holds at appropriate moments in the course
of the day.
Gayathri
mantra consists in the sound hrim, [pronounced: hreem] that holds the vibration, which means: "God,
liberate me from this self-important seriousness," and this sound
is the root sound
which comes second in the hierarchy of root sounds after the
primary root sound OM.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 93
In
our
Eleventh Step, many of us use sounds from mantras or music to evoke
sound vibrations that allow us to effortlessly enter altered states of
consciousness.
When
we
projected ourselves out from our oneness on the Spirit plane as two
separate Souls on the Soul plane, this movement was accompanied by
sound, and this sound is called OM or Amen and was the first root sound.
Some
of
us use this sound as an object for contemplation to better enter into
meditation, which is a shift from the thought system of our thinking
mind, our Ego, to the thought system of our knowing mind, our God mind.
The
next
soundvibration is HRIM, which is the second rootsound from the movement,
when we covered the pain of fear in the veil of forgetfulness, and it
means: God, liberate me from this self-important seriousness.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 4, CHAPTER 5,
THE TUTU DOCTRINE, THE SECTION THE FRUIT, PAGE
388
THE
FRUIT
GOD IS EVERYTHING.
EVERYTHING IS GOD.
I AM GOD.
YOU ARE GOD.
HE IS GOD.
SHE IS GOD.
IT IS GOD.
WE ARE GOD.
YOU ARE GOD.
THEY ARE GOD.
THE
PATH IS YOUR LOVE
AMEN
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 388
Since
Sri Krishna planted The Seed of Love in humankind’s heart, the Path of
Love was opened to us, and we, who followed The Path of Love learned
that love is the most important of all so we gave ourselves permission
to do what we loved to do, feel what we loved to feel, think what we
loved to think, be with the people we loved to be with, and thus we
made both ourselves and humankind happy.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will give myself permission to walk the Path of Love.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 2, THE ANGELIC WEDDING, THE SECTION KARMA RESOLUTION, PAGE 264
My
former boyfriend and I continued to be lovers for several years,
but no matter how much loving attention I gave him, he kept
complaining that I did not love him enough, and one day it
became too much for me.
"Will you be so kind as to tell me what it is about your love
that you find so much better that you find it justified to complain
about mine?" I asked, "I’m willing to marry you and live the rest of
my life with you, but you’re not."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 266
When
we
are facing an empty well, we usually accept very quickly that it is not
possible to quench our thirst from this well, and so we move on to find
a well filled with water.
The same is not true when we are faced with another person that we want
to get something from, even if the other has nothing to give and admits
to us that this is how it is.
Instead, we imagine that the other person HAS something to give, but is
reluctant to give us what we want because he or she is stingy, and thus
we have demonized the other person.
This can lead to many existential pains both for ourselves and for the
person we seek help from, and thereby our social life becomes one long
painful battle with our fellow human beings.
Today's contemplation
Today, I choose to let go of
the empty wells without demonizing them.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 5, CHAPTER 1, MY LIFE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION THE WEDDING PARTY, PAGE 391
Some
time ago, I had invited guests for dinner for the
following day and went out to shop and make the food ready.
When I invited them, I did not know that my Spiritual Wedding was
going to take place just ahead of my dinner party, but I decided
to look at my two friends as the wedding-guests.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 391
In
our
Eleventh Step, we work on discerning between our Egomind’s thinking
thoughts thought system and our Godmind’s knowing intuitive thought
system that activates the synchronous reality in our daily lives.
The
synchronous
reality takes place when a convergence of events happens that inspires
us and supports the path forward that emerged in our intuitive thought
system.
Another
characteristic
of our Godmind’s thought system being active is that the inspirations
that arise intuitively are unconditionally loving, caring,
compassionate, and merciful.
As
we
gradually let go of acting on our Egomind’s thought system and listen
more to our Godmind’s thought system, we become better and better able
to be in the now in the blissful flow from the synchronous reality.
Today’s
Contemplation
Today
I
will use my Eleventh Step to remain in the now in the blissful flow
from the synchronous reality.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 3, SPIRITUAL EXPERIENCES, THE SECTION THE INITIATION TAKES PLACE, WHEN THE DISCIPLE IS READY, PAGE 48
I
felt I had to throw myself out from his eye into the empty void if I
wanted to attain it, but I was as if frozen in death fear.
"I
first
have to see what will happen between my boyfriend and me," I thought.
In that fraction of a second, the vision disappeared.
I was surprised to discover that I was afraid of Self-realization.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 48
We
may
imagine that we are ready to become one with the unconditional love of
our true Self, our Spirit, and thus with the joy of being on Earth under
all circumstances, no matter what they are.
Therefore,
it
may come as a surprise to us to discover that we are actually not ready
for many different reasons, all rooted in the painful and fear-based
thought system of our Egomind.
Whatever
the
reason, it is always and without exception a desire to postpone our
self-realization out of fear of what it might entail for the familiarity
we feel at home in from our Egomind’s thought system.
When
our
desire to experience life from the unconditional love of our true Self,
our Spirit, becomes stronger than all other desires, it means that we
are entirely ready to experience our unconditional love.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will do my best to fulfill all the desires that are
important to me, so my desire for Self-realization can become my first
priority in my life.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION SUDARSAN CHAKRA, PAGE 178
When
Vishnu takes on his human form, he is also subjected to the
conditions of a human being, and that means that also he is
limited, ignorant, powerless and mortal and thereby fallible, but
since Vishnu knows this prior to his descend, he brings with him
his whirling ring of power which lights up his inner World
just as brightly as the sun lights up
the outer World, and he uses it in his human life to neutralize
all inner and outer demons.
This bright, whirling ring of power is
called Sudarshan Chakra.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 179
We
may
think that the existential tools of the Gods and Goddesses are not
available to us humans, because we have not become aware that we are
Gods and Goddesses walking the Earth.
By
working
with `The Fairytale about the Gods and Goddesses, who walk on the Earth`
in our First Step we become aware that we ARE Gods and Goddesses walking
on the Earth like Vishnu did in Sri Krishna’s form.
This
opens
us to using the Sudarshan Chakra, which our Program calls the Ring of
Fulfillment with it’s fulfilment, interest, meaningfulness and oneness,
to transform all of our character defects to wisdom.
In
our
Sixth Step, we transform the pain of the Ring of Emptiness with it’s
emptiness, boredom, meaninglessness and loneliness to wisdom by the help
of the joy of the Ring of Fulfillment.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 1, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE MASTER OF THE UNIVERSE, PAGE 347
"Why do I want the experience of death when I'm immortal?"
"Through the perspective of death, the presence of life is achieved."
"Why do I need to experience death to achieve the presence of life when I have eternal life?"
"Through the contrast to death, life becomes present.
Without contrast,
the eternal life is death.
Therefore, death is life, seen from the perspective of eternity."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 353
Many
of
us have asked ourselves why an unconditionally loving, caring,
compassionate and merciful God does not stop all our pains, illnesses,
sufferings and death, without finding an answer.
However,
in
Step Two we worked with the ‘Fairytale of the Love Without Limits’, and
we discovered that we had wanted to experience the contrast to the God
Realm by separating ourselves from God, our FatherMother.
We
wanted
to experience limitation, ignorance, powerlessness and
mortality/changeability as contrast to the omnipresence, omniscience,
omnipotence and immortality/unchangeability of our true Self, our
Spirit.
We
wanted
to create and manifest this contrast to amplify our unconditional love,
care, compassion and mercy, and as a result we furthermore came to
experience pain, illness, suffering and death.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will accept that both the pain and the joy are necessary energies for
me to amplify my experience of my true Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 6, CHAPTER 1, APPENDIXES, THE SECTION THE FOUR BIG RINGS OF JOY, PAGE 405
|
The Four
Small Rings
of Pain are the first set of
Painrings that
opens up as a result of our use of the Big Ring of
Pain with its avarice, envy,
hatred and arrogance. The Small Ring of Arrogance with its superiority, inferiority, overcrowding and isolation opens as a result of our use of the arrogance from the Big Ring of Pain. |
|
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 405
Today's contemplation
Today, I will inventory how the energies of one of the Small Rings of Pain has expressed itself in the course of my day. .
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 2, THE ANGELIC WEDDING, THE SECTION THE MYTHOLOGICAL HARISHCHANDRA, PAGE 230
He had now proven that he did not stick with the truth only because he was a king and could afford to be honest, but that he stuck to it under all circumstances, and thereby, he had impressed the Gods who brought an end to his sufferings by bringing his son back to life and reuniting him and his wife, who were reinstalled as king and queen.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 231
In our work with our
Program in the TuTu Doctrine Fellowship, we work with myths and fairy
tales that go way back in human history and describes energies in a
larger context.
The myth of King Harishchandra's life describes what can happen when a
person sticks to their own truth and remains authentic under all
circumstances, no matter what they are.
King Harishchandra was nicknamed the King of Truth, and the magical
elements in his story inspire others to also do their best to be
authentic, same way as fairy tales inspire to authencity.
Myths and fairy tales are archetypes that show us the interaction of
energies for the authentic and the inauthentic person, and we use them
in our Program to find guidelines for how we can act to our advantage.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will build my character by letting myself get inspired by
myths and fairy tales.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION REDEMPTION, PAGE 175
My heart was good enough.
It needed not be
better than the heart of others, because the goal of my heart had
been to become the bride of the prince.
TuTu was my prince, and he had found the qualities of my heart good
enough to make his definitive choice and lead me to God’s Sacred
Altar, to enter into his Spiritual Wedding with me.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 175
A major reason for
most of us to want to be better than others is that we want to live
happily ever after with our chosen prince or princess as described in
the fairy tales.
We believed that we had to be better than others because the stories
we heard as children gave us the impression that we should be better
than the prince or princess that our chosen prince or princess was
expected to marry.
This belief was solely due to a lack of information from family and
friends about the symbolic narratives in fairy tales of the
relationship between Spirit Mates, who recognize each other
irrespective of the outer circumstances.
Therefore, we do not need to be better than others to win the heart of
our beloved and to live happily ever after, because our Spirit Mate is
our other half and will always choose us irrespective of the
circumstances.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use the fairy tales and myths described in The ToTo
Doctrine - The New World Order to take my inner child's hopes and
perspective on life to heart.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 4, CHAPTER 3 THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT GOOD AND EVIL, PAGE 365
In
her Thinking Mind, the latent thought crystallized, and thereby,
the naked thought arose: "I am."
She looked around with her dawning thinking power and understood nothing, because the conscious thought is of time and can only understand through comparison with the already known, which belongs to the past, and for the naked thought nothing was known, and the thought was seized by shame of its ignorance and wished to hide for the rest of creation.
Our purpose with
choosing a life on Earth is to experience the maximum contrast to our
true Self’s, our Spirit’s happy state, and through the contrast to
become able to appreciate our true state even more.
Furthermore, we want to develop the intensity of our lovemaking in the
Higher Worlds by incorporating the heavy and slow energies of Earth
into our love-expressions in the God Realm.
We want to develop our love aptitude by meeting our earthly pains,
illnesses, sufferings and death that all spring from our Egomind with
the unconditional love and care of our Godmind.
We also want to achieve an enlightened and wise Egomind, for our
unenlightened and foolish Egomind is the root of our suffering, and we
achieve this by working with the Rings of Joy and Pain in Step Six.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will work with the Rings of Pain and Joy in my Sixth Step,
so that my thinking mind, my Ego, can become enlightened and wise.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
May 14: Selfcreated and selfmanifested limitationsJANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 3, THE DIVINE WEDDING, THE SECTION THE DIVINE WEDDING, PAGE 287
I flung out
my hand and made a sliding movement along the lines of the first
two blue candles, then the other two and eventually up the middle,
where the white candle was, while at the same time I solemnly
said: "Welcome TuTu, my one and only."
Then I pointed to the sandalwood oil and a small dish of sweets, which sat in front of the candles and said: "On this altar I have put candles to show you the Light of my Love and also something sensuous and something sweet, because that is what I want to be to you."
I put a little sandalwood oil on him and a sweet in his mouth.
Then, I took the glass with sweets and gave sweets to my nephew and his friend.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 291
When we impulsively
perform an action that springs from our true Self, our Spirit, we or
others may sometimes choose to make a ritual out of this action under
similar circumstances by repeating it.
Over time, our rituals can become hollowed out, so that we no longer
know why we perform certain actions in connection with certain events
that we think are important.
We perform the ritual simply, because we had great feelings about them
once, or because we have seen others do it and found it meaningful to
begin with, without at the present time feeling anything about it
Rituals that we perform as a habit, created by us or our society, but
that do not come from our own heart, we choose to replace by creating
meaningful rituals, which are our own, and which come from our heart.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE JUDGMENT, PAGE 80
When they themselves reach the point where, consciously, they are able to enter the seventh dimension, they know that soon they are going to stand in front of God's Holy Altar, to enter into their own Spiritual Wedding with their own Eternal Beloved, who will give them the unconditional love, care, compassion and mercy, and to whom they will give the same, and in their joy and anticipation they sing songs of praise about his Spiritual Wedding together with the Heavenly Choir as written in the Bible.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 81
When
we let ourselves be born on Earth, shrouded in the veil of oblivion,
we all have one or more special tasks we wish to accomplish for the
benefit of ourselves and all the other manifested creatures that
live on Mother Earth.
Some of us come to Earth together with our Spirit Mate, because we
wish to incorporate the slow and heavy vibration of Mother Earth
into our love life into the faster and lighter vibrations of the
Higher Worlds.
To become able to incorporate our love life into the Higher Worlds,
we have to go through The Four Weddings with our Spirit Mate so as
to rekindle our memory about them like described in our Program.
Once we have achieved this, we can incorporate the vibration of
Mother Earth into our love life in the Higher Worlds, and our
experiences will be - like the experiences of everyone else -
injected into the subconscious of humankind for the benefit of all.
Today's Contemplation
Today, I will use my Eleventh Step to expand my conscious contact
with my Spirit Mate, whether we both live on Earth or not, so as
to prepare myself to stand in front of God’s Holy Alter to enter
into my Spiritual Wedding with my Spirit Mate and thus become one
with my true Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 4, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS WHO WALK ON THE EARTH, PAGE 370
"Stop imagining pains that are not yours, because you cannot know the carrying capacity of your neighbor; that which appears to you to be a stroke with an axe may be a pinprick for your neighbor, and that which appears to your neighbor to be a stroke with an axe may be a pinprick for you.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 374
Most
of us want to contribute to the well-being of others, so when we see
that another person apparently is in physical or emotional pain, we
may want to help without being asked for help.
We may perceive what our neighbor is experiencing to be an
axe-stroke looking at it from outside, but our neighbor may perceive
it as a pinprick, and he or she may perceive our desire to help as
untimely interference.
When we try to help without being asked, we have activated the pain
of the Ring of Codependency with its savior role, seducer role,
victim role, and offender role.
When we become aware about this, we bring wisdom to the situation by
adding the joy of the Ring of Emotional Sobriety with its
detachment, integrity, respect for self, and respect for others to
the situation.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will contribute to the enlightenment and wisdom in my
thinking mind, my Ego, by pairing the Ring of Codependency with
the Ring of Emotional Sobriety.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 1, THE EARTHLY WEDDING, THE SECTION THE SPIDER, PAGE 197
My inner travel ended, and the shaman told me that the spider is the symbol of that being who gathers all the threads of the Universe in a perfect pattern.
This made me realize that my experience meant that the threads of the Universe had gathered in a perfect pattern in my heart, and in the following years, gradually, I experienced the realization of this travel through the change in my perspectives.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 199
Many of us were initiated as shamans
during our walk on the 12-Step Path, and in that context we learned
about archetypes that are the basic blueprint for a certain energy
field, such as the archetype: The Spider.
Since the basic pattern in a archetype is always the same, we can
use the symbol a certain archetype stands for to orient ourselves in
our Egomind’s psychological landscape and thus become better at
handling it.
In our Program we work with many archetypes such as the mutual body
of a man and a woman, which contains the same mental-emotional
energies for everyone, even though our experience of them differs.
In our Sixth Step we use the archetypes of the Pain Rings to
identify our mental-emotional pains and the archetypes of Joy Rings
to grow in wisdom by pairing the Rings of Pain with the Rings of
Joy.
Today's Contemplation
Today I choose to grow in wisdom by pairing a Pain Ring,
describing a mental-emotional pain fx anger or fear I experienced
today, with a Joy Ring.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 3, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT GOOD AND EVIL, PAGE 365
The mercy emerged from the snake-form of the energy field as a being of great power, awe-inspiring to behold in his sublime calm with groups of poisonous snakes, who each and everyone represented the despairing darkened creaturesmanifestations, who squirmed in grinding of teeth everywhere outside on the merciful being of love, around his neck, his arms and his legs, into which they sank their teeth to get rid of the poison of fear and to suck his life power in return.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 368
Many of us imagine that mercy consists of freeing a fellow human being from the pains of his or her life, and as a result of this perception, we try to take on the burdens of others in order to help them.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION IMPATIENCE, PAGE 176
However, it took me completely by surprise that it was the pain in my defects of character that lead me to spiritual enlightenment, but I realized that as long as everything in my life went smoothly, I did not stop to think about my existence, but when I encountered resistance whether it sprang from painful emotions from within or from opposition in my surroundings, I paused to investigate more thoroughly the cause for this.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 177
After coming to the
TTDF Fellowship, we discovered that all of our existential pains had a
gift to give us if we stopped and investigated our pains instead of
trying to escape from them in various ways.
We discovered that any kind of pain, discomfort, weakness, or illness
gave us a new perspective on ourselves and our life, and thus we grew
in wisdom, and we also developed compassion for others, who suffered
the same pains.
In our Program, we work with the Rings of Pain by pairing them with
the Rings of Joy, and thereby we achieve two opposing perspectives on
our pains and come to understand that our perception of pain is
subjective.
Gradually, as our work with the Rings in Step Six leads to cooperation
with our chosen Higher Power in Step Seven, we harvest wisdom and
compassion from the pain and discover that we no longer fear it.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will work on harvesting wisdom and compassion from my pains
by the help of Step Six and Seven.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 2, FACE TO FACE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION QUESTIONS TO THE MASTER, PAGE 26
I
went up to my room immediately but when I put the pen to the
paper, yet another question arose that wasn’t my own: "How would
it help me that he explained what death is?"
I realized that even if the Master were able to answer the question
to my satisfaction, my next question would be: "I wonder if what he
says is true."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page
We
often seek to achieve an overview of our problems in life by
thinking through various solutions in advance, and often we compare
experiences from the past with the problem, we are trying to solve
in the present.
This prepare us to solve the problem in the best way possible, but
it can happen that we do not have any experiences with the
situation, we are trying to find a solution to.
Anyway, we may try to think of a solution although only experience
can tell us the solution, and we therefor have a better chance of
gaining an overview by seeking guidance from another person with the
experience.
Our TTDF has members with broad experiences in all areas, and this
gives us the opportunity to seek guidance from others who have
experiences with a similar problem.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will seek guidance from a person, who has experiences
with the task I need to solve, and if I do not know such a person,
I will move forward, one step at a time trusting that my intuitive
inspirations to a solution is guidance from my true Self, my
Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 5, CHAPTER 1, MY LIFE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION COSMIC QUADRUPLETS, PAGE 398
Even later, after
having lived with my new husband for more than five years, I was
told in a shamanic travel that the individual ManWoman from whom
TuTu and I sprang had projected himherself our into the manifested
creation together with another couple and thus we had become
Quadruplets at Soul level as we lived together in one Cosmic Egg
especially formed for Quadruplets and out of us four my new husband
was one, his Spirit Mate was one, TuTu was one and I was one.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 398
Those of us, who have
worked with the ‘Fairy Tale about Good and Evil’ in Step Four have
become aware that we, as our true Self, our Spirit, manifested our
created Souls by splitting our projection into a ‘he’ and a ‘she’.
In the splitting process, our living projections experienced great
pain and also feared having lost our other half and thus our
unconditional love, which God gave us when HeShe gave birth to us as
Spirit in HisHer own image.
When we isolated the pain and fear on an energy plane by itself in the
hope of protecting ourselves from these unknown energies, we had, as
Souls, created and manifested a new being, who is our thinking mind,
our Ego.
In TTDF, we now work to liberate our Egomind from the fear and the
pain by the help of the Rings of Pain and Joy in Step Six, and thus it
becomes possible for us to be reunited with our true Self, our Spirit.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will work on developing my awareness of the first positive
power factor that encompasses the high and the low, the inner and
the outer, so as to achieve balance in my life.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 3, THE DIVINE WEDDING, THE SECTION WITHDRAWAL SYMPTOMS, PAGE 277
When
I came around, I found myself in a ventilator and felt an intense
discomfort by not being able to breathe the way I used to, but the
discomfort of these experiences were not as intense as the
discomfort of my withdrawal symptoms from heroin, because I was
unconscious part of the time and got abundantly supplied with
morphine when I was conscious.
Thereby, I realized that I did not know what I was doing when I
claimed that TuTu did not love me or his family if he wasn't
willing to live through withdrawal symptoms to prove the opposite.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 277
Often
we demand that others take a direction in their life that the other
does not want, because we think we know better what is good for
others, or because the other is our spouse, whose choices deeply
interfere with ours.
However, after we came to the TuTu Doctrine Fellowship, we
discovered that making demands on others they do not want to fulfil
is harmful both to us and the others, no matter how good and loving
our intentions may be.
Instead, we chose to use the Ring of Social Interaction to remind
ourselves that cooperation between willing participants is the best
solution, because there is a ‘me’, a ‘you’, and a ‘us’ in every
social interaction.
THE RINGS OF SOCIAL INTERACTIONS
When
we look at these Rings, it is easy to realize that if we make
demands on another that hurt the person, we hurt ourselves, because
‘us’ fills almost half of our personal energy field as long as the
interaction lasts.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will ask for what I want instead of demanding, and I
choose to be grateful if I get what I ask for and to let go if I
do not.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE SAVIOR, PAGE 101
One single person, who picked up the message shortly after the death of Jesus, was a powerful messenger, but to a certain extent, he was also blinded by his human limitation, ignorance, powerlessness and mortality, and because he could not simultaneously hold the thought that The Messiah, The World Teacher, was executed as a criminal and that God's love is infinitely merciful, he found peace from this paradox by creating and manifesting the myth about the Savior.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 4, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS WHO WALK ON THE EARTH, PAGE 370
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page
On the spiritual path we have come across many imaginative accounts about how the World Teachers dealt with their human limitation, ignorance, powerlessness and mortality/changeability.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 4, PILGRIMAGE, THE SECTION THE OLD WOMAN OF THE FAIRY TALES, PAGE 54
I
was full of wonder about this elevated state that came into being
when an intense desire arose in me to help the old woman.
Yet another time, I had to think of the fairy tales saying that
the person who helps an old man or an old woman in need receives a
magical present.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 56
As
children, most of us come into contact with folk tales that tell
us how our behavior can trigger magical gifts that can further our
chance of living happily ever after in great love.
We intuitively understood the truth value of these fairy tales
without being aware that they are in fact archetypal descriptions
of the interaction of higher energies under different life
circumstances.
While growing up, many of us lost trust in the fairy tales,
because when we confidently used our Godmind’s intuitive thought
system, we were ridiculed by our family and our surroundings in
many cases.
However, by the help of Step Two, Three, Seven and Eleven from our
TTDF Program, we learned to return to our childhood faith in our
intuition and thus our ability to be in the Blissful Flow of the
Present Moment.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use Steps One, Two, and Three to further develop
my ability to put my Godmind’s intuitive thought system into
use.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 1, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE MASTER OF THE UNIVERSE, PAGE 347
"Oh Rainbow Goddess, I'm seized by great fear of wishing for wrong things."
"There are no wrong wishes."
"Yes, but imagine, if what I wish for becomes my misfortune."
"There is no misfortune. Only the pleasant good and the unpleasant good."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 352
Little by little as we worked with our TTDF Program, we became better and better at taking responsibility for our life situation, whether it consisted of the pleasant good or the unpleasant good in the now.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 3, CHAPTER 4,
THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, THE SECTION THE MEETING WITH
THE JAGUAR KAVA, PAGE 302
The love Kava showed me took me by
surprise.
It was like balm on my wounded heart, and for that reason, I cried
deeply moved during a major part of the travel.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 302
Many of us are initiated shamans or shamanesses, and therefore we have inner guides on different planes of consciousness, and on one of these planes our guide is a totem animal, also called a power animal or a spirit animal.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE OUTRAGE OVER CHRIST, PAGE 92
In
this way, we can contribute to make the mercy of the Christ
Consciousness real to ourselves and to the World in all its
nuances, and this will help us to get everything put into its
right place and others to achieve the Christ Consciousness, even
though we have been told that this state of consciousness is
unattainable to anybody but Jesus.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 92
Many of us believed that the Christ Consciousness was way beyond our reach until we came to TTDF and realized that anyone, who has completed a Twelve Step Program has attained the mercy of the Christ Consciousness.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 5, THE TUTU DOCTRINE, THE SECTION THE SEED OF LOVE, PAGE 380
THE WEST
THE
FEMININE
THE WATER
Be in the flow
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 381
For us as members of TTDF, the goal is to be in oneness with our true Self, our Spirit, and thus be present in The Blissful Flow of the Present Moment as much as possible under the inspiration of our God Mind.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 2, FACE TO FACE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION GOD IN A FELLOW HUMAN BEING, PAGE 31
I had begun to believe that the Master knew everything that happened to me because of their telepathic contact, and the events with the doctor and the other disciples made me think that in some mysterious way or other, he was also present in all the events I participated in, so that he could steer my life and my development in the right direction, now that he had become my Guru.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page
The
stronger our oneness with our true Self, our Spirit, becomes, the
clearer our oneness with all life around us becomes, whether it is
the life of the mineral realm, the plant realm, the animal realm or
the human realm.
We discover that the consciousness of the mineral realm is
introvert, the plant realm is the beginnig of consciousness turning
extrovert, and the animal realm is the beginning of free movement of
the physical bodies.
All the inhabitants of the realms have originated from the God Realm
and hold a radiation of spiritual vibrations in varying stages that
must reach a certain stage in order to serve as food for physical
bodies.
The radiance of spiritual teachers affects all the realms and
attracts all who need food in the form of love, care, compassion and
mercy, whether they are minerals, plants, animals or humans.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will observe the emanations from the mineral realm, the
plant realm, the animal realm, and the human realm, so that I can
better decide where I want to be in these realms and with whom.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
|
June 01
Book knowledge versus wisdom |
June 02 Plans
for more Earth life-journeys |
June 03
The ignorant ruler and ruleress of the
Universe |
|
June
05 The
two genders |
June
06
The creation and the manifestation of life in the
dimensions |
|
|
June
07
The pain of separation |
June
08
Divine inspiration |
June
09 Right
and wrong |
|
June
10
The root of compassion |
June
11
Colors |
June
12
The
Fountain of Youth |
|
June
13
The power and the glory |
June
14
The King of Kings
and the Queen of Queens |
June
15
Change in the energy combination of Planet Earth |
|
June
16
Prepatory
raining of the capacity to focus |
June
17
The noble heart |
June
18
The Holiest of The Holy |
|
June
19
Love put to the test |
June
20
The Small Rings of Joy |
June
21
Surrender to our True Self |
|
June
22
The journey back to the origin |
June
23
God's revenge |
June
24
To help one's
neighbor |
|
June
25
Conversation after death |
June
26
The beginning of recovery |
June
27
Good and evil |
|
June
28
Stepping out of the flock mentality |
June
29
The physical miracle |
June
30
Shame |
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 2, FACE TO FACE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF THE MASTER'S RADIATION, PAGE 25
I realized that I
did not know why I had come, but I tried to wring a question out
of my brain because I sensed that the Master’s attention would be
directed elsewhere if I didn’t have anything to ask, but all my
thoughts had ebbed out and left me in a state of silence and a
feeling of happiness.
The
TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 26
Most
of us had acquired a great deal of book knowledge about spiritual
topics after we began our quest for love and happiness, and this
might have given us the impression that we knew a lot about being
on the spiritual path.
Little by little, we realized that book knowledge was only the
beginning of our spiritual path, and this made us want to practice
some of the suggestions we encountered in our reading.
As we paired our book knowledge with experience, we gained wisdom
and could begin to express our new experiences with authority, for
we now possessed true knowledge about many spiritual topics.
When we came to the Twelve Step path, our wisdom increased by
leaps and bounds, because each of our Twelve Steps taught us how
to practically know the happiness of our unconditional love, care,
compassion, and mercy.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will experiment with the spiritual exercises I learn
about in my TTDF’s Program to acquire wisdom in an area I now
know theoretically.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 2, CHAPTER
2, THE PERSONAL,
THE SECTION TUTU, THE MASTER OF MASTER, PAGE
189
This,
I felt, was confirmed by TuTu, when he told me that he had taken
on a life just ahead of his present one to prepare our meeting
in this life by creating and manifesting that system of
meditation which the Master got the task to pass on, and he had
thus been the Master of the Master.
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 189
Those
of
us who have chosen to let ourselves be born on Earth have at the same
time chosen our mission, which is to learn to handle our thinking mind,
our Ego, with unconditional love, care, compassion and mercy.
This
cannot
be fulfilled in a single life on Earth due to the limited lifespan of
our physical body, and most of us plan a new Earth journey as soon as we
have left Earth after the death of our physical body.
We
do
this because we realize in our after death inventory, in which areas we
want to improve our handling of the slow, heavy, dark vibrations of
Earth more than we succeded in doing in the life that has just passed.
The
Earth
mission for all of humankind is to meet our unconditionally unloving,
uncaring, hard-hearted and merciless Ego with the unconditional love,
care, compassion and mercy of our Spirit.
Today's
Contemplation
Today I will use my TTDF Program to meet my unconditionally unloving, uncaring, hard-hearted and merciless thinking mind, my Ego with the unconditional love, care, compassion and mercy of my true Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 1, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE MASTER OF THE UNIVERSE , PAGE 347
"Then tell me who this ruler is, so I may find him and adore him?"
"She is you, and you are she.”
"Oh Rainbow Goddess, how can I believe this?"
"You are, beyond any doubt, the ruler of the Universe!"
"How can I
be the ruler of the Universe without knowing it?"
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 348
Many
of
us imagined that the Universe can only have one ruler or ruleress,
because the word Universe means that the Universe is a oneness that
holds everything and everybody everywhere on all levels of
consciousness.
This
has
led to many of us to feeling unable to take full responsibility for our
personal part of the Universe, and it has led to us denying our true
Self, our Spirit.
By
denying
our true Self, our Spirit, at the same time we denied our unconditional
love, care, compassion and mercy for ourselves and everything and
everybody everywhere on all planes of consciousness.
In
doing
so, our perspective on the Universe and on our role as the ruler or
ruleress of that part of the Universe that God, our FatherMother, has
given us to rule over, was completely turned upside down.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 4, THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, THE SECTION VANITY-PERISHABILITY, PAGE 297
The result was 'THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT the Master of the Universe', in which I later added a description of the work with the pain of the thinking mind, the ego.
I was very proud of the result and read it aloud to TuTu.
"I’m the pen, and you’re the ink," he said.
I became furious and asked if he wanted to take credit for my work.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 298
Most
of
us have discovered that those of us, who harvest honor and respect from
our family and our society receive a lot of attention and have an easier
time getting our way.
That
has
led many of us to believe
that we receive more love, care, compassion and mercy than other people,
and therefore we strived all the time to achieve honor and respect from
our family and our society.
Only
when
we came to TTDF we accepted that even though we achieved to get honor
and respect from our family or society, it had got nothing to do with
achieving love, care, compassion and mercy.
This
made
it possible for us to let go of our pursuit of the power and the glory,
realizing that the power and the glory belong to God, our FatherMother,
and the pursuit of power and glory belong to the Ego.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will choose to leave the power and the glory to God, my FatherMother.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE PATH TO THE ABSOLUTE SELF-REALIZATION, PAGE 85
Once the Master was asked if it is good for the spiritual life to live in celibacy and he answered laughingly: "God is no fool. If it was enough with one sex, there wouldn’t be two."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 86
We
know
that our sexuality is both the greatest power and the highest joy we
have as humans, and this can lead some of us to imagine that if we
sacrifice that power and that joy, we can fulfill our spiritual
ambitions.
We
imagine
that our sacrifice will make God hear us more than others and will
liberate us from our fear of life and death, and at the same time we can
achieve honor and respect from others as God’s priests and priestesses.
This
has
led to many distortions in our human sexuality, which factually
nessesarily must be purified in order to achieve spiritual growth and
this became clear to us when we came to TTDF.
It
was
only possible for us to activate and purify our four aspects if we had a
sexual relationship with another human being, because that gave us the
opportunity to observe and purify our relationship with this mighty
power.
Today's
contemplation
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH
APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGUST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 2, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT LOVE WITHOUT LIMITS, PAGE 359
The double spiral also split into two, a he and a she, so as to be able to manifest into myriads of life, because the fruit of love is life, and life is in the organic growth in the same form as in the cosmic being, namely in Spirit, Soul, thought, emotion and action, which leads to the formation of new life.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 361
Before
we
came to TTDF, most of us had thought of the creation and manifestation
of new life on Earth as the birth of a child, but now we understood that
new life is also created on Earth in many other ways.
When
we
step out of our house and look around, we experience many new things
that can inspire us and affect our daily life in new ways, giving us the
joy of new creation and manifestation of the movements of our energy
body.
When
our
emotional feelings rise in painful ways, we use Step Six of our TTDF
Program to pair them with joy, thereby creating and manifesting new life
in the form of new wisdom in our Ego.
When
we
have created and manifested new thoughts by pairing the thoughts and
emotional feelings in a Pain Ring with the thoughts and emotional
feelings in a Joy Ring, we have created and manifested new life in our
Ego.
Today’s
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 2, THE ANGELIC WEDDING, THE SECTION THE PAIN OF SEPARATION 1, PAGE 233
It was a telephonic telegram with a laconic message: "Delayed."
I staggered away from the phone and sank down on the sofa.
A sharp pain went through my heart and spread to my head.
After a couple of hours, the physical pain began diminishing.
The following days, I went around in a haze.
Most
of the time, I lay on the sofa and stared out into empty
air.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 233
When
we
worked with the fairytale about the Love Without Limits in Step Two, we
came closer to our true Self, our Spirit, and thus we discovered that
first we had manifested ourselves in creation in the limited form of our
Soul.
We
split
ourselves into a ‘he’ Soul and a ‘she’ Soul in the nuclear explosion of
the socalled ‘Big Bang’, when we projected ourselves split into two into
the limited, ignorant, powerless and mortal/changeable forms of our
Souls.
The
split
of our core as one self as the merged masculine and feminine principle,
called Ardhanarishvara, into our two divine Souls, caused great pain and
fear of having lost our Spirit Mate.
We
casted
a mitigating veil over this pain and this fear, which thus came to live
on a plane of existence of its own, and this paining, scared, loveless
plane of energy we call our Ego.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
5, CHAPTER 1 ,
MY LIFE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION THE COMING
INTO BEING OF THE BRIDGE, PAGE
395
Some days later, I woke up one morning and felt ready to begin the work.
It proved to be an uplifting assignment, because I woke up every morning with a sentence in my head, and as soon as I wrote it down, I felt inspired and wrote away.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 395
When
we
sleep and enter into deep dreamless sleep, our thinking mind, our Ego,
becomes completely still, and thus we are able to pick up inspiring
impulses from our knowing mind, our God mind.
These
intuitive
impulses can consist of a cleansing of our Ego's impressions from the
day in the form of guiding dreams about what we can advantageously work
with in our Tenth Step for the day.
To
include
this divine guidance in our Step Work, many of us choose to have a
notebook and pen next to our bed, so that we can write down the
experiences and inspirations of the night when we wake up.
Many
others
of us choose instead to seek inspiration for the day's Step work by
beginning the day with the Two-Way Prayer and writing down the guidance
and inspiration we receive as the day's divine inspiration.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 4, PILGRIMAGE, THE SECTION A TEST, PAGE 71
"You don’t know what
is right and wrong," he asked in his usual gentle voice but with an
undertone that made me squirm.
"No," I said stiffly, "it depends on the circumstances."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 71
Before
we
came to TTDF we had a clear sense of right and wrong, but as our Step
work progressed we discovered in Step Four that many of these
perceptions were not our own.
They
stemmed
from what we learned as children, where our family and our society
taught us what their perceptions of right and wrong were and made us
take this to heart as best as they could in order to make us fit in.
In
our
adulthood we continued to do our best to fit in, even though much of
what we had learned as children about right and wrong did not
necessarily feel right and wrong to ourselves.
In
Step
Six we worked with what did not feel right and wrong to ourselves and
gave ourselves permission to let go of our childhood guidelines for what
is right and wrong.
Today’s
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 3, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT GOOD AND EVIL, PAGE 365
The
mercy of the destroyer and the destroyeress was a love of a very
particular casting, because he and she did not wish for anything other
than the liberation of the entrapped part of the Souls, and he and she
accepted that the manifested creatures were unable to love or even
appreciate his and her service, because his and her service was
connected with much pain and great fear and with reluctance to let go
of the pleasant parts of their own manifestations of creatures
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 369
In
our
work with the vessels we use to experience life in the dimensions, our
work with our physical body in the third dimension is the work with
facing the fact that our vessel has a limited shelf life.
Those
of
us who identify ourselves with our physical body are seized by great
fear when our physical body is used up and our physical death therefore
approaches.
All
the
fear and pain associated with a life and a death by having inhabited a
physical body helps us to achieve compassion and Mercy Consciousness
towards others who are suffering through the same.
In
doing
so, we recognize that our human fear and pain are the root of our
development of our compassion and Mercy Consciousness, which is also
called our Christ Consciousness or our Holy Spirit.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will acknowledge my fear and my pain as the root to develop my
compassion and my Mercy Consciousness, also called my Holy Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 2, THE ANGELIC WEDDING, THE SECTION THE HELP OF THE CROWN PRINCE 1, PAGE 240
Purple!
The color of magic!
That magic which
springs from the merger of blue, which represents the Divine love, and
red, which represents the earthly love.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 243
As
our
ability to sense on more and more subtle levels develops, we become
aware of how the colors in our surroundings can affect our thoughts and
emotions.
As
we
work on finding the meditation form that resonates with us in Step
Eleven, some of us discovered that visualizing different colors
activates different emotional states within us.
When
we
visualize the cool colors of the color spectrum, such as blue and green,
and hold our inner focus on them, our emotions calm down and this gives
us the ability to sit in quiet contemplation and meditation.
When
we
visualize the warm colors of the color spectrum, such as red and orange,
and hold our inner focus on them, it stimulates our movement energy and
is thus not conducive as basis for meditation.
Today's Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 5, CHAPTER 1, MY LIFE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION THE TREE OF LIFE, PAGE 400
Meaning of 5:
Life-Elixir
Definition: Fountain of Youth
Explanation: The Fountain of Youth consists in the attainment of the
syntheses of God the Spirit Father, Goddess the Spirit Mother, God the
Spirit Son and Goddess the Spirit Daughter.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 402
Little
by
little, as our oneness with our omnipresent, omniscient, omnipotent, and
immortal/unchangeable true Self, our Spirit, became more and more
extensive, we found the fountain of youth.
Our
knowledge
of our immortality gave us access to our elixir of life, which is a
consequence of the awareness of our immortality/unchangeability as our
true Self, our Spirit.
Our
elixir
of life was the energy that flowed through our earthly lives as an
ability and willingness to be open like a child, who is in a state of
wonder in a constant learning process.
Our
daily
interest in discovering new aspects of life makes us feel eternally
young, so we rejoice in all our daily new discoveries about our form
existence while we live our earthly lives.
Today's
Contemplation
Today I will be open like a child in my admiration of all the things that I can sense and learn new things about during the course of the day.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE OUTRAGE OVER CHRIST, PAGE 92
This untruth is expressed by those who desire the power and the glory, and so they demand that anybody who admits to possess the Christ Consciousness/the Mercy Consciousness must be able to walk on water in physical Reality, and thereby, they hinder the nuances of the Christ Consciousness/the Mercy Consciousness in coming to an honest expression.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 92
When
we
have completed our Twelfth Step in TTDF, we have attained the Mercy
Consciousness, also called the Christ Consciousness, and this involves
that we show mercy to those who are still suffering.
As
a
result of using our Program to the fullest, we have had many experiences
of the happiness of our true Self, our Spirit that shows us the inner
reality that we had denied before coming to TTDF.
As
long
as we had denied our true Self, our Spirit, we wanted the power to make
others honor us, because we believed that would help us to have all our
desires fulfilled and we would thus become happy.
In
this
phase of our existential development, our denial of our true Self, our
Spirit, was so powerful that we found it impossible to believe that in
fact a reality was to be found in which we could fly and walk on water.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will courageously let go of my desire for the power and the glory in
the awareness that my happiness does not lie there, but in my true
Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 4, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS WHO WALK ON THE EARTH, PAGE 370
"Why are you called the King of Kings and the Queen of
Queens, the Master of Masters and the Masteress of Masteresses, the
Highest Authority of the Hierarchy?"
"We were the first who went out in manifested formcreatures, and
because we know most about being a creature in a manifested form, we
teach others in the art of being a creature in a manifested form.
Thus,
we are
the humble male and female servant of all our created and manifested
brothers and sisters and their highest authority concerning the
existence as a created and manifested formidentity, whether our
brothers and sisters are kings or queens, masters or masteresses or
beggars or beggarwomen."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 373
As
our
oneness with our true Self, our Spirit, becomes more and more prominent,
we become able to take responsibility for our formexistences on all our
planes of existence.
Whether
it
is our formexistence on the material plane, the physical plane, the
etheric plane, the astral plane, the causal plane, or the Soul plane, we
take responsibility for both our joys and our pains.
No
matter
what form existence we are focused on, it is true for all of them that
when we allow ourselves to be limited by a form, we simultaneously
become ignorant, powerless, and mortal/changeable.
As
Spirit,
we have taken on the form of a human being, who holds the heaviest,
darkest, slowest, and most frightening vibration, for the purpose of
expanding our expression of love when we return home to the higher
realms.
Today's
Contemplation
Today,
as
the King or Queen of my Universe, I will take the full responsibility
for my joys and my pains in my life as a human being
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 1, THE EARTHLY WEDDING, THE SECTION THE INITIATION OF THE EARTH INTO THE SEED OF LOVE, PAGE 210
Previously, the atmosphere of the Earth had received The Seed of Love as subtle irradiation, but on this occasion, the Earth got a direct injection of The Seed of Love by the help of Shri Krishna and the 16,000 fertilized lower hearts, which now contained The Seed of Love, and thus, the energy combination of the atmosphere of the Earth was changed.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 211
As
we
learn about our different planes of consciousness in our TTDF Program,
we discover that our Soul resides in the Seventh Dimension, also called
the Heavens, or the plane of social interaction.
On
the
Soul Plane, where we live as Gods and Goddesses, there are many
different energy fields that represent different expressions of love,
care, compassion, and mercy.
Depending
on
which energies we wish to be a part of temporarily or over longer
periods, we choose to be part of a particular Soul Cluster that is
interested in the same energy field as us.
When
we
choose to take on a life on Earth from our chosen energy field, Mother
Earth gets a direct infusion of the energy from our chosen energy field
that we have come to bring her as a gift at her request.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will use the information described in The ToTo Doctrine – The New
World Order in the Fairy
Tale about the Gods and the Goddesses, Who Walk on the Earth to study
how I can personally learn to make use of these energies.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 3 , SPIRITUAL EXPERIENCES, THE SECTION CONSTANT REMEMBRANCE, PAGE 40
Gradually, as I spoke
with other meditating people both from the Master’s system of
meditation and other systems, and at the same time, my capacity to
focus developed, I understood that a person usually selects his/her
spiritual guide for the purpose of achieving his/her own conscious
contact with God, but since it is difficult to focus your attention on
something as abstract as the emptiness in the focus point, which is
required to see, hear, feel or sense God, you can use your chosen
guide to create and manifest an inner focus point by directing your
thoughts towards this person throughout the day.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 40
We
had
been on the spiritual path long before we came to the TuTu Doctrine
Fellowship, and on our path we came into contact with many other people,
who walked the spiritual path together with us.
They
taught
us that we needed the capacity to meditate, which consists of quieting
the constant chatter of our thinking mind, our Ego, so as to become able
to pick up the subtle intuitive impulses from our true Self, our Spirit.
Regardless
of
the method we chose, it became clear to us when we came to TTDF that the
purpose of our meditation practice was to train our focus capacity to
remain in the empty space between thoughts.
As
we
became well-trained in this in our Eleventh Step, we became better and
better at being in oneness with our true Self, our Spirit, and thus
becoming able to remain in The Blissful Flow of the Present Moment.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will train my focus capacity to stay in the empty space between
thoughts so that I can become able to be focused in The Blissful Flow
of the Present Moment as much as possible.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION REDEMPTION, PAGE 175
If
I changed that which I or others did not like about me, if I became
better in doing this or that, if I thought in a different way, felt
in a different way, acted in a different way, then others had to
confirm that my heart was noble, and if everybody agreed on it, the
prince also had to be able to see it.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 175
As
children,
we have a clear perception of fairy tales as expressions of a spiritual
Reality that can be expressed so simply that as children we immediately
understand the guidance the fairy tale contains.
Therefore,
when
we hear a fairy tale about living happily ever after, we understand that
they are literal descriptions of the energies that need to be activated
in order for us to achieve the happiness of the great love.
The
fairy
tales tell of a reality where good qualities are necessary for us to
experience love, and that a noble heart is necessary to be able to give
and receive love.
Only
when
we came to TTDF, we discovered we could create and manifest a noble
heart by creating and manifesting a wise and enlightened Ego, so our
heart can become one with the noble heart in our true Self, our Spirit.
Today's
Contemplation
Today,
I
will use the Rings in Step Six to work on accessing the noble heart of
my true Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 5, THE TUTU DOCTRINE, THE SECTION THE FERTILIZED EGG, PAGE 382
For
a
Person who has Access to The Holy Grail, which is The Holiest of The
Holy, his and Her Merged Heart's
Heart is Alpha and Omega, His and her
Merged Heart's Heart is The Truth, The Path and The Life, and by the
help of God The Father, Goddess the Mother,
his or her Beloved and his or
her pure love, the Person Fearlessly remains in The Sacred
Fire from his and her Merged
Heart's Free Emotional Stream and receives
his or her Personal Guidance from here, and this is called
Drinking from The Holy Grail.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 383
Many
of
us have heard about the Holy Grail, which was perceived to be a magical
cup we could drink from if we could find the Grail and drink from it and
thus find holy guidance in all life’s big and small tasks.
At
our
TTDF meetings we receive amulets for various milestones, and on one side
we can choose the graph that either shows the Absolute, or the Absolute
Heart, or the Holy Grail, which actually looks like a cup.
In
Step
Eleven where we work with the TuTu Doctrine itself, we learn that the
Holy Grail is God’s and our own Heart’s Heart, our merged masculine and
feminine principle that is also called Ardhanarishvara.
We
carry
out our work with our Eleventh Step to expand our conscious contact with
our personal Ardhanarishvara so we can receive our daily guidance from
our Heart’s Heart, our personal Holy Grail.
Today's
Contemplation
Today I will work on acknowledging who and what I am, so I may be able to 'drink' the omniscience from my Holy Grail.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 3, THE DIVINE WEDDING, THE SECTION HE LOVES ME – HE LOVES ME NOT, PAGE 284
When I hung up, I thought that now it would show if he really loved me, for only an addict, who has too little drugs to cover his own needs like TuTu will know what I asked from him.
Two hours later, I found an excuse to leave my sister’s supervision and went to the station.
He was there.
"He
really loves me," I thought in wonder.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 285
As
long
as we deny our unconditional love, we cannot believe that others love
us, and this can make us put others to the test in various ways so as to
find out if we can believe that they love us.
Since
our
thinking mind, our Ego, is a loveless fear energy, we do not have access
to love as long as we think, feel and act from our dualistic
psychological landscape.
Therefore,
when
we meet a person, who has access to his or her capacity to love and
declares his or her love for us, we cannot believe that the love is
real, and instead we consider what the person's hidden intention might
be.
In
this
state, we have a need to get proof that satisfies our thinking mind, our
Ego, as a sign of that the person who claims that he or she loves us has
no hidden intentions.
Today’s contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 6, CHAPTER 1, APPENDIXES, THE SECTION APPENDIX G, PAGE 412
|
When the Small Ring of Faith became active in us, we trusted
that we would receive what we needed when we needed it, and our
experience of prosperity made it possible for us to generously
share our surplus with others responsibly instead of clinging to
it. When the Small Ring of Hope became active in us, we had belief
in that our desires would be fulfilled if we worked for it, so
we sought enlightenment about what we could do to fulfill them,
and in doing so we developed our discernment, and as a result we
achieved serenity.
When the Small Ring of Love became active in us, we accepted
our desires and needs, and we admitted to others if we needed
help to fulfill them, and thus we achieved increased health and
sanity. |
|
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 412
Today’s contemplation
Today I will acknowledge four virtues of my thinking mind, my Ego, by using one of the Four Small Rings of Joy in a social interaction.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE ONE, WHO GIVES HIS/HER LIFE SHALL PRESERVE IT, AND THE ONE, WHO TRIES TO PRESERVE IT, SHALL LOSE IT, PAGE 99
The result of his own limitation because of his mortal body was his ignorance of many things and his powerlessness over that which he did not know, but because his True Self was not submitted to these limitations, he moved ahead courageously in life trusting the lead of his True Self.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 100
On
our
long Earthwalk on the spiritual path, our thought world was dominated by
our thinking mind’s, our Ego’s thought system and in this thought
system, surrender was a thought surrounded by great fear.
Only
when
we came to TTDF and needed to admit our true nature in each and every
meeting by first saying our name and then admitting: I am Unconditional
Love.
In
addition,
our Second Step helped us to overcome our fear of surrendering to our
Unconditional Love, because we examined and found the unconditionally
loving intention behind all the pains in our lives.
In
doing
so, we finally became ready to leave fear behind and surrender to the
unconditional love, care, compassion and mercy of our true Self, our
Spirit.
Today’s
Contemplation
Today
I
will use my Second and Third Step to gain the courage to surrender to
my true Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 5, THE TUTU DOCTRINE, THE SECTION THE FERTILIZED EGG, PAGE 382
For upcoming Eons, Humanity is Moving into The Ascending Spiral, towards The Ascending Curve on The Journey Back to The Origin.
Our Vehicle for The
Journey and The Landscapes we Pass Through is our Divine Mother, and
The Spirit who Lives in The Vehicle
and in The Landscapes is our Divine Father, and we are The Fruit of
Both.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 385
Many
of
us have imagined that we must die on all our planes of existence in
order to return to the origin and thus attain the joy without opposites
called happiness, which belongs to our origin.
However,
in
our work with our TTDF Program, we discover that the journey back to the
happiness of our origin can take place if we choose to meet our thinking
mind, our Ego with unconditional love.
Because
of
our thinking mind’s, our Ego’s pain and fear, it is the most hated and
repressed energy form on Earth, and it is this energy form that we need
to heal with our unconditional love.
We
learn
to use the intuitive thought system of our true Self, our Spirit, to
transform our thinking mind’s, our Ego’s fear and pain into
enlightenment and wisdom, and this is our return to the happiness of our
origin.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will meet the pain and fear of my thinking mind, my Ego, with the
unconditional love, care, compassion and mercy of my true Self, my
Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 1, THE INITIATION, THE SECTION CHILDHOOD FAITH, PAGE 14
But at some
point in time, nobody would obey Him anyway, and therefore He
decided to kill all the people in the World except Noah and the animals,
but this did not help much either; so
He still had to torment people at regular intervals.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 15
Before
coming
to TTDF, we had not realized that many of us had an underlying Godfear
that cut us off from becoming one with our true Self, our Spirit, and
thus becoming one with our love for God.
We
feared
that God would punish us in more or less painful ways if we did not obey
God in the way others told us we should, but we took our Godfear up to
the transformation into love in our Sixth Step.
We
realized
that revenge belongs in the Microring of Hatred with its indignation,
vindictiveness, belligerence, and bitterness, and we paired it with the
Microring of Love with it’s mercy, forgiveness, conciliatory, and
sweetness.
Thus
our
Egomind’s fear and pain were transformed into enlightenment and wisdom,
and in the arising stillness in our Egomind it became possible for us to
become one with our true Self, our Spirit, and with our love for God.
Today's
Contemplations
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 4, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS WHO WALK ON THE EARTH, PAGE 370
"Is it not my task to try to relieve the pain of my neighbor then?"
"Many are the
called, but few are the chosen.
It is given nobody to be able to help everyone with every problem, and
therefore you must first search your heart to decide if it is your
task to help."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 374
Many
of
us feel that it is our job to help our neighbor regardless of his or her
circumstances, and this can lead to an activation of the mental illness
found in the Ring of Codependency.
When
we
find ourselves in the Ring of Codependency with its savior role, seducer
role, victim role, and offender role, we can feel compelled to try to
solve those of our neighbors’ problem they in fact need to solve
themselves.
In
TTDF
we instead choose to use the Ring of Emotional Sobriety with its
detachment, integrity, respect for self, and respect for others to solve
our own problems and give our neighbor time and space to solve his or
hers.
Therefore
we
choose to use our resources—our time, our energy, our interest, and our
money—on solving our own problems and leave it to our neighbor to solve
his or her own problems.
Today’s
Contemplation
Today,
I choose to use the Ring of Emotional Sobriety if I feel compelled
to help my neighbor with a problem my neighbor needs to learn to
solve himself or herself.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 4, THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, THE SECTION SHIVA THE DESTROYER, PAGE 298
Only after TuTu’s death,
it occurred to me that I still needed to describe the last
of the Hinduistic trinity, Vishnu the Maintainer, and then 'The
Fairytale about the Gods and Goddessess who walk on the Earth', came
into being.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 299
Most of us had had many inner experiences before we came to TTDF, and
many of us had had interactions with our deceased family members, inner
guides, inner male and female friends and inner animals and plants.
When
we
had inner experiences in our childhood, and most of our surroundings
believed that such experiences arose from a vivid imagination, we got
used to seeing our inner life as unreal.
We
needed
to change this attitude in order to be able to take seriously our
conversations with our true Self, our Spirit, and our inner guides in
our Second, Third, Seventh, and Eleventh Step.
We
used
Step Four to realize these influences from our childhood, Step Six to
liberate us from them, and Step Eight and Nine to forgive and make
amends to ourselves for using these self-destructive patterns in our
life.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION ARROGANCE 2, PAGE 169
Then, I was told that I had to first accept possessing the feeling of arrogance to be able to investigate under which circumstances it arose and what results I achieved from the actions I did under the influence of my arrogance.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 170
In our TTDF
Program, the recovery from our existential pains begin with the
admission of our unconditional Love, and how our denial of it makes
our lives unmanageable.
After these
admissions, our recovery can begin with us investigating what our true
Self’s, our Spirit’s unconditionally loving purpose is in choosing to
come to Earth to experience these pains.
When we have found
the unconditionally loving intention of our true Self, our Spirit with
choosing to experience the pain of denying, who and what we are, we
choose to surrender to what we have discovered.
Gradually, as
various thoughts arise that oppose our surrender, we work on them with
the help of the rest of the Steps in our TTDF Program until our
surrender is complete.
Today’s
Contemplation
Today I will use
my TTDF Program to surrender to my recovery from my denial of who
and what I am.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 3, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT GOOD AND EVIL, PAGE 365
Some ideas and images were pleasant and some were frightening, and thus the idea of good and evil came into being.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 367
Before
we
came to TTDF, we found ourselves mostly in the dualistic thought system
of our Egomind with its defects of character that are called evil and
its virtues that are called good.
In
TTDF
we need to rise above this thought system to become Ourselves as we are
in Truth and we use our Sixth Step to pair evil with good so that we can
achieve an enlightened and wise Egomind.
When
we
finally meet our Egomind from our unconditional Love, our Egomind stops
filling our mind with screams of fear and pain, and thus our Egomind
becomes silent.
We
need
the silence of our Egomind to be able to hear the intuitive thought
system of our Godmind, and we need our enlightened and wise Egomind to
translate the intuitive impulses of our Godmind into the language of
Earth.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will use my Sixth Step in TTDF to take unconditionally loving care of
the fear and pain of my Ego mind so that I can become myself in Truth.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1,THE PRINCIPLES , THE SECTION HIERARCHY AND FELLOWSHIP, PAGE 79
Humankind has now stepped out of the flock mentality by the help of the hierarchy, and in that way, achieved the respect for the individual, and therefore time is ripe to achieve love, care, compassion and mercy for the individual by the help of the Fellowship.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 79
Before
we
came to TTDF, we found ourselves mostly in the dualistic thought system
of our Egomind with its defects of character that are called evil and
its virtues that are called good.
In
TTDF
we need to rise above this thought system to become Ourselves as we are
in Truth and we use our Sixth Step to pair evil with good so that we can
achieve an enlightened and wise Egomind.
When
we
finally meet our Egomind from our unconditional Love, our Egomind stops
filling our mind with screams of fear and pain, and thus our Egomind
becomes silent.
We
need
the silence of our Egomind to be able to hear the intuitive thought
system of our Godmind, and we need our enlightened and wise Egomind to
translate the intuitive impulses of our Godmind into the language of
Earth.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will use my Sixth Step in TTDF to take unconditionally loving care of
the fear and pain of my Ego mind so that I can become myself in Truth.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 3, THE DIVINE WEDDING, THE SECTION INITIATION TO SHIVA, PAGE 280
"Oh,"
I said, "life on Earth is a miracle. Just think, then all these
Spirits walk around in the streets in a physical body, which allows
them to experience life on Earth."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 280
Many
of
us tend to neglect our physical body at the beginning of our walk on the
spiritual path, because we became so absorbed in our spiritual pursuit
that it almost became an obsession.
Only
after
our physical body began to give us problems we felt compelled to give it
attention by the help of our TTDF Program, and thereby we discovered
that it is an extension of our Soul.
Furthermore,
we
discovered that we decided to incarnate on Earth into a limited,
ignorant, powerless, and mortal/changing body in order to learn to
incorporate the slow and dark vibration of Mother Earth into our Soul.
This
discovery
opened us up to learning to use our Sixth Step to release the
mental-emotional patterns that created illness, weakness, discomfort,
and pain in our bodies.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will take care of my physical body with unconditional love, care,
compassion and mercy and also see to it that my Mother Earth body is
well rested, well groomed, well nourished and well exercised.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 2, FACE TO FACE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION ARROGANCE 1, PAGE 28
The next morning, the Master’s transmission had hardly begun before I began to feel ashamed and I got confused because I did not understand why.
It occurred to me that I had reasons to feel ashamed about my behavior the previous evening.
Patiently,
the others had waited the unfolding of events even if they were sore
from sitting on the floor too, but I had not been patient, and on
top of that, I was arrogant enough to think that I was above them
because of my action.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 29
Step
Eight
and Nine come so late in our Program, because we are working on
admitting and letting go of our guiltfeelings and the accompanying
shame, which both are so painful, they are difficult for most of us to
handle.
However,
at
this late stage in our Step work, we have worked so much on facing our
painful emotional feelings that we are ready to come out into the open
with our shameful emotional feelings.
Shame
makes
us hide, even from ourselves, by suppressing, denying, dismissing, or
ignoring our emotional feelings of shame, which are perceived to be the
deadliest poisons to our spiritual life.
To
avoid
these pains, it could happen that we tried to get ahead of them by
spending long periods of time in the Ring of Self-Centeredness with its
self-criticism, depression, self-praise, and euphoria without it helping
us.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
|
July 01
Compassion for Mother Earth |
July 02 Divine
guidance |
July 03
Practice
makes master |
|
July
05 Relapse |
July
06
Universal love |
|
|
July
07
The hierarchy |
July
08
The
medicine of the Gods |
July
09
The Bird Phoenix consciousness |
|
July
10
To live happily ever after |
July
11
The use of The Four Small Rings of pan |
July
12
The
Seed of Love |
|
July
13
Self-will and God-will |
July
14
Self-centeredness |
July
15
Soul
Mates |
|
July
16
Pain on top of pain |
July
17
Weeping and
gnashing of teeth |
July
18
Psychodrama |
|
July
19
To hold on to love |
July
20
Pandora's Box |
July
21
The individual and personal God |
|
July
22
God is EVERYTHING |
July
23
Capacity for pain |
July
24
The Veil of Maya |
|
July
25 Mantra |
July
26
The entrance to the New World Order |
July
27
Fear
of death |
|
July
28
Vishnu's
gift to humankind |
July
29
ToTos Solfond (TuTu's Sun Foundation) |
July
30
The
messenger of the New World Order |
| July 31 The Music of the spheres |
FROM PART
3, CHAPTER 3,
THE DIVINE WEDDING, THE SECTION TUTU'S TEARS,
PAGE 278
He took my hand, looked at my prick marks, and with tears in his eyes, he gently stroked it, while he said: "Your little hand. Your little hand."
I looked surprised at the tears that rolled down his cheeks.
Why did he take that so hard?
Why, he used the needle himself.
The TuTu Doktrinen – Den Nye Verdensorden,
page 279
We all have a little piece of Mother Earth in the form of
our physical body and earthly possessions, and thus we also have an
opportunity to show compassion to Mother Earth by the help of our body
and our possessions.
Many of the families we grew up in had not yet learned
that there is a connection between our use of mental-emotional patterns
and the illnesses and uncomfortable experiences we had from living in a
physical body.
Therefore, we did not learn to treat our bodies with love,
care, compassion and mercy, nor to ensure that they were well rested,
well cared for, well nourished and well exercised.
However, in our TTDF Program we learn to know the
connection between our use of different mental-emotional patterns and
the physical illnesses, weaknesses, discomforts and pains we experience
physically.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will treat my part of Mother Earth with compassion
by treating my physical possessions with compassion and also
inventorying what mental-emotional patterns I can use to create
health, strength, well-being and joy in my physical body.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 3, SPIRITUAL EXPERIENCES, THE SECTION MEMORY IMAGE FROM A PREVIOUS INCARNATION, PAGE 44
Later,
this proved to be a memory dream from a previous incarnation that,
at the same time, pointed out what was going to become my most
important problem in my relationship with TuTu.
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 45
In our wake state, we are mostly having our focus directed
outward on our earthly life and when it is directed inward it is on our
thoughts and emotional feelings about various areas of our earthly life.
When our focus shifts between being directed outward and
directed inward in this way, it can lead to us being unaware of the
impulses and guidance that come to us from our true Self, our Spirit.
However, our focus shifts when we sleep, where our minds
are cleansed of hurts and tears from the day by the help of dreams, and
our conscious contact with our true Self, our Spirit can also happen by
the help of dreams.
Therefore many of us choose to keep a notepad and a pen by
our bed side to write down the dreams that come to us during the night,
whether they are about purification or about guidance from our true
Self, our Spirit.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will write down the night's dreams and use my
cleansing dreams in my Tenth Step and my guiding dreams in my Eleventh
Step.
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH
APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGUST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
FROM PART 5, CHAPTER
1, MY LIFE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION SHAMANIC TRAVEL, PAGE 395
"You should just put out your astral arms," she said.
"I don’t know how you do that," I said.
"Just do it,” she said, "you have done it many times
before."
"Yes, but I don’t think I can find out any more," I
said.
"Practice makes Master," she said dryly.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 395
On our path, many of us had been deceived by the fact that
some spiritual teachers experienced a spiritual awakening overnight, and
we had come to believe that our spiritual awakening should happen in the
same way.
However, as our work with our TTDF Program progressed, we
discovered that in our case, we got a slow spiritual awakening by the
help of daily practice of our Steps.
In Step One, we acknowledged the unmanageability of
denying our powerlessness over our unconditional love, and thus we could
begin our recovery in Step Two.
By the time we reached Step Twelve, we had let go of all
fear and anger by acknowledging our unconditional love, and our
compassionate help to those who still suffered from fear and anger
began.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will sponsor a person who wants to be freed from fear and anger by acknowledging their unconditional love.
FROM PART
4, CHAPTER 1,
THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE MASTER OF THE UNIVERSE, PAGE
347
"Who are the Masters of the Universe?"
"There are infinitely many, big and small, inner and outer."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 350
Before we came to TTDF, many of us were mostly focused on being limited,
ignorant, powerless and mortal/changeable whether physical, energetic,
emotional, mental or social.
Only when we came to TTDF and
returned to our true Self, our Spirit, we became aware that we are
omnipresent, omniscient, omnipotent and immortal/unchangeable.
That helped us to understand that each of us are the Lord and the Lady
of your own Universe, and we are thus completely responsible for our
human experiences whether we wanted to research earthly pain or joy.
That gave us the incentive to take unconditionally loving, caring,
compassionate and mercifully of our bodies whether physical,
energetic, emotional, mental or social.
Today's
Contemplation
Today I will take
full responsibility for all my experiences on all my levels of
existence whether my experiences hold pain or joy.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 4, THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, THE SECTION RELAPSE, PAGE 293
Soon, most of my
life took place in Sundholm, and when he was granted his Methadone,
I got a desire to experience the needle again, so I persuaded him to
give me a little of his medicine.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 293
As spiritual aspirants from birth, we quickly became
homesick when we discovered that here on Earth we are isolated in each
our own bodies and are strangers to each other, and this could make us
feel confused and unhappy.
Before we came to TTDF, this had made many of us engage in
ingesting strong chemicals,
because the states of mind they induced were very similar to the various
spiritual states of mind we longed for.
White sugar, flour, pasta and bread seemed consoling,
nicotine seemed relieving, alcohol seemed fun, hashish seemed
mind-expanding, heroin seemed calming and cocaine seemed invigorating,
and that helped us.
However, those chemical were addictive, so we had to let
them go again after some time and move on, and when we came to TTDF we
became at long last able to experience these states of mind without
using chemicals.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will work on experiencing the states of mind that
I have longed for by the help of my TTDF Program instead of taking a
relapse into chemicals.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 2, FACE TO FACE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION UNIVERSAL LOVE, PAGE 29
I became happy and
thought that his love was a special boon for me alone, but when I
told it to one of the other disciples, she said that she knew this
experience too.
Later, I heard other disciples, both male and female, express
similar experiences and I understood that the Master’s love was
universal.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 30
When we are identified with our Egomind, we experience
being in love as an intoxication, and when we are identified with our
true Self, our Spirit, we experience being in love as our day to day
consciousness.
In the same way that our painful and angry emotions
radiate from us and make others withdraw, our being in love also
radiates from us and make others feel attracted to us.
Our being in love can infect others, so that they also
feel being in love, and if they are identified with their Egomind, it
can make them believe that our universal being in love is directed
towards them alone.
If we are together with others, who are sensitive to our
being in love, it can be important for us and them to let them know that
our being in love is not necessarily concerned with a desire for a
relationship.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will gratefully receive the universal love of my
spiritual teacher.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4 CHAPTER 4, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS WHO WALK ON THE EARTH, PAGE 370
"The hierarchy is the diversity, which is also called the multiplicity or The Worldly Spirit, who restores the creatures' consciousness of their uniqueness, because each creature is unique.
Even two snowflakes
are different and so differ in a unique way from the rest."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 372
We all participate in different groups, where we
experience a hierarchical division of group members depending on the
ability, knowledge and personality of the various members.
Also in the ToTo Doctrine Fellowship there is a hierarchy,
where those who undertake to give their time, energy and interest so
that the newcomers can learn to use the Program, are at the top of the
hierarchy.
Newcomers who are interested in learning to use the TTDF
Program also stand high in the hierarchy, because they are interested in
giving their time, interest and energy to their own and humankind's
upliftment
Next we find those, who are willing to also undertake
various types of service work as meeting chairs, coffee people,
treasurers, group representatives and similar tasks.
Today's contemplation
Today I will accept that as a newcomer I am not yet
interested in uplifting myself and the World to the level that TTDF
offers, and therefore I find myself at the bottom of TTDF's hierarchy.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
3, CHAPTER 2,
THE ANGELIC WEDDING, THE SECTION TUTU’S
ILLNESS 1, PAGE 256
He called the opium
poppy’s juice, which is used to manufacture painkillers such as
opium, morphine, heroin and other morphological preparations for the
medicine of the Gods that they had given as a gift to ease
humankind's pains.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 258
Many of us have been dependent on painkilling medicine,
because our homesickness for the God Realm made us feel hopeless and
suicidal, and those feelings resulted in physical illness, weakness,
discomfort and pain.
This made us even more homesick and so our need for
damping the pain became so intense that we became ready to do anything
to find relief, and that gave others the opportunity to exploit us in
various ways.
The Gods of the seventh dimension have given humankind
various possibilities for easing our pain until we could come to the
point in our development where we were able to live with it.
In TTDF we achieved the states of mind that we needed to
become able to live with our homesickness, so thereby we were no longer
dependent on the legislation of society about who were entitled to the
medicine of the Gods.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use the Medicine of the Gods if I am in pain until I am able to relieve my pains without chemicals.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 3, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT GOOD AND EVIL, PAGE 365
"By remembering that after the destruction comes the
resurrection, for the manifested creatures rise again in their full
height, like bird Phoenix, who rises from the ashes of his or her old
existence every single day with the insight and clarity that lies at
the root of the pain when the pain itself is burnt to ashes."
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 369
In every situation there is that which is wanted and that
which is not wanted, and in that phase of our existence where we were
mainly identified with the painful side of our Egomind, we were focused
on the not wanted.
Gradually, as we used our TTDF Program, we became more and
more identified with our unconditional love, and thereby we became able
to lovingly deal with the painful side of our Egomind.
We did this by pairing the painful side of our Egomind
with the joyful side by the help our daily Tenth Step, so that wisdom
and enlightenment became the predominant state of our Egomind.
Thus we activated the archetypal energy field of the Bird
Phoenix in our psychological landscape, and thus we became able to daily
rise from the ashes of the pains of the day, when the pains themselves
had become ashes.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use my Tenth Step to seek refuge from my
daily existential pains in the energy field of the Bird Phoenix,
whether my pains are big or small.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION INTERPRETATION OF THE ARCHETYPE, PAGE 172
The big wedding symbolizes the Spiritual Wedding.
That
they
lived happily ever after symbolizes their immersion in God’s
Light of Love, until the manifestation of a new creation begins.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 173
In our TTDF Program, we worked on setting our
unconditional love up as our highest priority and thus also setup our
lovemaking, which is the highest expression of love, as our highest
priority.
Many of us have got a distorted impression of lovemaking
in our childhood because of our family's or our society's fear of the
tremendous life-creating power of lovemaking and the intense emotions it
holds.
From the texts of the TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order,
we learn about the Four Weddings between Spirit Mates, and we also learn
that our Spirit Mate in the Absolute sense is our only true sexual
partner.
Therefore, in Step Eleven, we learned to travel
consciously on higher consciousness planes so we could achieve to live
with happy lovemaking, whether our Spirit Mate was incarnated on Earth
at the same time as us or not.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use Step Eleven to prepare myself for the Big
Wedding with my Spirit Mate, whether he or she is incarnated on Earth
at the same time as me or not, so I can live happily ever after.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 6, CHAPTER 1 , APPENDIXES, THE SECTION APPENDIX B, PAGE 407
When we uses the Small Ring of Avarice, we want to receive from others without using our own resources to get it, and we readily receive what, we have done nothing to get, even though we do not need it, and still we feel poor in spite of all that has been given to us. When we use the Small Ring of Envy, we do not believe that we can get what others have that we want too, even if we do something to get it, so we get defiant at the thought of doing something to get it and instead we submit to our situation as it is. When we use the Small Ring of Hatred, we deny our desires and attempt to manipulate others to give us, what we want, and we believe that others meet our needs, because we are so special, and if others do not give us what we want, we feel so bad about it that we become ill. When we use the Small Ring of Arrogance, we believe that we are superior to others, when our needs are met, and boastfully, we show off our fulfilled desires to as many as possible, and we believe that we are inferior to others, when we do not get our needs fulfilled and isolate, so others will not discover our lacks. |
|
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 407
Today’s contemplation
Today, I will purify my mind from the pain of my use of one of The Four Small Rings of Pain by getting to know and use one of The Four Small Rings of Joy instead.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 5, TUTU DOCTRINE, THE SECTION THE SEED OF VOL, PAGE 381
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 381
Today’s
contemplation
Today, I will work on making the
Seed of Love real to myself.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 5, CHAPTER 1, MY LIFE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION THE COMING INTO BEING OF THE BRIDGE , PAGE 394
The last couple of weeks, I have had a feeling that I was going to write one more part of the book to describe the connection between the outer and the inner world, and I figured that I could find out what it was going to be about by walking on the rainbow.
Then I could start writing and call that part of the book The Rainbow Bridge.
"It is going to be called The Bridge," he gently said with emphasis on Bridge.
"That I’ll decide myself," I thought, but said nothing.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 394
In addition to God, our FatherMother, Who has created and
manifested all individual Spirits in the God Realm, we also have a
personal God, our true Self, our Spirit, who is also a ManWoman like God
HimHerself.
Like God, our FatherMother HimHerself, our personal
Spirit, our personal God is one being, who is a merging of the masculine
and the feminine principle in the Holy Grail like God HimHerself.
Our true Self’s, our Spirit’s will for us is identical to
God’s Will, because God,our FatherMother has given us a free will to
create and manifest and is unconditionally approving our will as HisHer
own.
As human beings, we are blinded by our thinking mind, our
Ego, and perceive it to be our highest realization, but in TTDF we learn
to identify with our true Self, our Spirit instead of our Egomind.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will surrender to the will of my true Self, my
Spirit, instead of to the will of my thinking mind, my Ego that is
also called my self-will.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 4, PILGRIMAGE, THE SECTION SELF-CENTEREDNESS, PAGE 57
Intuitively, I turned my hand with the snake ring so it sparkled in the sun, and when one of the rays hit the baby’s eye, she stopped crying, and I stretched out my hand to touch her.
A
whisper went through the crowd, and I became aware that I was
doing something extraordinary and was momentarily shaken by
self-centeredness as if it was me who personally caused this
healing.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 57
When we sometimes began to feel our true Self, our Spirit
flowing through us, we discovered at times that we experienced being in
situations that we previously perceived to be miracles.
When this happened, it could also happen that our thinking
mind, our Ego, immediately seized the situation and took credit for the
miracle, as if this were possible without the power of love, which the
Egomind lacked.
As a result of moving our focal point to the intervention
of our Egomind, we gave our Egomind room to expand his or her territory
in our mind with his or her self-praise, self-criticism, euphoria and
depression.
Thus we lost contact with our God-mind yet another time,
but gradually as we developed our TTDF Program, we became better and
better at keeping our focus point in our God-mind.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will keep my focus point in my God Mind by the
help of the Ring of Godcenteredness with its gratitude,
openmindedness, joy, and empowerment.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE SECOND COMING OF JESUS CHRIST, PAGE 77
Gradually, as my interaction with TuTu developed, I came to believe that the cleansed impression did not stem from my own culture but was almost two thousand years old and it sprang from the pain I felt as the thirteenth disciple Mary Magdalene, when I witnessed the crucifixion of Jesus Christ.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 77
Little by little as we developed our TTDF Program, we
discovered more and more details about our origine and our projection of
a mirror image of our true Self, our Spirit out into the manifested
creation.
Our first projection of ourselves as the merged masculine
and feminine principle, Ardhanarishvara, was a mirror image of
ourselves, split into two, the split masculine and feminine principle, a
man and a woman.
As Souls we were a mirror image of each other, but each of
us had our own Soul, and the feminine principle became the form of the
Soul, and the masculine principle became the content of the Soul.
They both had a form and a content that held each other,
for he was within her, and she held him within herself, and thus they
both held the vibration that belonged to their Spirit Mate’s Soul.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will try to pick up the vibration of of my Spirit
Mate’s Soul in my masculine side, if I am a woman, and in my feminine
side, if I am a man.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 2, FACE TO FACE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION TELEPATHY, PAGE 24
First I felt ashamed, and then I felt angry.
It was unfair that I was attacked in this way.
It wasn’t I who had made a mistake but the others.
Inexplicably,
I felt that the Master did not share my point of view and got
confused.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 25
Before we came to TTDF, we experienced pain on top of pain
because one fearful and painful thought with its resulting fearful and
painful emotional feeling followed after another in our thinking mind,
our Ego.
Sometimes we had suffered from these states of mind for so
long that they had developed into physical illnesses og pains without us
being aware that there is a connection between our thoughts, feelings
and physical health.
Gradually, as our work with our Sixth and Seventh Step
developed, we became aware of these connections and how we could
transform the pain of our Egomind into wisdom and enlightenment.
The more we acknowledged the unconditional love of our
knowing mind, our Godmind, the better our ability became to heal our
Mother Earth body from illness and pain and to experience joy in our
Earthly life.
Today’s contemplation
Today, I will turn my attention inward to find a solution
to one of my existential pains and to heal it by the help of my
knowing mind, my Godmind.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 3, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT GOOD AND EVIL, PAGE 365
Then,
she
found herself in a state of weeping and gnashing of teeth, and with
tearchoked heart, she prayed for liberation from this loveless
Ego-centeredness, and she became willing to put her self-will, her
own created manifestation, away, to surrender to the will of God,
the Keynote of the Universe, and for the repentant sinneress, the
liberation of her Ego then became accessible, and thereby it
became possible both for her Soul and her Ego to return to their
oneness with their true Self, their Spirit.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 368
Our thinking mind’s, our Ego’s assignment is to protect us
from pain, and therefore he or she do their utmost to ensure that we
gain the greatest possible benefits from any situation without
experiencing any pain.
Our Ego is a limited, ignorant, powerless and
mortal/changeable energy form in the Sixth Dimension, and he or she is
full of pain from being loveless and pain from fear of unavoidable pain.
The actions we take based on our Egomind’s thought system
are therefore unconditionally unloving, uncaring, hard-hearted and
merciless, even though our Egomind may believe that the intention is
loving.
The pain in our Ego-centeredness slowly leads us through
the Dark Night of the Soul, where we feel abandoned both by God and
humankind, and thereby we begin our Spiritual journey home to our true
Self, our Spirit.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will let go of using my Egomind's unconditionally
unloving, uncaring, hard-hearted, and merciless thought system and
instead surrender to my Godmind's unconditionally loving, caring,
compassionate, and merciful thought system.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 3, CHAPTER 2, THE EARTHLYWEDDING, THE SECTION TUTU AND SHIVA, PAGE
244
He
broke
down my spiritual ignorance through various initiations and my
mental ignorance by touching on topics which were taboo for me.
Emotionally, he broke down my ignorance by playing psychodramas, where he
brought my deepest fears out into the open.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 244
When we take on a life as a human being on Earth, we
simultaneously take on the veil of oblivion, because it is necessary for
us to forget our true Self, our Spirit, in order to be able to take our
earthly life seriously.
Only as a limited, ignorant, powerless and
mortal/changable formidentity can we experience the contrast of duality
between illness, weakness, discomfort and pain and health, strength,
well-being and joy.
We want to experience this contrast in order to refine and
integrate these energies into our true Self, our Spirit, but when we
feel ready to return home to our true Self, our Spirit, we receive help
to remember, who we are.
Our spiritual teachers can break down the veil in many
ways, and one of these can be to act out psychodramas that can help us
to gradually let go of taking our earthly life as seriously as we do,
when we are earthbound.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use the Seventh Step Prayer that says: “God,
liberate me from this self-important seriousness” to let go of taking
my Ego mind's earthbound thought system so seriously.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 3, THE DIVINE WEDDING, THE SECTION THE DIVINE WEDDING, PAGE 287
"I get scared of my spiritual experiences because they fade away again," I said.
"Hold
on to me under all circumstances, then you don’t have
to be afraid of anything," he said.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 290
The highest level of spiritual development we could
undertake on Earth was to meet our thinking mind’s, our Ego’s painful
side, with unconditional love, care, compassion and mercy.
Those of us who had decided to undertake this level of
growth in our earthly life could also decide to live together with our
Spirit Mate while we were going through the most difficult part of this
task.
The love for our Spirit Mate is unconditional and is able
to penetrate our Egomind’s painful thoughts and emotions with love and
thus to lead us to oneness with our true Self, our Spirit.
Therefore, our life with our Spirit Mate makes this work
easier, but even if we did not chose to get this help for the task, we
could choose to undertake this all-encompassing task for the benefit of
ourself and Mother Earth.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use my TTDF Program to learn to meet my
thinking mind, my Ego, with the unconditional love, care, compassion
and mercy of my true Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION THE HIERARCHY OF THE ARCHETYPAL RINGS, PAGE 179
In Greek mythology the Ring of Emptiness is called Pandora’s Box.
Pandora’s Box is said to bring all the miseries of the World to the
one, who opens the box, and it is perceived as the origin of all our
defects of character.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 179
In our TTDF Program we worked with many of our thinking
mind’s, our Ego’s mental-emotional energy fields, and the most
comprehensive of these is called the Ring of Emptiness.
We balanced the Ring of Emptiness with it’s emptiness,
boredom, meaninglessness and loneliness with the Ring of Fulfillment
with it’s fulfillment, interest, meaningfulness and oneness in Step Six.
Our transformational work with these Rings enabled us as
members of TTDF to create a wise enlightened Egomind that in the past
was only attainable by saints and female saints, sages and female sages.
To our great surprise, it was easy for us to move out of
the Ring of Emptiness and into the Ring of Fulfillment by the help of
one of the four entrances to the Ring of Fulfillment.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use one of the four entrances to the Ring of
Fulfillment by finding something interesting to undertake that is
meaningful for me to fill my time up with in oneness with my true
Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE FOUR WEDDINGS, PAGE 86
When
love,
care, compassion and mercy for the beloved’s Soul and body has
become unconditional, time is ripe for their Spiritual Wedding,
which is the union of their Spirits, and this wedding gives them
access to The Holy Grail, The Ocean of Love, in the Absolute, and
thus the high
God The Father and Goddess the Mother, and the low
God the Son – who is the outer
to his beloved and the inner
to himself – and Goddess the Daughter – who is the outer
to her beloved and the inner
to herself – unite in one being who holds both the high
and the low,
the
inner and the outer,
and this United consciousness is their individual and personal
God. .
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 87
In the course of our work with our TTDF Program, we
gradually learned to unconditionally love the outer, the inner, the high
and the low, and thus we achieved the state of mind called cosmic
consciousness.
In our cosmic consciousness we find God, our FatherMother
and our true Self, our Spirit on the Spirit plane also called the God
Realm, and they both consist of the merged masculine and feminine
principle.
God, our FatherMother created and manifested us in HisHer
own image and gave us HisHer own ability to create and manifest, and
HeShe loved and admired all that we created og manifested, no matter
what is was.
As individual Spirits, we have God, our FatherMother as
our impersonal and universal God, and in addition we have our true Self,
our Spirit as our personal and individual God.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will open myself to receive the unconditional love
from both God, my FatherMother and from my true Self, my Spirit by the
help of my Eleventh Step.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION, SELF-REALIZATION AND GOD-REALIZATION, PAGE 81
Through
this realization, the person slowly realizes that not only he/she is
God, but that everything and everybody everywhere at all levels of
existence is God, and as a result of this realization, the person
slowly achieves his/her universal and impersonal Self-realization,
which consists in realizing: "Everything and everybody everywhere
at all levels of existence is God.”
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 83
Today’s contemplation
Today, I will acknowledge the unconditional love, care,
compassion and mercy of my true Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
4, CHAPTER 4,
THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS WHO WALK ON THE EARTH,
PAGE 370
Any
pain is given in accordance with the capacity of the recipient.
If the pain exceeds the capacity, the recipient is stripped of the
awareness of the pain, and if the recipient experiences a pain,
which crosses this threshold, it is the signal to leave the
physical body and give it back to Mother Earth, who gave you this
gift in the first place."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 373
As our true Self, our Spirit, we have no formidentity, and
only limited, ignorant, powerless, and mortal/changeablity
formidentities can experience pain of various kinds.
On Earth, we have the opportunity to experience very
intense pains in our physical bodies, but it all originates from our
social body, our Soul, from where it projects itself into our thinking
mind, our Ego.
In our dualistic thinking mind, our Ego, we have the
opportunity to experience both pain and joy, and only in our true Self,
our Spirit, we have the opportunity to experience happiness, which is
joy without opposites.
In Step Four, we had the opportunity to delve deep into
our childhood pain and transform it into enlightenment and wisdom by the
help of Step Six, and in this way we healed our physical pain in TTDF.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will take care of the pains in my physical body
irrespective of their intensity by the help of Step Four and Six.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
4, CHAPTER
2, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE
LOVE WITHOUT LIMITS, PAGE 359
The
loneliness that the separation brought forth gave rise to longing to
merge again with one's other half and thereby return to one's
perfect place in totality, so the loneliness could come to an end.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 361
Our fundamental existential problem in our earthly life is
that we had taken on the veil of forgetfulness, also called the veil of
illusions, Maya, so as to become able to live fully as three-dimensional
beings on Earth.
In our earthly life we had the impression that we were
limited, ignorant, powerless and mortal/changeable human beings, and
this gives rise to various physical problems in our daily lives.
But in TTDF we began to remember that we were more than
our physical bodies, that we were in Reality an unconditonally loving,
caring, compassionate and merciful Spirit, and this could give rise to
homesickness.
However, we found out that we had chosen a
three-dimensional life to learn how we could integrate the slow, heavy,
dark and sometimes painful vibrations of Earth into the love life of our
true Self, our Spirit.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will accept my homesickness as part of the
consequence of being able to see through the veil of Maya to the
Truth.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 1, THE EARTHLY WEDDING, THE SECTION MOVING THE FOCUS POINT OF CONSCIOUSNESS , PAGE 216
A mantra is one or more words with inbuilt power induced by the help of the sound waves that the mantra contains.
The
sound waves result in kriyas, which mean actions, and is a kind of
electric shock that can make the body jolt, like my body did when
TuTu chanted the mantra of the initiation ceremony, and like it also
did the two other times I initiated my meditation on OM.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 216
Our
fundamental existential problem in our earthly life is that we had taken
on the veil of forgetfulness, also called the veil of illusions, Maya,
so as to become able to live fully as three-dimensional beings on Earth.
In
our earthly life we had the impression that we were limited, ignorant,
powerless and mortal/changeable human beings, and this gives rise to
various physical problems in our daily lives.
But
in TTDF we began to remember that we were more than our physical bodies,
that we were in Reality an unconditonally loving, caring, compassionate
and merciful Spirit, and this could give rise to homesickness.
However,
we found out that we had chosen a three-dimensional life to learn how we
could integrate the slow, heavy, dark and sometimes painful vibrations
of Earth into the love life of our true Self, our Spirit.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I will accept my homesickness as part of the consequence of being able
to see through the veil of Maya to the Truth.
In
TTDF we found out that there are a long series of methods we could use
to communicate with our Higher Power by bringing forth a state of mind
that could make this possible for us.
One
of these methods, which has existed for millennia, is to use sound with
various vibrational frequencies, and practioners in various meditation
systems have developed a series of sounds called mantras for this
purpose.
In
TTDF we use both the millennium years old mantras and today's sound
programs to induce an altered state of mind that we could use to get in
touch with the vibration of our true Self, our Spirit.
In
the New World Order, we also had the opportunity to download various
sound programs from the Internet that we could use in our Eleventh Step,
because they were conducive to our ability to enter into meditation.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I will download an audio program from the Internet that I can use in
my Eleventh Step, because they are conducive to my ability to engage
in meditation.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 3, THE DIVINE WEDDING, THE SECTION THE FELLOWSHIPS ANONYMOUS, PAGE 285
When the other addicts told about their experiences with being clean, they spoke about all what I had longed for.
They spoke about their personal connection with their True Self; about the new freedom they had found, unbound by religious systems, but above all, they spoke about love and mercy for themselves and others.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 286
Our realization of the difference between our thinking
mind’s, our Ego’s thought system, and our true Self’s, our Spirit’s
thought system, became clear to us as our work with the TTDF Program
developed.
We understood that this meant that we had now stepped into
the New World Order, because our unconditional mercy had been activated
by our work with our TTDF Program.
We understood that the unconditional love, care,
compassion and mercy of our true Self, our Spirit, permeated our and all
the other members’ consciousness as a result of our Step Work.
On the Twelve Step Path, we had learned that the one we
had the most difficulty in unconditionally forgiving was ourselves, but
now we realized that our work with our TTDF Program had made this
possible for us.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will practice unconditional mercy and thereby
unconditional forgiveness towards myself and others.
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH
APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGUST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 1, THE INITIATION, THE SECTION CHILDHOOD FAITH, PAGE 14
I
was told that God also had other means to torment those, who did not
comply with him.
Once you died, he would meet you and tell you that he knew about it
if you had belonged to the good ones or the evil ones, when you were
alive.
If you belonged to the evil ones, he sent you to hell, where
the devil lived.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 15
As children, most of us received information from our
parents and our school about life and death, good and evil, and what
types of behavior were rewarded and what types of behavior were
punished.
Some of this information was about what could happen when
something well known came to an end, and the end of the well known that
created the most fear in our surroundings and consequently in us was
physical death.
The fear of death could dominate us from childhood up to
the present day if we were given the impression that an unknown Godhead
would punish us forever if we had not behaved in certain ways.
In Step Four of our Program, we addressed our childhood’s
information about changeability and physical death and used Step Six to
liberate ourselves from the part of the information that gave rise to
fear in us.
Today’s Contemplation
Today I will liberate myself from my fear of the
changeability and the physical death by the help Step Four and Six of
my TTDF Program.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION SUDARSHAN CHAKRA, PAGE 178
When
Vishnu takes on his human form, he is also subjected to the
conditions of a human being, and that means that also he is limited,
ignorant, powerless and mortal and thereby fallible, but since
Vishnu knows this prior to his descend, he brings with him his
whirling ring of power, which lights up his inner World
just as brightly as the sun lights up
the outer World, and he uses it in his human life to neutralize
all inner and outer demons.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 179
In our TTDF Program we worked with many archetypes that we
call the Rings of Pain and the Rings of Joy, which are energy fields
that hold various mental-emotional energies.
When we began working with these energies in Step Four, we
identified the perceptions of ourselves and life that we received from
ages zero to sixteen in order to liberate ourselves from those that held
fear.
In Step Six, we led these perceptions up to the wisdom and
enlightenment that we had taken to heart from ages sixteen to the
present, and in this process we furthermore used the information we had
received in TTDF.
The Ring of Fulfillment was called the Sudarshan Chakra or
the Sun Wheel in the past, and we used it in Step Six as an antidote to
the Ring of Emptiness, which was called Pandora's Box, the origin of all
our sufferings.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will make use of Vishnu's gift by using the Ring
of Fulfillment with its fulfillment, interest, meaningfulness and
oneness as an antidote to the Ring of Emptiness with its emptiness,
boredom, meaninglessness and loneliness in all my affairs.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION TOTOS
SOLFOND, PAGE 95
TuTu
said that if the Fellowships Anonymous – all the Fellowships that work
with a 12-Step Program in one form or other – want to participate in
relieving the suffering on Earth, they could form a foundation called
ToTos Solfond, which could support the creating of homes for homeless
human beings all over the World, in particular for children.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 95
Most of us have a need to uplift others and help alleviate the suffering
on Earth where it is needed the most, and to ensure that our help also
reaches those whom it is intended to help.
Therefore, it has been suggested that all of us who are
members of the Fellowships Anonymous, including ChrisAn – The Thirteenth
Step, establish a foundation, we can call ToTo’s-Solfond, for this
purpose.
When we, as a group, in one of the Twelve Step Fellowships
Anonymous have a small surplus in our till, we may choose to contribute
to this foundation and to decide once a year how it’s funds shall be
distributed.
We can have an annual convention, where we together decide
how we want the foundation's funds to be distributed in accordance with
our ideas sent to the trusted servants of the foundation before the
convention.
Today's contemplation
Today I will contribute to alleviating the suffering in
the World by giving of my time, of my energy, of my interest or of my
money as a contribution to the ToTo’s Solfond (TuTu’s Sun Foundation).
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 5, THE TUTU DOCTRINE, THE SECTION THE FERTILIZED EGG, PAGE 382
A Messenger, who
consisted of God The Son, who was the Carrier of The Seed, and who
bore The Holy Name 22,
and Goddess the Daughter, who was the Carrier of The Egg, and who bore
the Holy Name 22
came to Unite and thus Fertilize The Egg in Their Own Lives on Earth,
so that their Fruit would Make Real The Reunion of God The Father and
Goddess the Mother with God The Son and Goddess the Daughter, and thus
Show The World that this is Possible.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 386
Most of us come to Earth from the fifth dimension that is
also called the astral plane or the emotional plane, and some of us come
to Earth from the seventh dimension, also called the Soul Realm or the
Heaven.
However, we all come to Earth to contribute to improving
life on Earth in many different ways by improving our own lives and
liberating ourselves from illness, weakness, discomfort and pain.
At long intervals, consciousnesses that have the seventh
dimension as their permanent home, and who are called World Teachers,
choose to be born on Earth to lead humanity further on the path home.
Two such World Teachers came to Earth to participate in
the teaching of humankind about the TuTu Consciousness, which our
Program in the TuTu Doctrine Fellowship teach us about.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will contribute to my own and thus all of
humankind's elevation to the New World Order by carrying out my
Program in the TuTu Doctrine Fellowship.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 3, SPIRITUAL EXPERIENCES, THE SECTION THE MASTER'S ANSWER TO A LETTER, PAGE 40
When
it disappeared, my field of vision was
filled with a blue sky with oval openings.
I discovered that the colors of the oval openings imperceptibly
changed color to the tones of a celestial music the likes of which
I had never heard before or since.
"Oh, this must be the music of the spheres," I thought.
Much
later, I realized it to be the sound of OM emanating from the
Heavenly choir.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 42
In our Eleventh Step we can enter into various high-lying
energy fields with very subtle vibrations, and there we can experience
various spiritual phenomena that we otherwise do not have access to.
One of these experiences can be hearing the music of the
spheres, which can be due to the movements of the celestial bodies
through space or the streaming out of OM, which cannot be heard by the
human ear.
Furthermore, we can hear the music of the spheres when we
are in the seventh dimension consciousness-wise, and we who hear the
music of the spheres do not hear it with our physical ears but with our
inner ear.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
|
August 01
God, the Father and God, the Son |
August 02 Magical
objects |
August
03
The hierarchy of the consciousness of humankind |
|
August
05 The
compassionate being of the Destroyer |
August
06
The Holy Spirit |
|
|
August
07
The Holy Quadrant |
August
08
God's Light of Love |
August
09 The fear of
love |
|
August
10
Samskaras/psychological imprints |
August
11
Subatomic particles |
August
12
The
incredible Reality |
|
August
13
Having it out with God |
August
14
Child rearing |
August
15
The
Power of Love |
|
August
16
Hooked |
August
17
The New Holy Land of the World and the New Holy city of
the World |
August
18
The
positive and the negative |
|
August
19
Genuine spiritual experiences |
August
20
Pain and joy |
August
21The
Big and the Small Rings of Pain |
|
August
22
God |
August
23
The first and the last of the Twelve Step Programs |
August
24
Ignorance, knowledge and wisdom |
|
August
25
Ex Calibur |
August
26
To lose the Power of Love |
August
27
The
Master's ignorance |
|
August
28
Spiritual awakening for the World |
August
29
Unconditional surrender to love |
August
30 Honor,
where honor is due |
| August 31 The Small-, Mini-, Micro-, and Nanoring of Love |
FROM PART
2, CHAPTER 1,
THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE FATHER AND THE SON, PAGE
78
He explained that
God the Father is found in the seventh dimension – the Soul plane,
and God the Son in the third dimension – the physical plane, but
that they are one and the same individual consciousness that comes
to expression in two different dimensions – a man and his Soul, and
they are thus one and the same consciousness in two different forms
of expression.
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 78
As
we
gained experiences with the living life on all the earthly planes of
existence, whether it was the mineral realm, the plant realm, the animal
realm or the human realm, we discovered many qualities on all planes.
Some
of
us had a special relationship with different stones that we perceived to
be particularly significant and uplifting, and others of us had a
special relationship with crystals, gemstones and pearls.
Some
of
us worked with different parts of the mineral kingdom by using different
stones, crystals, gemstones or pearls to heal our own or others' bodies
from illnesses with the vibratory quality they contained.
Similarly,
some
of us used different plants with healing or uplifting properties, and in
shamanism we gained a special relationship with one or more animals that
could guide us in the inner worlds.
Today's
Contemplation
Today,
I
will trust my ability to pick up vibrations from people, animals,
plants and things from the mineral realm, and I will move towards the
vibration of love in everything and everyone everywhere on all planes
of consciousness.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 1, CHAPTER 4,
PILGRIMAGE, THE SECTION SIGNS OF THE MAGICAL RING,
PAGE 51.
Here, we met a traveling
salesman from the West, who showed us a little dull looking metal
lump, which he had hanging in a leather strap around his neck.
He told us that this metal was made in a distant past in the
temples and consisted in an alloy of seventeen metals.
People with knowledge of it would pay high prices to gain
possession of just a little piece, because it was said to possess
magical properties and bring luck to the possessor.
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 51
Many spiritual
aspirants are aware that crystals contain various vibrations that may
affect the possessor of the crystal in a beneficial or disadvantageous
manner.
In fact, it is not just crystals that contain different vibrations,
because both people, animals, plants and minerals, also contain
vibrations that can affect a person advantageously or
disadvantageously.
Many spiritual Masters from the past used this knowledge to
createmanifest magical objects that were intended to influence the
possessor in an advantageous manner in relation to his/her purpose.
This knowledge is described as part of the folktales, where the poor
boy or girl meets an old man or woman, who gives him/her a magical
object that helps him/her reach his/her goal, which always is love.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will trust in my ability to pick up vibrations from
people, animals, plants and things, and I will choose to move
towards the vibration of love in everything and everybody everywhere
at all levels of existence.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 5, CHAPTER 1, MY LIFE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION THE TREE OF LIFE, PAGE 401
In
the hierarchy of the consciousness of humankind, the knowledge has
therefore only been given to chosen persons who have reached a
certain degree of development in the existential sphere, but now
the development of humankind has reached a stage where time is
ripe to pass on the knowledge to the Fellowship of humankind as a
whole.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 402
Before
we
came to our spiritual path, many of us perceived God and the various
Gods and Goddesses described in various religions as human beings with
superpowers.
Because
we
perceived them as people with painful and joyful thoughts, we believed
that they were receptive to worship and that they became angry if we did
not worship them in the right way and did what they wanted us to do.
However,
in
our TTDF Program we learned that they are energy fields with different
qualities that neither punish us nor reward us, and thereby we became
eligible to esoteric knowledge and to learn to activate them.
By
learning
this, we lost the fear of God and Gods and Goddesses, and thereby we
opened ourselves to receive a flow of information of knowledge about how
to use different Godly energies to our advantage.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 2,
THE ANGELIC WEDDING, THE SECTION PREPARATION
FOR KARMA DISSOLUTION, PAGE 232
I
did not feel like doing it, but even if TuTu did not say anything
and looked at me in his usual gentle and loving way, there was a
strange silence behind his lack of reaction to
my refusal that made me feel like
I had a heart of stone if I did not go to speak to my former
boyfriend, and so I went to see him anyway.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 232
It could happen that our inner or outer guides suggested that we took on
a task that appeared to be against our hearts desires, but our
Eleventh Step suggests that we always took on the task when it came
from our guides.
The reason Step
Eleven suggests that we did that, before we rejected a suggestion from
our chosen Higher Power or chosen guides was so as to become able to
investigate the consequences of doing that.
In this way we learned to distinguish between the inner voice of our
God-mind and of our Ego-mind, and we discovered that the voice of our
God-mind always spoke in favor of our spiritual growth and thus our
happiness.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT GOOD AND EVIL, PAGE 365
She bent reverently and said:
"Oh Destroyer!
You, the most feared of all.
I have come to you to seek knowledge.
I have been told that you can enlighten me about good and evil."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 366
When
we
came to TTDF, many of us had imagined that mercy was about our neighbor
taking our burdens upon themselves to ease the pain of our lives, and
that we did the same for our neighbor.
However,
in
our work with the fairytales in TTDF, we discovered that even if it
could be scary to find ourselves in the Destroyer’s archetypal energy
field, it is one of the energy fields of mercy.
When
we
take the energy field of the Destroyer into use in our own
life and that of others, we mercifully contribute to destroy
the familiar and thus to create and manifest possibilities for new
experiences and life circumstances.
Thereby
we
also further our own emotional sobriety and that of others with its
detachment, integrity, respect for self and respect for others, and in
doing so, we mercifully promote our own and their spiritual growth.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH
APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGUST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 4, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS WHO WALK ON THE EARTH, PAGE 370
"The
brotherhood and sisterhood is the equality, which is also called
the oneness or The Holy Spirit, who restores the awareness of the
manifested creatures of their Fellowship, because we all emanate
from the same point.
Even a stone is a manifested creature, who emanated from the same
point as us."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 372
Many of us come to TTDF
filled with ideas from our upbringing that held many thoughts that
belonged to the Old World Order, and one of those ideas consisted in the
thought that the Holy Spirit is a masculine energy field.
However, in the course
of our work with our TTDF Program we learned that the Holy Spirit is a
feminine energy field of mercy, which consists of the united energy of
the Goddess Mother and the Goddess Daughter.
The feminine path of the
New World Order both for men and women is found in the Fellowships
Anonymous, where the Twelfth Step is the Step of Mercy, which does not
ask what mistakes we made that gave us this pain.
Instead, the Twelfth
Step asks what we want to do about the existential pain this particular
Fellowship is working with, and how the Fellowship can help the newcomer
to overcome it.
Today's Contemplation
Today, I will use the Twelve Step Path of TTDF to overcome the pain of being separated from my true Self, my Spirit, and thus from the happiness of my unconditional love.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
4, CHAPTER
5, THE TUTU DOCTRINE, THE
SECTION THE FERTILIZED EGG, PAGE
382
The Pure of Heart
shall see God, and The One, who unconditionally surrenders his
or her Pure Heart to his
or
her Beloved shall see The Ring of The Power of Love
that consists of the merged consciousness of God The Spirit Father,
Goddess the Spirit Mother, God The Spirit Son and Goddess the Spirit
Daughter and thereby become able to drink from The Holy Grail.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 383
When
in Step Eleven we worked with the graphic illustrations of God, our
FatherMother, and of our true Self, our Spirit, both called
Ardhanarishvara, our experience of drinking from the Holy Grail began.
This
became possible for us because at this time we had gained access to the
Sacred Quadrant, which is the merged masculine and feminine
consciousness of God, our FatherMother and our true Self, our Spirit.
By
the time we stepped into the Sacred Quadrant in the course of our Step
work, we had achieved interaction with our Spirit Mate, whether he or
she was living on Earth at this time or not.
Furthermore,
we had discovered that if our interaction with our Spirit Mate happened
from Earth to the Higher Worlds, we lost fear of physical death, because
we understood that life moves on whether we are here or there.
Today's
Contemplation
Today,
I will use the Two-Way Prayer in my Eleventh Step to communicate with
God, my FatherMother, and my Spirit Mate.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
5, CHAPTER 2,
THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE LOVE WITHOUT LIMITS,
PAGE
Then they came close to the perfect oneness, which they had once known, and the perfect love, which they were inspired by before the beginning of time, was innate in their connection and made everything they did when they were together stand out in an exceptional light.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 362
Those
of
us who had chosen to meet up with our Spirit Mate in our Earthly lives
usually had a bigger task on Earth that we needed to meet the Great Love
in order to be able to accomplish.
The
Great
Love is God's Light of Love, which permeate all of us, whether we live
on Earth or in the Higher Worlds, even though we may not be aware of if,
because we have undertaken to live with the Veil of Maya.
Only
when
we become enveloped in Maya's veil of forgetfulness about who we are in
Reality, it becomes possible for us to completely surrender to our
existence as three dimensional human beings on Earth.
As
we
expand our consciousness by the help of our interaction with God, our
FatherMother, and our true Self, our Spirit, God's Light of Love shines
brightly through our consciousness and makes us happy.
Today's
Contemplation
Today,
I
will use the Two-Way Prayer in my Eleventh Step to let myself become
permeated by God's Light of Love.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
3, CHAPTER 1,
THE EARTHLY WEDDING, THE SECTION , PAGE
196
When
I came back to Denmark, I discovered that TuTu’s image popped up
before my inner eye whenever I wanted to meditate.
I was used to focus on an inner image of
the Master at those times and
tried to brush aside the uninvited image, but that was only
possible for short moments.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 196
As spiritual aspirants most of us long to meet our Spirit
Mate, because we know deep down that unconditional love, care,
compassion and mercy are found in this relationship.
We also know that the meeting with the unconditional love
will lead us to the spiritual growth and the happiness we long for,
but when we actually stand in front of our Spirit Mate, most of us are
seized by great fear.
This is due to that we are at the same time being led into
the Purgatory, which is the energy field where we are purified from
all those energies in our Egomind that are unloving, uncaring,
hard-hearted and merciless.
It can be a very painful process to be freed from these
energies depending on how big the distance is between the thought
system of our thinking mind, our Ego, and the thought system of our
our knowing mind, our God mind.
Today's Contemplation
Today, I will help my thinking mind, my Ego, to be freed
from some unloving, uncaring, hardhearted and merciless traits by
pairing a Pain Ring with a Joy Ring in my Sixth Step.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
2, CHAPTER 1,
THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE SECOND COMING OF
JESUS CHRIST, PAGE
77
During my first visit at the Master’s, when I saw an image of Jesus on the cross come and go in my mind’s eye, I wondered what the Master had to do with Jesus, but I brushed it aside by thinking that he purified an impression from my own culture out of my mind even though I didn’t remember when it was createdmanifested.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 77
In
our
Fourth Step, we work on freeing us from the psychological imprinting of
us that took place in our childhood and adolescence, but mostly on the
imprinting that took place when we were between zero and five years old.
At
that
age, we found ourselves in a vibrational state called theta, where we
observed and absorbed the behavior of our surroundings, and at that time
what was observed became part of our psychological landscape.
We still act on this psychological imprinting, which mostly is not part
of our day consciousness, but that we still act on, unless we liberate
ourselves from that part of the imprinting that no longer serves us.
If
we
grew up in a dysfunctional home, there will be much that we need to
liberate ourselves from when we work with Steps Four, Five, and Six in
TTDF in order to be able to let go of our dysfunctional past.
Today's
Contemplation
Today,
I
will use Steps Four, Five, and Six to liberate myself from learned
childhood patterns of behavior that are no longer serving me.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
1, CHAPTER 2,
FACE TO FACE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION UNDER THE
INFLUENCE OF THE MASTER’S RADIATION, PAGE
25
Now and then I
looked investigating at him.
He had radiant, beautiful eyes, and his face was light from
refulgence.
His radiation was intense.
I got an urgent need to meditate and closed my eyes.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 25
Already
in
Step One we were made aware that we are a multidimensional being,
simultaneously having a life in different dimensions beyond our
three-dimensional human energy field.
Our
radiance
consists of subatomic particles from different dimensions, and depending
on how sensitive others are, they may experience our radiance as
pleasant or unpleasant.
As
we
gain conscious access to our etheric body, our astral body, our causal
body, our Soul and our Spirit in our TTDF Program, we feel more and more
uplifted and light.
Others
who
are sensitive to the radiance of their fellow human beings also become
able to feel our radiance of subatomic particles and feel open and
comfortable in our company.
Today's
Contemplation
Today,
I
will let go of the emotional energies of others that have accumulated
in my space and recognize the healing of letting go and allowing
myself to be in my own energy field.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
2, CHAPTER 1,
MY LIFE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION THE AVATAR OF
SYNTHESIS, PAGE 398
"It cannot be
helped.
No matter if it appears irritating,
ridiculous or disappointing to some that it is merely us – a
foreign worker, drug addict and alcoholic and a former drug addict
and prostitute – who are the first representatives of the Avatar
of Syntheses, it is my task to write the truth, like I see it here
and now.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 400
In
Step
Four, we learned in the Fairy Tale about Good and Evil that the job of
our thinking minds, our Egos, from the beginning of manifested creation
until now, has been and is to protect us from fear and pain.
Our
Souls
chose to envelop the fear and pain in an energy field of its own, which
became the form identity we later came to perceive as our thinking mind,
our Ego.
Since
our
thinking mind, our Ego is a fear and pain energi field, our Egomind does
not have access to the unconditional love that is necessary to be able
to protect us from fear and pain.
Due
to
the Veil of Forgetfulness that our Souls casted over our Egos, they did
not know that they had got an impossible task, which it is our job to
give our Egominds restoration for by help of the Rings of Joy.
Today's
Contemplation
Today,
I
will meet the incredible Reality of my thinking mind, my Ego, with
unconditional love, care, compassion and mercy.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
1, CHAPTER 1,
THE INITIATION, THE SECTION HAVING IT OUT WITH GOD,
PAGE 17
I
decided to go to church a lot to make God and Jesus like me.
One day, a priest threw me out of the church saying that it wasn’t
a place for children.
That convinced me that God and Jesus really didn’t like me, and
now I joined the evil ones, who thought that God didn’t exist, and
who spoke about him in demeaning ways, if he was mentioned at all.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 17
In
our
childhood homes, many of us were surrounded by people who perceived life
on Earth to be the only life there was, so when they tried to give us
information about life, they mostly gave us misinformation.
Most
of
us who came to TTDF had been spiritual aspirants from when we were born
into our Earthy life, and because we had chosen to grow up in an
earthbound family, we had received this misinformation.
We
made
this choice because we wanted to find a solution to this misinformation
and pass the solution on, both for the benefit of ourselves and our near
and dear ones, but also for the benefit of humanity as a whole.
As
a
result of this misinformation that went against the wisdom of our
hearts, it could happen that we had a showdown with God, our
FatherMother, where we disowned them until we refound them in TTDF.
Today's
Contemplation
Today,
I
will use my Second and Third Step to strengthen my surrender to the
Will of God, my FatherMother, because Their Will is the same as the
will of my own heart.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION ANGER AND REVENGEFULNESS, PAGE 169
I had learned that when somebody committed a mistake, they could learn to stop making mistakes if somebody punished them for it; so according to my perception, it was not only my right but also my duty to punish the others if I wanted to be a good person, and at the same time prevent the mistakes of others to be taken out on me in the future.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 169
Most
of
us grew up with parents who used their thinking mind’s, their Ego’s
dualistic thought system, and this meant that they constantly oscillated
between reward and punishment in their child-rearing.
This
parenting
method cut us off from seeking access to our heart’s desires because
instead we became preoccupied with how to avoid punishment and obtain
rewards.
In
Step
Four, we worked on accessing our heart’s desires by uncovering the
traumatic events that covered them up in the course of our lives from
our birth until we became twenty years old.
We
used
this information in Step Six to heal the areas we uncovered in Step
Four, and thereby we increased our ability to access our knowing mind’s,
our God-mind’s thought system.
Today’s
Contemplation
Today,
I
will use my Fourth Step and my Sixth Step to increase my possibility
to get access the happiness in my heart’s desires, which are found in
my knowing mind’s, my God-mind’s thought system.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 2, THE ANGELIC WEDDING, THE SECTION THE HELP OF THE CROWN PRINCE 2, PAGE 270
I
decided that I would go to India one last time, and if my
being together with the Crown Prince didn’t express itself in a grand
spiritual revelation that would put everything in its right place, I
would look up TuTu and surrender to my love for him, no matter where
it took me.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 271
Those
of
us who had felt the power of our unconditional love knew that it
permeated all our decisions and actions, and that it gave us our
conscious contact with our true Self, our Spirit, and with God.
Some
of
us had also experienced that our unconditional love crossed the
boundaries of death and enabled us to communicate with our Spirit Mate
even if maybe we found ourselves on each our sides of the Gate of Death.
When
we
were in conscious contact with our other half in Ardhanarishvara, the
contact took place in the Ocean of Love, who is the Holy Grail, and we
could thus drink from the Holy Grail's constant inspiration.
In
TTDF,
we used the Two-Way Prayer in our Eleventh Step to expand our conscious
contact with our other half in Ardhanarishvara, to seek inspiration for
the day and to seek the power to carry out the inspiration we received.
Today's
Contemplation
Today,
I
will use the Two-Way Prayer in my Eleventh Step to seek inspiration
for the day from God, my FatherMother through my other half in my
personal Ardhanarishvara.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 3, THE DIVINE WEDDING, THE SECTION THE FULFILLMENT OF A PROHIBITED DESIRE, PAGE 276
"Did you know this?" I asked, shocked by my body-sensations.
"Yes," he said, "this is withdrawal symptoms."
I had had my wish fulfilled.
I was hooked.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 277
Most
of
us have sought help from various substances during our journey on the
spiritual path as through their help we achieved various spiritual
states of mind that we could not achieve on our own at that particular
point in time.
Alcohol
contains
medicated joy, nicotine contains medicated serenity, heroin contains
medicated meditation, cocaine contains medicated energy, and
psychoactive drugs contain consciousness expansion.
However,
the
spiritual states of mind we achieved in this way were not sustainable,
and there always came a time when the various substances became
destructive instead of helpful if we had become hooked on them.
Then
we
had to seek our preferred state of mind without the use of our preferred
drugs, and in TTDF we found all the spiritual states in our Steps we
previously found in drugs, and therefore we let go of our addictions.
Today's
Contemplation
Today,
I
will use my TTDF’s Tenth, Eleventh, and Twelfth Steps to let go of my
present addictions as best I can.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE NEW HOLY LAND AND THE NEW JERUSALEM, PAGE 104
Thus the Master appointed Denmark to be the new holy land of the World.
TuTu chose to live, teach and die in Denmark's capital Copenhagen, which he thereby appointed to be the New Jerusalem, the new holy city of the World.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 104
Some
of
us have realized that the World Teachers, whose teachings gave rise to
the Big Religions of the World, are walking on the Earth presently to
participate in the becoming of the New World Order.
One
of
the World Teachers prophesied that a new holy land and a new holy city
would arise at the time when time was ripe to create and manifest a New
World Order on Earth based on mercy.
Our
book,
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order came into being in
Copenhagen, and is the book he and his Spirit Mate have created and
manifested, where they teach the principles of the New World Order.
It
is
part of the Twelve Step Path, where members heal themselves from various
existential pains, and those of us who are members of TTDF heal
ourselves from our denial of our true Self, our Spirit.
Today's
Contemplation
Today,
I
will begin Step One of my TTDF Program and admit that my life becomes
unmanageable when I deny the unconditional love, care, compassion, and
mercy of my true Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 5, THE TUTU DOCTRINE, THE SECTION THE FERTILIZED EGG, PAGE 382
The
Negative
and
The
Positive must Unite, like The Masculine Principle, who is The
Power of Creation, and The Feminine Principle, who is The Power of
Manifestation, must Unite so the Manifestation of the Creation of
God’s
Children and God’s Children’s Children can take place.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 386
Many
of
us had imagined that we must get rid of the negative because we
experienced it as painful, and that we must hold on to the positive
because we experienced it as joyful.
However,
in
TTDF we learned that our true Self, our Spirit, is one being that holds
both the negative and the positive, and this entails that all the
manifested creatures that sprang from us would also hold both.
Our
first
manifested creature was our Souls, and their first manifested creature
was our thinking mind, our Ego, which would also forever contain both
the negative and the positive.
This
made
us understand that we could not get rid of the negative, but that we
could transform it into wisdom and enlightenment with the help of the
positive, and this transformation we did in our Sixth and Seventh Step.
Today's
Contemplation
Today,
I
will work on creating and manifesting a wise and enlightened Ego by
pairing a Ring of Pain with a Ring of Joy in my Sixth or Seventh Step.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 3, SPIRITUAL EXPERIENCES, THE SECTION THE INITIATION TAKES PLACE WHEN THE DISCIPLE IS READY, PAGE 47
On
the other hand, I became aware that the difference between a
fantasy-induced spiritual experience and a genuine one is
that the genuine one brings forth a change in my state of
consciousness and the one produced by my fantasy gives me information
of a different kind about my mind.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 48
When
we
as our Egoself, came to realize our limitation, ignorance, powerlessness
and mortality/changeability, a desire arose in our Egoself about
achieving omnipresence, omniscience, omnipotence and immortality.
Thereby
we
became ready to step onto the spiritual path, and to begin with we
listened to many spiritual teachers and formed fantasies about and
visualizations of the true spiritual states they described.
Our
fantasies
and visualizations were our Egoself's speech to the thought responsive
Universe about our desires, and thus we had opened ourselves to receive
the true spiritual experiences as response from the Universe.
In
TTDF
we practiced these talents as well as prayer and meditation to expand
our conscious contact with our true Self, our Spirit, and thus we began
to receive genuine spiritual and therefore life-changing experiences.
Today's
Contemplation
Today,
I
will use my Eleventh Step to expand my conscious contact with my true
Self, my Spirit, through imagination and visualization, prayer and
meditation.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 4, , THE SECTION THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS WHO WALK ON THE EARTH, PAGE 370
"How do I learn to accept my own pains?"
"Remember your worst pain and tell me if you would want to have been without it."
"When I look back at the pains of my life, I realize that for every pain I felt, I learned something valuable, and therefore, I would not want to have been without it, but isn’t it possible to learn from joy alone?"
"Pain and joy have each theirs to give."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 374
Most
of
us resisted the experience of pain, discomfort, weakness and illness,
but when we came to TTDF, we heard the English slogan: What you resist,
persist and understood that a change in our attitude was required.
This
made
us consider how we could better relate to these types of experiences,
and we realized that pain is a short-lived action signal, but if we
resisted doing the action the pain required, it turned into suffering.
This
is
due to pain being a messenger that speaks to us with greater and greater
intensity that might turn the pain into suffering, until we showed that
we had heard the message and were willing to act like the pain required.
Once
the
pain had been given permission to deliver its message, it was released
and there was joy and relief because the area the pain had pointed to
was healing, whether the pain was mental-emotional or physical.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will take loving, caring, compassionate, and merciful care of my pain,
whether it is mental-emotional or physical, so the paining areas can
return to functionality and joy.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION THE HIERARCHY OF THE ARCHETYPAL RINGS, PAGE 179
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 182
When
we
worked with the Big Ring of Pain with its avarice, envy, hatred and
arrogance, we also needed to dive into the attributes of the Small Rings
to more easily recover from the pain of the Big Ring.
Thereby,
we
discovered that North and South were twins, so if we used avarice we
were met with envy and vice versa both in our psychological landscape
and in our social life.
Similarly,
we
discovered that East and West were twins, so if we used hatred we were
met with arrogance and vice versa both in our psychological landscape
and in our social life.
These
discoveries
made it easier for us to understand other people's reactions, and
thereby it became easier for us to further develop our social skills by
the help of the interconnections of the Rings.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will use my knowledge of the interconnections of the Rings to further
develop my social skills.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION GOD, PAGE 105
The ball or the total
field of consciousness is in and of itself an archetype, which
includes everything and everybody everywhere at all levels of
consciousness.
This archetype is called God, and everything and everybody everywhere
at all levels of consciousness is thus God and holds all of God’s
consciousness since each part holds the totality.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page
Many
of
us came from a background where God was perceived as a man, who could
become very angry and vengeful if a person did not believe in His
existence or obey the laws He had set up for human beings.
At
that
time in our lives when we chose to become members of the TuTu Doctrine
Fellowship, we stepped into the New World Order, and we no longer
perceived God as an old man with a white beard.
We
got
used to the idea that God is our FatherMother and holds the merged
masculine and feminine principle and has created and manifested all of
us in HisHer own image as individual Spirits.
In
our
Eleventh Step in TTDF, we learned to communicate with both our true
Self, our Spirit, and with God, our FatherMother, and that opened the
thought-responsive Universe for us, so we could always get guidance.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will use the Two-Way Prayer in my Eleventh Step if I need guidance on
an issue.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION DREAM INTERPRETATION, PAGE 187
The
deputy
of the prince, who took care of the bride and the realm till the prince
had become an adult were the 12 Step Programs of the Fellowships
Anonymous that were acting as the maintainers of the fertile soil until
the new level of existential awareness had become accessible in the form
of The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order and the two 12-Steps
Programs Active Addictions Anonymous – The Wild Life and
Christs Anonymous – The Thirteenth Step as two spiritual paths
within the 12 Step paths and furthermore the new version of A Course
In Miracles, the original that could be taken up by anybody, who
wanted it.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 189
Our
Twelve
Step Program in TTDF is the last Twelve Step Program on the vertical
axis, and Alcoholics Anonymous is the first Twelve Step Program on the
vertical axis.
On
the
horizontal axis we find the recovery Twelve Step Programs that work with
chemical dependencies, and many of us had our beginnings in one of these
Fellowships that exhibited miraculous healings.
Then
we
moved on up the vertical axis to recovery of our social lives in
Fellowships that worked with our codependency or with the mental
diseases we were infected with as children in a dysfunctional family.
Next
we
went into recovery for our problems with being dominated by our Ego’s
thought system, and finally we worked in TTDF on going into recovery
from our denial of our true Self, our Spirit.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will work on acknowledging my true Self, my Spirit, by the help of my
TTDF Program.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 3, THE DIVINE WEDDING, THE SECTION IGNORANCE, PAGE 174
I had read a lot about chemical dependency since he began his self-medication in India and had got the impression that you could force a person to stop being chemically dependent if only you put enough pressure.
I told him that he would lose me for good if he did not stop taking painkillers immediately.
It did not help any.
With a bleeding heart, I increased the pressure by asking him to move out of our home.
He moved out.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 174
In
the
Old World Order, where the thought system and the ideas of our thinking
mind, our Ego were the prevailing basis for our actions, we learned that
punishment and reward of ourselves and others were required to learn.
We
learned
that nothing worthwhile came easy, so the harder our learning processes
were, the better our chance were to learn, but now we learned that the
hard things are unloving, uncaring, hard-hearted, and merciless things.
In
TTDF,
the unconditionally loving, caring, compassionate, and merciful thought
system of our knowing mind, our God-mind, is the foundation for our easy
and inspired learning processes that comes from the heart.
We
wanted
to learn to use our knowing mind’s, our God-mind’s thought system, where
the learning processes for the fulfillment of our heart’s desires is
law, and mistakes in new learning processes are met with mercy.
Today’s
Contemplation
Today
I
will meet the mistakes I and others make in our learning processes
with love, care, compassion and mercy.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 4, PILGRIMAGE, THE SECTION THE HEALING POWERS OF THE MAGICAL RING, PAGE 54
I
caressed the baby, who took a firm grip of my hand and turned it
while his lips sought down it.
He found the snake ring and began sucking it.
Gradually, he straightened up, and his
feverish eyes appeared to me to be more normal, when he let
go of the ring.
"He seems to be better now!?" I asked.
The mother nodded and looked warmly at me.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 54
In
the
TuTu Doctrine Fellowship, we heard fairytales about different aspects of
life on Earth, and one of these was about heroes and heroines that were
able to lift Ex Calibur, the magical sword that was stuck in the stone.
Ex
Calibur
is a symbol of discernment, the stone is a symbol of Mother Earth, and
the hero or heroine is a symbol of that human being, who is able to lift
his or her discernment from the earthbound to the Absolute.
In
our
TTDF Program, we learned to lift Ex Calibur to the Absolute, and we
discovered that we became invincible as a result, even though we were
still limited, ignorant, powerless and mortal/changeable human beings.
The
difference
was that we had now lifted our discernment from the earthbound to the
Absolute, where illnesses, weaknesses, discomforts and pains became
uplifting and meaningful learning tools.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will use Ex Calibur to lift my discernment from my earthbound
perception of my Mother Earth body's illnesses, weaknesses,
discomforts and pains to my Absolute perception.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 3, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT GOOD AND EVIL, PAGE 365
She createdmanifested
life in this sentry by placing a spark of her own life-force, which is
the power of love, into her created manifestation, so her sentry that
was yet another thought independently could take charge of his/her
assignment, which consisted in protecting the content of her thinking
mind, her ego against the unknown, and her ego served her with love
and with perfect dedication to his/her task.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 367
As
our
true Self, our Spirit, we decided to experiment with creating and
manifesting different form-existences to experience what it felt like to
live inside different forms.
Our
first
manifested creations were our Souls, where we split ourselves into two
limited, ignorant, powerless and mortal/changeable Souls, living on the
Soul Plane also called dimension seven or Heaven.
As
Souls,
who lived inside a form, we lost a part of our capacity for
unconditional love, and thus our love ability became limited depending
on the circumstances of the form.
We
came
to TTDF to reclaim our capacity for unconditional love, even though our
maximum limitation, ignorance, powerlessness and mortality/changeability
is found in our Mother Earth body.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will work on connecting with my true Self, my Spirit, and thus regain
my capacity for Absolute love, even though I find myself on Mother
Earth’s planet in my three-dimensional body.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 2, FACE TO FACE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION THE MASTER’S IGNORANCE, PAGE 33
After narrating this,
he leaned back in his chair and looked around at us like a happy child
who was proud of what he had accomplished, and now he expected that we
came up with an appropriate reaction.
Nobody said anything, and I stared perplexed at him.
Didn’t he himself/herself know that he was omniscient, so that thing
should be the very least of his tricks?
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 33
Most
of
us have had many different spiritual teachers and teacheresses on our
spiritual journey, and many of us have taken the teachings of one or
more of the World Teachers or World Teacheresses to heart.
Many
of
us who have chosen a highly evolved teacher or teacheress have suffered
from the delusion that they were above their human limitation,
ignorance, powerlessness and mortality/changeability.
This
has
led us to set unrealistic goals for our spiritual lives, until we
realized that no one can rise above their humaness no matter how highly
spiritually evolved they are.
In
TTDF
we also found out that any human being came to Earth to learn to meet
our physical body and our Ego from our true Self’s, our Spirit’s
unconditional love, care, compassion and and mercy.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will accept my spiritual teachers' and teacheresses’ human limitation,
ignorance, powerlessness, and mortality/changeability while opening
myself to receive the wisdom of their experiences with the existential
problems I seek a solution to.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 4, THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, THE SECTION THE TRUE DISCIPLES OF JESUS, PAGE 295
Can’t you see what it means that there are so many chemically dependent all over the world today?"
"No." she answered.
"It means that many presently go through The Dark Night of the Soul,"
I said.
"And what of it?" she said.
"Yes, then time is ripe for the many, and that means that it is
spiritual dawn for the World, because the sleeping Spirits are about
to wake up."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 297
That
Mother
Earth is a manifested creature, just like us, is something many of us
were not aware of until we came to the Earth and discovered that all the
realms of Mother Earth contain their own version of consciousness.
Our
human
realm are the brain in Mother Earth's body, the animal realm is her
emotional state, the plant realm is her energetic state and her
breathing, and the mineral kingdom is her physical state and her
security.
When
we
enter our physical body, it acts as a veil of forgetfulness about who
and what we are in Absolute Reality, and we also experience our
surroundings identifying us as a physical body, until we believe it.
In
the
beginning, some of us remember who we are and where we come from, but
little by little we also identify ourselves as being a physical body
with the name our parents gave our body.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will use Step Four to get to know myself again from 0-19 years old
from where I stand today, so that I can use my Sixth Step to recover
and liberate myself from the traumatic events of my childhood.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 3, THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, THE SECTION THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, PAGE 341
After
having prayed for some time, I managed to come to a point where I
did not meet with resistance from any part of my mind, and at that
moment, I was washed over by a wave of energy and one realization
after another followed.
First, I understood that at this very
moment, I had surrendered unconditionally
to the love of my heart.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page
Gradually,
as
we progress in our TTDF Program, we become better and better able to
receive and give unconditional love, care, compassion and mercy.
Most
of
us had confused our Ego’s codependency with its savior role, seducer
role, victim role and offender role with our Godself’s unconditional
love, care, compassion and mercy.
Gradually,
as
we instead of using the Ring of Codependency used the Ring of Emotional
Sobriety with its detachment, integrity, respect for self and respect
for others, the transformation happened.
We
became
able to let go of sacrificing ourselves for others and instead we became
willing to receive and give unconditional love, care, compassion and
mercy.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will let go of sacrificing myself for others and instead I will open
myself to receiving their unconditional love, care, compassion and
mercy.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 4, CHAPTER 1,
THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE MASTER OF THE UNIVERSE, PAGE
347
"Then, how do I work in harmony with the outer Masters?"
"By
listening to their advice and honoring their gifts, whether you want
to make use of them or not."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 351
In
our
dysfunctional childhood, we experienced many traumatic situations
without having anyone in our surroundings that could guide us on why we
were paining emotionally, so we chose to shut down our emotions.
In
Step
Four, we opened up to our childhood traumas and began the healing
process of these traumas, and thus, we opened ourselves up to looking at
our life in a new way that was not clouded by childhood traumas.
This
meant
that we became able to discover that life did not do things to us, but
for us, and thus we became able to see that life is full of
unconditional love, care, compassion, and mercy.
This
enabled
us to appreciate and honor all the gifts that life gave us and even face
difficult people and situations with our unconditional gratitude because
of the opportunity to learn that they gave us.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will honor all the gifts life gives me and the people, who bring them
to me, whether the gifts invite growth or relaxation.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 6, CHAPTER 1, THE SECTION APPENDIX Q, PAGE 421
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 421
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH
APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGUST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
|
September 01
Ardhanarishvara's love |
September 02 Esoteric
and exoteric knowledge |
September
03
Table for the Big, the Small,-Mini-, Micro-, and
Nanorings of Joy |
|
September
05 A
catch 22 |
September
06
The eternal circuit |
|
|
September
07
The humanness of the Master of Masters |
September
08
Earthbound perspective on spirituality |
September
09 The
throne of life |
|
September
10
Separation anxiety |
September
11
The initiation takes place when the disciple is ready |
September
12 The
Thirteenth Step |
|
September
13
Time track travels |
September
14
All is well |
September
15
The Four Miniring of
Pain. |
|
September
16
The distribution of the funds in ToTos Solfond |
September
17
The guidance of the synchrone Reality |
September
18
Alpha and Omega |
|
September
19
Initiation to Shivashakti |
September
20
God's will for the creatures |
September
21
The animal human being |
|
September
22
To be unique |
September
23
TuTu's return to God the Father |
September
24
The deliverance of the benighted creatures |
|
September
25
Self-exaltation |
September
26
Unknown Masters and Masteresses |
September
27
Manifestation of
vibration |
|
September
28
List of literature |
September
29
The good and the evil ones |
September
30
A power greater than the
individual human being. |
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 2, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE LOVE WITHOUT LIMITS,
PAGE 355
When the masculine and the feminine side of their personal Ardhanarishvara met as two manifested creatures on Earth and thereby were not exposed to chemical-sensuous, emotional, mental, social and spiritual barriers that existed between non-Spirit Mates, the transfer of wisdom could take place in a great feast of fireworks of experiences and realizations, which took place through the merging of the two, who, through this process, in one single life had their growth doubled.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 363
Most
of
us had long since been searching for an earthly representation of our
other half, our eternally beloved, before we came to TTDF, and others of
us had been or are with our Spirit Mate.
That
we
had come to TTDF meant that our existential understanding was so
advanced that we saw the emptiness of moving our earthly possessions
around or having power and control over our fellow human beings.
We
wanted
the great love, and deep down we knew that it could only be possible for
us if we were connected to our one and only eternal love, our other half
in Ardhanarishvara.
Those
of
us who had not met an Earthly representative of our other half, or whose
other half had left Earth, learned to use the Two-Way Prayer to connect
with our eternally beloved behind the veil.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will use the Two-Way Prayer to connect with my eternally beloved
behind the veil.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
5, CHAPTER 1,
MY LIFE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION THE TREE OF
LIFE, PAGE 396
The intention with the knowledge is to liberate him or her in a way, which makes it possible for him or her to use all types of emotional energy in the most advantageous way, but this cannot be done if instead he or she gets paralyzed by those judgments he or she passes on his or her emotions.
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 400
In
our
work with our TTDF Program, we receive information about existential
contexts that in the past were reserved for people with a very high
existential understanding and they were therefore kept esoteric.
Now,
as
members of the TTDF, we have reached a stage in our existential
development that we can get access the esoteric knowledge that has thus
become exoteric for us.
This
means
that we can now use the knowledge of the Tree of Life to take a stand on
emotional energies that become active in different situations that we
participate in without giving the emotions power over us.
This
means
that we are now able to create and manifest our thinking mind, our Ego
as an enlightened and wise energy field, who is able to surrender
dominion to our true Self, our Spirit.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will use the knowledge of the Tree of Life to learn how to handle my
emotions in a functional way.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION THE HIERARCHY OF ARCHETYPAL RINGS, PAGE 179
|
THE FOUR BIG RINGS OF JOY AND THEIR SUPERSTRINGS |
||||
|
|
North |
South |
East |
West |
|
Ring of Fulfillment |
Fulfillment |
Interest |
Meaningfulness |
Oneness |
|
Ring of God-centeredness |
Joy |
Empowerment |
Open-mindedness |
Gratitude |
|
Ring of Emotional Sobriety |
Detachment |
Integrity |
Respect for self |
Respect for others |
|
The Big Ring of Joy |
Faith |
Hope |
Love |
Truth |
|
THE FOUR SMALL RINGS OF JOY AND THEIR SUPERSTRINGS |
||||
|
|
North |
South |
East |
West |
|
Faith |
Generosity |
Trust |
Prosperity |
Accountability |
|
Hope |
Credence |
Information |
Discernment |
Serenity |
|
Love |
Admitting |
Self-acceptance |
Health |
Sanity |
|
Truth |
Humility |
Honesty |
Individuality |
Fellowship |
|
THE FOUR MINI-RINGS OF JOY AND THEIR SUPERSTRINGS |
||||
|
|
North |
South |
East |
West |
|
Faith |
Largesse |
Letting go |
Wellbeing |
Sharing |
|
Hope |
Safety |
Well-informedness |
Clarity |
Nobleness |
|
Love |
Goodwill |
Kindness |
Calmness |
Patience |
|
Truth |
Equality |
Tolerance |
Accuracy |
Belongingness |
|
THE FOUR MICRO-RINGS OF JOY AND THEIR SUPERSTRINGS |
||||
|
|
North |
South |
East |
West |
|
Faith |
Consideration |
Ease |
Action-freedom |
Contributing |
|
Hope |
Appreciation |
Teachableness |
Openness |
Worthiness |
|
Love |
Mercy |
Forgiveness |
Conciliatory |
Sweetness |
|
Truth |
Respectfulness |
Straightforwardness |
Precision |
Togetherness |
|
THE FOUR NANO-RINGS OF JOY AND THEIR SUPERSTRINGS |
||||
|
|
North |
South |
East |
West |
|
Faith |
Approachability |
Light-heartedness |
Approval |
Involvement |
|
Hope |
Certainty |
Cultivatedness |
Resoluteness |
Level-headedness |
|
Love |
Acceptance |
Willingness |
Quietness |
Flexibility |
|
Truth |
Sincerity |
Simplicity |
Reliability |
Familiarity |
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 187
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 5, CHAPTER 1, MY LIFE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION THE MORNING GIFT, PAGE 390
While he lived on
Earth, it frequently happened that one of us played one of the
contemporary songs for the other and said: "This is from me to you,"
because a certain song expressed the emotions we had at heart, and
when the first number, which was called Dance into the Light, streamed
out of the speakers, it contained a text which overwhelmed me and made
me feel that this song was from TuTu to me, and I was so
moved that my tears started rolling.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 390
When
we began our spiritual path, many of us had difficulty believing that we
could expand our conscious contact with our true Self, our Spirit, by
the help of prayer and meditation.
As
we used our Eleventh Step more and more, we discovered that we got an
inner life where we could communicate with our knowing mind, our God
Mind, because we had learned to quiet our thinking mind, our Ego.
The
better we became at using our Eleventh Step, the clearer the guidance we
receive from our true Self, our Spirit becomes, and the easier it became
for us to accept both the challenges of life and its gifts.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
3, CHAPTER 3,
THE DIVINE WEDDING, THE SECTION TUTU’S ILLNESS 2,
PAGE 274
His stomach could not tolerate the
available over-the-counter painkillers, and when the doctor did not
want to give him the required medication, he chose yet another time
to medicate himself.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 274
Many
of
us have used various chemical substances at the beginning of our
spiritual journey because they gave us an opportunity to experience the
altered states of consciousness that we longed for.
This
landed
most of us in a catch 22, meaning that if we do what we feel is right
for us, we have problems with our surroundings, and if we do not, we
have problems with our psychological landscape.
In
present
days, the mistreatment of those of us who chose to do what is right for
us has reached a peak that is so glaring that others who are not
chemically dependent support our free access to what we need.
This
means
that we can move forward on our spiritual path even though we suffer
from the disease of addiction, and little by little we can find ways and
means to replace our use of chemicals with the use of spiritual
principles.
Today's
Contemplation
If
I
find myself in a catch 22 today, I will use the spiritual and earthly
principles from my TTDF Program to determine with myself what is the
right action for me.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
4, CHAPTER 5,
THE TUTU DOCTRINE, THE SECTION THE ETERNAL CIRCUIT,
PAGE 384
Within
the
Eternal Circuit, the Ascending Spiral with its Ascending Curve
Represents the masculine side of our Soul, who is The Spiral Time, who
is The Unmanifest, who is the Cosmic Seed, who is The Divine Father,
who is the Oneness, who is The Immortal, who is The Eternal, who is
the Untanglement, who is the Evolution.
The Descending Spiral with its Descending Line Represents the feminine
side of our Soul, who is The Linear Time, who is The Manifest, who is
The Cosmic Egg, who is The Divine Mother, who is Multiplicity, who is
The Mortal, who is The Mortal, who is The Time, who is The
Entanglement, who is The Involution.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 384
This
landed
most of us in a catch 22, meaning that if we do what we feel is right
for us, we have problems with our surroundings, and if we do not, we
have problems with our psychological landscape.
In
present
days, the mistreatment of those of us who chose to do what is right for
us has reached a peak that is so glaring that others who are not
chemically dependent support our free access to what we need.
This
means
that we can move forward on our spiritual path even though we suffer
from the disease of addiction, and little by little we can find ways and
means to replace our use of chemicals with the use of spiritual
principles.
Today's
Contemplation
If
I
find myself in a catch 22 today, I will use the spiritual and earthly
principles from my TTDF Program to determine with myself what is the
right action for me.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 4, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS WHO WALK ON THE EARTH, PAGE 365
"Are you that son of humankind, who is called the King of Truth, the King of Kings and the Master of Masters?"
"I am him, and any
son of humankind is in me, and I am in him."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 371
Most
of
us imagined that the Master of Masters was not subject to the conditions
of a human being while he lived as a human being on Earth, but this is
not possible for anyone.
Just
as
we are, the Master of Masters is subject to the limitation from taking
on a physical form, and he also experiences ignorance of that which lies
outside his experience in the life he has assumed, regardless of when in
time.
As
a
result of his limitation and ignorance, he is also powerless, like us,
over that of which he is unaware, and he too must leave his changing
physical body at some point in linear time.
Therefore,
when
we wish to follow in the footsteps of the Master of Masters, we must
find ways to rekindle our connection with our true Self, our Spirit,
while we are a human being on Earth, and one of these is to do the
Program in TTDF.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will follow in the footsteps of the Master of Masters by doing my
Program in TTDF.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 4, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS WHO WALK ON THE EARTH, PAGE 365
"Are you that son of humankind, who is called the King of Truth, the King of Kings and the Master of Masters?"
"I am him, and any
son of humankind is in me, and I am in him."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 371
As
long
as we identified solely with our physical body in 3D, we were earthbound
human beings in a spot in our existential understanding where all our
perceptions of Reality sprang from our five senses.
All
information
we received about the spiritual area was a fantasy that others had
because they were afraid of life on Earth, and even though we were
afraid too, we accepted that this was how life WAS as human beings.
As
we
met people with a quiet authority who spoke about their spiritual
experiences, we became curious and began to investigate whether the
spiritual area could be something for us, and that landed us in TTDF.
In
TTDF,
we were made aware of all our non-physical areas of existence, which we
call dimensions, such as the 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th dimensions, which are
our time space life, our emotional life, thought life and social life.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will accept that I am an omnipresent, omniscient, omnipotent and
immortal/unchangeable Spirit who plays my games as a limited,
ignorant, powerless and mortal/changeable multidimensional being.
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH
APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGUST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
FROM
PART 4, CHAPTER 1,
THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE MASTER AND THE MASTERESS OF THE UNIVERSE,
PAGE 347
You must begin every day by
sitting down, imagining that you put
yourself in the center of your heart, on your life's throne.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page
In
the
TTDF Program, we acknowledge that we are an omnipresent, omniscient,
omnipotent and immortal/unchangeable Spirit by working with the Fairy
Tale of the Master and the Masteress of the Universe.
There
we
also acknowledge that we have voluntarily taken on a life as a limited,
ignorant, powerless and mortal/changeable human being in order to
experience the maximum contrast with our true Self, our Spirit.
The
more
we take this knowledge to heart, the clearer our understanding becomes
that our life as a human being is a game we play, where we acquire the
ability to incorporate the vibrations of 3D into our true Self, our
Spirit.
Many
of
us have even taken on various of the Earth's heaviest vibrations such as
illness, weakness, discomfort and pain in order to create an even
greater contrast and thus achieve even greater growth.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will accept that I have chosen from my heart when I chose to take on
illness, weakness, discomfort and pain in my life as a human being on
Earth.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 2, THE ANGELIC WEDDING, THE SECTION THE RESPECT BETWEEN MAN AND WOMAN, PAGE 270
I would try to keep
myself and him in our being together with more or less dramatic
scenarios, which I played out both when I or he needed to do something
without the other.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 270
When
we,
as our true Self, our Spirit, decided to manifest our creations in the
Ocean of Love in an energy field by itself, we projected a mirror
image of ourselves out there by means of a nuclear fission.
The
nuclear
fission is popularly called ‘the big bang’, and our chosen energy field
was called the seventh dimension, where our mirror images lived their
lives as our masculine Soul and our Feminine Soul.
Our
normal
state as one being called Ardhanarishvara, became two in the
manifestation process, and this separation caused great fear in our
manifested Souls.
Our
Souls
enveloped this separation anxiety with a light veil, where the pain and
the anger over the pain were isolated in an energy field in the Ocean of
Love, and this energy field belonged to the thinking mind, the Ego.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will work on acknowledging that the illness, weakness, discomfort and
pain of my life were created by me when I participated in the
manifestation of this form-identified Universe in 'the big bang'.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
1, CHAPTER 3,
SPIRITUAL EXPERIENCES, THE SECTION THE INITIATION
TAKES PLACE WHEN THE DISCIPLE IS READY, PAGE
48
An invisible hand was stretched
out towards me and a soundless voice offered me: “Self-realization
NOW?!!”
I felt I had to throw myself out from his eye into the empty void if
I wanted to attain it, but I was as if frozen in death fear.
"I first have to see what will happen between my boyfriend and me,"
I thought.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 47
Little
by
little, as we developed our understanding of the coherences of
existence, we often imagined that we had come further along the
spiritual path than we actually were.
We
saw
others possessing a greater understanding of the coherences of existence
than we did, and this could lead us to imagine that we were fully ready
to be initiated into the areas in which others were initiated.
In
TTDF
we acknowledged daily that we are our true Self, our Spirit, and that
our true Self, our Spirit, has the sovereign decision-making power that
we had given to our thinking mind, our Ego.
Thereby,
we
became able to surrender our will and our lives over to our true Self,
our Spirit, and this enabled us to lean back and relax with the slogan
of the 7th Step in mind: Let go and let God.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will leave it to my true Self, my Spirit to decide, when the time is
ripe for me to receive the initiation I desire.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 2, CHAPTER 1,
THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE THIRTEENTH STEP,
PAGE
After finishing the work with the Twelve Steps we work with The Twelve Traditions, each of which deals with our relationship with The World around us, and by the help of this work we become able to place our spiritual clarity in our Earthly contexts.
The Twelve Traditions put together are equivalent to one last Step - The Thirteenth Step.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 94
The
New
World Order that is in the process of being manifested all over the
Earth has many angles of incidence
that are designed to help us to take the principles of the New World
Order into use.
We
want
to put these principles into use because they bring about a spiritual
awakening to a world order that is unconditionally loving, caring,
compassionate, and merciful.
The
Twelfth
Step is the Step of Mercy, and when we have completed our Twelfth Step,
we have achieved a spiritual clarity that enables us to show the mercy
that spiritual clarity brings forth.
Then
we
have a need to meet a world that is still mostly ruled by the thinking
mind, the Ego, and so we do the work of the Twelve Traditions to find
functional ways to meet the Ego of the World.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will work with the Twelve Traditions as my Thirteenth Step to meet the
Earth Ego from the unconditional love, care, compassion and mercy of
my true Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 2, , THE SECTION THE ANGELIC WEDDING, PAGE 230
It proved that the creed had discovered how it was possible in a very simple way to move down your own time track, into previous incarnations, and thereby attain understanding for coherences in the present.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 264
Many
of
us have worked on finding connections between areas of our lives that
seem incomprehensible because we are experiencing something we cannot
connect to our upbringing or something we have learned as adults.
We
imagine
that these connections may be due to something we experienced on another
timeline that we cannot resolve unless we do a time travel to find the
root of the problem we are having.
We
can
also time travel in our Fourth Step to areas of our childhood that we
can no longer remember, to gain a greater understanding of different
behavioral patterns in the present.
The
reason
we want to do time travel is that we may be stuck in a behavioral
pattern that we need to release by going to the source and releasing the
pattern so that we can move forward with a functional pattern.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will use my TTDF Program's Sixth Step to do time travel if I encounter
a dysfunctional pattern that cannot be released by going through the
transformation process.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 3, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT GOOD AND EVIL, PAGE 365
Gradually,
as his and her help to the manifested creatures progressed, and
Ego thought after Ego thought was melted into the power
of
love of the Soul, and veil after veil was lifted,
the shame of the manifested creatures of not being like they thought
they ought to be disappeared, and with this burden self-pity
disappeared, and the manifested creatures then realized that in spite
of the pain and the fear all is very well.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 369
In
our
TTDF 12 Step group, we learn that when we have given the power over and
glory of our lives to our thinking mind, our Ego, we find ourselves in a
constant oscillation between character defects and virtues.
We
no
longer want to be under the control of our limited, ignorant, powerless,
and mortal/changeable thinking mind, our Ego, but instead we want to
surrender the control to our true Self, our Spirit.
We
use
Step Two to investigate all the areas in our lives where it is difficult
for us to trust our true Self’s, our Spirit’s unconditional love, care,
compassion, and mercy.
Once
we
have addressed all the areas we can think of, we use our Third Step to
surrender our will and our lives to our true Self, our Spirit.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will use my Second and Third Step of TTDF to surrender my will and my
life to my unconditionally loving, caring, compassionate and merciful
true Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 6, CHAPTER 1, APPENDIXES, THE SECTION APPENDIX C, PAGE 408
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 408
Today’s
contemplation
Today
I will admit to myself how one of the Four Mini Rings of Pain is
manifesting in my life.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
On the first of September every year, all of the Fellowships
Anonymous put together could distribute the foundation funds for
homeless purposes with 22% in The North, 22% in The South, 22% in
The East and 22% in The West.
The remaining 12% could be used for expenses incurred by the
foundation, and any surplus from here could be returned to the
foundation at the end of a calendar year and thus be included in the
next year’s distribution of the foundation funds.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 95
Many
of
us feel an urge to contribute to alleviating the sufferings on Earth in
various ways, and therefore it has been proposed that TTDF establish a
fund that all Twelve Step Fellowships can participate in if they wish.
The
TuTu’s
Sun Foundation can be used by members of TTDF and any member of any 12
Step Fellowship who wishes to, in the same way that other large
foundations use their funds.
In
our
fund, we want to contribute to the earthly life of the homeless, who are
the population group that has the most difficulty in obtaining support
from their communities, especially street children and orphans.
Therefore,
it
has been suggested that The TuTu’s Sun Foundation funds be used to
create and manifest homes for street children and orphans, and to
contribute to their formation of healthy lifestyle habits.
Today's
contemplation
Today
I
will give a little extra when the collection box for The TuTu’s Sun
Foundation goes around in my Twelve Step Fellowship, if I feel like
doing this.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 4, PILGRIMAGE, THE SECTION ARRIVAL AT HOTEL OF BLISS, PAGE 60
The
hotel was called Anand Hotel, and that means The Hotel of Bliss.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 60
As
we
surrender our will and our life to our true Self, our Spirit, and
experience the change that happens in our lives as a result, we gain
more and more trust in life itself.
We
begin
to listen attentively to everything and everyone everywhere on all
planes of consciousness, and little by little we learn to identify a
general flow of information coming to us from all sides.
This
information
comes to us in the form of coincidences, which we call the synchronic
reality, where all the coincidences point in a certain direction, and we
take this flow into account in our decision-making processes.
The
more
we use the coincidences of the synchronic reality, the more our trust
grows in that we can trust our intuition, which perceives the connection
of all these coincidences as meaningful.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will do my best to enter the synchronic Reality by listening to my
intuition and thus letting myself glide easily and effortlessly along
the Blissful Flow of the Present Moment.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 5, THE TUTU DOCTRINE, THE SECTION THE FERTILIZED EGG, PAGE 382
When
These
Four Surrender Unconditionally to Each Other and Unite in Love, they
Represent The Avatar of Synthesis, which is The Holy Grail, which is
found in The Absolute as The Ocean of Love and in The Mundane as The
Merged Heart's Heart, who says: "I am Alpha and Omega. I am The
Truth, The Way and The Life."
THE OMEGA AND ALPHA
SYMBOL OF THE HOLY GRAIL
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 382
When
we
come into contact with our true Self, our Spirit, it is the heart of our
innermost heart, also called the Holy Grail, that we come into contact
with, and we thus find ourselves in the Ocean of Love.
When
we
find ourselves in the Ocean of Love, we become one with our
unconditional love, care, compassion and mercy, and we thus become able
to live a happy life as a human being on Earth.
When
we
have achieved this, our heart’s heart becomes alpha and omega in our
decision-making processes, and if a conflict arises between our heart’s
heart and our thinking mind, our Ego, we choose tour heart’s heart.
To
gain
access to the Holy Grail, our heart’s heart we need to meet Earth’s
thinking mind, Earth’s Ego with unconditional love, care, compassion and
mercy, so we can become whole again.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will meet my own and others' thinking minds, my and their thinking
mind, my and their Ego from the unconditional love, care, compassion
and mercy of my true Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 1, THE EARTHLY WEDDING, THE SECTION THE SHIVASHAKTI INVOCATION, PAGE 217
In
the initiation, I got a glimpse
of this without understanding what happened though, and the contrast
to my day consciousness was so big that it only produced fear, but
when the glimpse grew to an extent that brought this state of
consciousness into harmony with my day consciousness, I discovered
that this condition had been my spiritual goal, which I, until then,
had not been able to put a name to.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 217
For
all
of us who are members of TTDF, our only true goal is to become one with
our true Self, our Spirit called Ardhanarishvara and thus with God, our
FatherMother called Ardhanarishvara.
The
Sanskrit
word Ardhanarisvara stands for the merged masculine and feminine
principle that is one being in the Holy Grail, also called the Ocean of
Love, where the two principles are one in eternal lovenaking.
During
our
journey on the spiritual path, we have come across words that in various
ways denote our true Self, our Spirit, such as children of God,
ShivaShakti, Ardhanarishvara and the One and Only.
When
we
come into contact with each other either on Earth or across dimensions,
we have come into contact with our true Self, our Spirit, and becoming
one with our true Self is our only true goal on Earth.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will work on expanding my conscious contact with my true Self, my
Spirit in my Eleventh Step in TTDF.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 1, CHAPTER 2, FACE TO
FACE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION GOD’S WILL, PAGE
27
I had heard sentences
like: "Every single hair on our heads is accounted for" or "Not a
sparrow falls to the ground without it being the will of God."
After my experiences with the chairs I began to wonder if that might
be true, because if it mattered which chair I sat down on, then that
might also be true.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 28
Many
of
us imagined that God's will was different from our own will for
ourselves during that period of our lives where our lives and our will
were governed by our thinking mind, our Ego.
After
we
came to the TuTu Doctrine Fellowship, we learned that God's will for us
is the same as the will of our true Self’s, our Spirit’s will for us,
but we did not know this because we had not yet gained access to our
Godmind.
When
our
Godmind’s thought system becomes the dominant thought system in our
lives, we understand that our true will is to experience unconditional
love, care, compassion, and mercy in our Earthly life.
We
found
that our unconditional love, care, compassion, and mercy were most
needed by our own and others' Egominds, who were the most maligned part
of ourselves and others.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will meet my own and others' Ego mind with unconditional love, care,
compassion and mercy.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 4, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS, WHO WALK ON THE EARTH, PAGE 370
When the man is
thinking but not sensitive, he is dominated by his masculine pole and
is thus a giver, but this belongs to the animal kingdom, which is that
stage where might is right.
When the woman is sensitive but not thinking, she is dominated by her
feminine pole and is thus a receiver, but also this belongs to the
animal kingdom.
The symbol of the animal man and the animal woman is tooth and nail.
Their personal God is their stomach, and their universal God is
survival of the fittest.
The animal man and the animal woman is the lowest rank in the human
kingdom and swing in the pendulum between might is right and right is
right, and through this swing their power of discernment is developed.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page
It
has
been difficult for many of us to acknowledge the side of ourselves that
loves food because we were afraid that our stomach would take control of
our will and our lives, and it did for many of us.
When
our
stomach took control of our will and our lives, we were unable to eat to
nourish our bodies, but developed eating habits that were intended to
take care of our thoughts, feelings and social interactions.
These
habits
affected all areas of our Earthly lives, for we no longer slept but went
into a state of stupor, we no longer managed our emotions but numbed
them with overeating.
Despite
this
illness, we did not acknowledge that it stemmed from our time in the
animal realm and that we needed to use our Fourth Step in TTDF to use a
time travel back to go to that time and free ourselves from the pattern.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION ARROGANCE 2, PAGE 169
First, I searched for
an intellectual stand, where I could accept that I was neither more
nor less than others.
I found this when I spotted the paradox that I was unique and that it
was totally common to be so.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 170
We
had
a hard time perceiving ourselves as unique, but we realized that all of
us as human beings have a head, a torso, two arms and two legs, and they
are all put together in a way that makes each and every human being
unique.
Many
of
us thought that we were quite ordinary, precisely because we have a
head, a torso, two arms and two legs, without taking into account that
our Mother Earth body is different from everyone else's.
Our
body
is so unique that even our fingerprint is not found similar in the
entire world, and this made us also realize that our perspective on life
is different from everyone else's.
This
discovery
was a great relief for us, because we realized that from now on we do
not have to try to figure out other people's thoughts and feelings, but
only need to take a stand on our own.
Today's contemplation
Today, I will exclusively take a stand on my own thoughts and
emotions in the now.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 4, THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, THE SECTION TUTU RETURNS TO GOD THE FATHER, PAGE
I prayed to God that
TuTu might get strength and courage to get up and go wherever he had
to be and offered to take him if it was the will of God.
A cone-shaped gleam, see-through like
water, appeared
from above.
It was the power of God the Father.
It went down through the crown of his head, and he was lit up from the
inside.
Little by little, he too turned
see-through like water.
God the Father sucked him up, and he became invisible to my inner eye.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 341
We
come
to Earth from that dimension we live in between our earthly lives based
on our existential understanding, and we return to that dimension when
we have completed what we came to Earth to learn.
As
long
as we were materialistic, we inhabited the fifth dimension, the astral
plane, unless our existential understanding had grown so much in our
current life that we got access to the sixth dimension, the causal
plane.
When
it
comes to our ascension as members of TTDF, we have usually reached a
point where we mostly use our Godmind’s thought system so that our
ascension happens to the Soul Plane or to the Spirit Plane.
If
we
have become a Spiritual Master or Masteress, our ascension will also
happen to either the Soul Plane or the Spirit Plane depending on whether
we have chosen a life path as a Bodhisattva or Bodhisattva-devi.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will work on using my Godmind's unconditionally loving, caring,
compassionate, and merciful thought system most of the time.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 3, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT GOOD AND EVIL, PAGE 365
In
the condensation process, the prayer looked like an a huge venomous
snake that wringed through The Ocean of Love.
The form arose from the impression of the congregated poisonous
being from the manifold darkened Souls, and the movement of the
snake arose at the moment of the manifestation of the creation from
the impression of the touching prayers, which initiated the
movement.
In
the
Fairytale about Good and Evil we learn that our Soul is our Spirit’s
first manifested creature that gradually was covered by layer upon
layer, the first layer of which consisted of our thinking mind’s our
Ego’s, causal body.
The
energy
in the seed form of the many dualistic thoughts in our thinking mind,
our Ego, were the emotional energy streams that became our Ego's
emotional body, who is also called our astral body.
The
emotions
gave rise to our energy body, who is also called our etheric body, who
gives us the capacity to move our physical body through space over time.
These
layers
darkened our Soul more and more, until we finally prayer to the
Destroyer and the Destroyeress to liberate us from the darkening, and
thus our Soul slowly became liberated from layer after layer of the Ego.
Today's
Contemplation
Today I will contribute to my liberation from the darkness of ignorance by the help of the Rings and Superstrings of Pain and Joy in my Sixth Step.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE ONE, WHO EXALTS HIMSELF/HERSELF SHALL BE HUMBLED, PAGE 89
A
spiritual teacher, or teacheress who lets himself or herself be
served by his or her students, or who receives payments
in any form to pass on his or her spiritual experiences is like
the rich, who distributes pearls to exalt himself or herself,
but when a person exalts himself or herself, also the abasement
has to follow.
This will take place
at the point in time when
the concerned person realizes that he or she
is neither more nor less than any other manifested creature and
thus has to step down from his or her self-exalted state.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 89
Many
of
us become so impressed by our state of mind when we get the first
glimpse of our true Self, that we believe it is impossible that
others could have experienced this exalted state, without having told
everybody about it.
This
exalted
state compared to our normal state of mind can make us imagine that we
are superior to other people, so it is our job to help others achieve
being as exalted as ourselves.
Little
by
little we understand that we are still limited, ignorant, powerless and
mortal/changeable like everyone else, and we understand ultimately that
even a stone is as valuable to the totality as we are.
As
we
begin to descend from our self-exalted state, we discover that the
social life we hoped to achieve by helping others only happened
because we now meet everything and everyone everywhere as equally worthy
beings.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will meet everything and everyone everywhere on all planes of
existence as my equally worthy manifested created brothers and
sisters.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 2, FACE TO FACE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION ARRIVAL AT THE MASTER’S, PAGE 24
We arrived in
Shahjahanpur some time into the evening and asked people for
directions, but it took a long time before we finally met a person who
knew who the Master was.
I got disheartened by this, because if he was a great spiritual Master
like I had been told, it appeared strange to me that hardly anybody in
his own town knew who he was.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 24
In
the
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order we are told that there are
144,000 Masters and Masteresses on Earth these years because they wish
to participate in Mother Earth’s ascension to the Fourth Dimension,
Cyberspace.
These
Masters
and Mistresses have many different areas of expertise in all the art
forms, philosophies and spiritual directions, where they teach
like-minded people in their area of expertise.
A
very few are well known by most of their contemporaries and enjoy great
recognition for their brilliant contributions, many others are unknown
to most, and even their near and dear ones have no knowledge of their
mission.
TuTu
himself
came like a thief in the night as prophesied in the Bible, and therefore
the people of Earth only find out that the highest Master has visited
Earth when they see the results of his visit.
Today’s
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER
3, THE DIVINE WEDDING, THE SECTION THE DIVINE WEDDING, PAGE
287
I had not spoken with TuTu for several months.
It was a strange wedding with a bride and no groom.
I decided that I would believe the vision to be genuine if the groom came.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 289
Gradually,
as
our Eleventh Step experience grows, we come to understand that our
thoughts vibrate and can reach a person we are thinking of if he or she
is open and receptive.
We
may
experience that we think of a person with a desire about knowing how he
or she is doing, and that the person approaches us because he or she
remembered us, when our thought was received by him or her.
Distance
is
of no importance, so we can hear from someone who lives on the other
side of the World, and we can hear from our true Self, our Spirit, who
can answer our requests telepathically from a different dimension.
Gradually, as we use the Two-Way Prayer in our Eleventh Step more and more, we find that we can be in touch with our true Self, our Spirit, all day long and get instant answers to anything if we ask..
Today's contemplation
Today, I will use meditation to receive guidance from my true Self, my
Spirit and thereby from God about how I can best manifest the
fulfillment of my desires in my physical Reality.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION A LIST OF LITERATURE THAT MADE AN IMPACT ON MY PERSONAL UNDERSTANDING OF EXISTENCE, PAGE 192
A COURSE IN MIRACLES, THE ORIGINAL SEEN THROUGH THE EYES OF THE PRINCIPLES OF THE TUTU DOCTRINE – THE NEW WORLD ORDER, SCRIBE HELEN SCHUCMAN AND EDITOR WILLIAM T. THETFORD.
A
COURSE IN MIRACLES,
BY COURSE IN
MIRACLE SOCIETY, SCRIBE HELEN SCHUCMAN AND EDITOR
WILLIAM T. THETFORD,.
JORDEN DØR UDEN KÆRLIGHED – BIRGIT KLEIN
JOURNEY OF SOULS –
MICHAEL NEWTON
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 192
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1,
CHAPTER 1, THE INITIATION, THE SECTION CHILDHOOD BELIEF,
PAGE 15
The uncommon ones said that God lived in the Heavens and from
there he looked down on Earth and kept an eye to see if people complied
with the ten important rules he had made for them.
The good ones believed in God and complied with the rules but the evil
ones did not.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 15
Most of us learned as children to distinguish between good and evil, and
that those people who did something that made us feel good were good,
and those who made us feel hurt were bad.
This
was
due to that our parents and our society used their thinking mind’s,
their Ego's dualistic thought system, and taught us to do the same, but
in TTDF we work on letting go of this thought system.
Instead,
we
wanted to use the knowing thought system of our true Self, our Spirit,
and thereby we needed to let go of acting on our judgments about good
and evil and instead act on our intuition.s
Our
intuition
came to expression as impulses that held a sure knowledge of what the
subtle will without coercion of our true Self, our Spirit, was for us in
the Blissful Flow of the Present Moment.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE RINGS OF SOCIAL INTERACTION, PAGE 107
It also becomes clear that when two people have a
social interaction, they are both in touch with a Power Greater than
their individual selves as a ‘me’ and a ‘you’ in the form of the greater
entity existing in the ‘us’ that is greater than the sum of its parts.
THE RINGS OF SOCIAL INTERACTIONS
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 107
For
many
of us it had been difficult to understand that when we hurt another, we
hurt ourselves, whether we hurt the greengrocer, our colleagues, our
friends, our parents, our children or our spouse.
However,
it
became clear to us that this was the case when we worked with the Rings
of Social Interaction in Step Eight, because here we could easily form
an overview of the effect of our behavior in our social life.
The
Rings
of Social Interaction with a ‘me’, a ‘you’ and an ‘us’ show both that we
are in contact with a Power greater than ourselves in the ‘us’ and that
a hurt in ‘you’ or ‘me’ will also be a part of us.
When
we
leave the social interaction, we are still connected to the part of our
personal circle that contains ‘us’, and thus we carry with us the hurts
that we inflicted on the other.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will use my social interactions with a power greater than myself in
the form of 'us' to meet the other or the others with unconditional
love, care, compassion and mercy.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 2, THE ANGELIC WEDDING, THE SECTION THE PAIN OF SEPARATION 2, PAGE 248
I remembered with painful clarity the separations
we already had gone through and sat sulking and silent in the car.
"If he really loves me, he doesn’t go," I thought.
"I don’t go anyway," TuTu said.
"You don’t mean it," I said, "it is just something you say to make me
happy right now."
"No, no," he said, "I don’t go if you feel that way."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 247
Most
of
us willingly had taken on the veil of forgetfulness in order to gain the
most intense experience of the Earth game and thereby of our human
self’s limited, ignorant, powerless and mortal/changeable state.
We
wanted
this experience as a contrast to our omnipresent, omniscient, omnipotent
and immortal/unchangeable true Self, our Spirit, so as to put our state
in the God Realm into relief by the help of the contrast.
Although
we
had forgotten who we are in Reality, we were yet born onto Earth with
our essence intact, and in our childhood years we acted from the essense
of our individuality to the extent it was possible.
Most
of
us who came to TTDF often suffered from homesickness, longing for being
at home in the energy field of our true Self, our Spirit, because life
separated from our Spirit Mate had become more painful than thrilling.
Today's
Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page
Today’s
contemplation
Today, I will choose to use one of The Four Minirings of Joy in a
situation, where I do not usually use joy.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 3, SPIRITUAL EXPERIENCES, THE SECTION SUICIDE, PAGE 44
"No, I can’t tell her that. She’ll go out of her
mind from sorrow, when she hears it… on the other hand, the purpose of
this meditation is, after all, to get an answer for her, so I have to
tell her."
I opened my eyes and told her what I had seen.
To my surprise, she got relieved and said: "How good it was that I
didn’t get around to send a letter to the Master, because it is a
totally different question I want to ask; now that I hear the answer,
instead, I want to know what can be done to help him."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 46
In
our
work with the Constructive and the Destructive Rings, we came to know
about the Ring of Codependency with it’s savior role, seducer role,
victim role, and offender role.
Most
of
us had perceived our willingness to sacrifice our money, our time, our
energy, and our interest for the well-being of others until we got to
know about the Ring of Codependency.
The
work
with the Ring of Codependency made us realize that our imagination of
how our fellow human beings were feeling was robbing us of the resources
we needed so as to take care of the problems we knew we had ourselves.
As
an
antidote to our codependency, we used the Ring of Emotional Sobriety
with its detachment, integrity, respect for self, and respect for the
other to enter into recovery for our codependency.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will let go of attaching myself to other people's problems as if they
were my own, and instead I will use my resources to take care of my
own problems.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 2, FACE TO FACE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION UNIVERSAL LOVE, PAGE 29
I became happy and thought that his love was a
special boon for me alone, but when I told it to one of the other
disciples, she said that she knew this experience too.
Later, I heard other disciples, both male and female, express similar
experiences and I understood that the Master’s love was universal.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 30
When
we
finally identified with our true Self, our Spirit, we had actually
become spiritual Masters and Masteresses because our inner journey had
taught us how to handle our form-identities.
When
we
came face to face with other form-identities, we felt a recognition of
what it was like to be a form-identity on the plane on which our
encounter took place.
Our
desire
to share our unconditional love, care, compassion and mercy with our
fellow human beings flows from us as a vibration that he or she may or
may not pick up.
Whether
he
or she is open and receptive to this type of interaction or not makes no
difference because our love is universal and flows unconditionally to
those we interact with.
Today's
Contemplation
Today I will let my unconditional love, care, compassion and mercy flow as blessings to those around me..
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE
PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION OUR MULTIDIMENSIONAL BEING, PAGE
84
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 84
Many
of
us were not aware that we simultaneously experience our lives in many
dimensions when we came to TTDF, because our experience of our lives in
the dimensions is as natural to us as breathing.
However,
by
studying the above graph, it became easy for us to realize that we are
multidimensional beings living simultaneously on many planes of
existence, and that these planes of existence also have an existence
without us.
Through
our
Stepwork, we work with all our dimensions, and we discover that our true
Self, our Spirit, is our naked Self without being clothed in a limited,
ignorant, powerless and mortal/changeable form.
Only
in
the Absolute, where we are without form, can we be our omnipresent,
omniscient, omnipotent and immortal/unchangeable individual Spirit,
which God, our FatherMother, gave life to.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 1, CHAPTER 4,
PILGRIMAGE, THE SECTION
THE INFORMATIVE POWERS OF THE
MAGICAL RING, PAGE
56
The old woman’s face became calm.
She seized my hand, lifted it to her third eye and pressed the snake
ring against it, stood like that for a moment with eyes closed, let
go of my hand, looked calmly at me and said: "You
doctor," greeted me with the
God-greeting and left.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 57
Many
of
us have experienced a special feeling when we came into contact with an
object that affected us in such a way that we came to perceive the
object as magical or sacred.
Those
of
us who came into possession of a magical object experienced how our
consciousness expanded from the moment the object came into our
possession until the time came when we had to let it go.
We
might
feel resistance to letting go of our magical object because it gave us a
form of security, but we also realized that once it had served its
purpose, we had to pass it on to someone else who needed it.
In
many
ways, we could attach ourselves to something outside ourselves until we
came to TTDF, because we were now fully ready to focus on our
individuality as our basis for action and to peel away the exterior.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will use my Eleventh Step to seek guidance about my innermost desire
for the day by opening myself to guidance from my knowing mind, my
Godmind.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 2, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT LOVE WITHOUT LIMITS, PAGE 359
The coarser parts of the cosmic egg exploded in an inferno of motion and sound in several consecutive waves of expansion, and for the expanding particles, time came into being, as the gap, which arose between their uncreated and unmanifested and their created and manifested state.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 360
Gradually, as
our identification with our true Self, our Spirit, developed, we
become aware that as it is below, it is also above, and as individual
Spirits we sprang from the cosmic egg.
In the same way,
we sprang from the earthly egg when the time for our birth was ripe,
and we began our lives in the third dimension as limited, ignorant,
powerless, and mortal/changeable human beings.
Gradually as we
learned to turn to our true Self, our Spirit, when our human selves
were afraid, we became better able to let go of the fear that is the
basic emotion of our thinking mind, our Ego.
The growing trust
that our knowing mind, our God-mind, would always give us solutions
when our humanness gave rise to problems for us, made us able to
better and better live a life based on our God-mind.
Today's
Contemplation
Today I will use
the Two-Way Prayer to communicate with my true Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION THE HIERARCHY OF THE ARCHETYPAL RINGS , PAGE 179
In the Fellowships Anonymous the
Ring of Fulfillment is called the God Box and in Hinduistic mythology
it is called Sudarshan Chakra or the Sun Wheel.
The God Box is said to bring all the blessings of the World to the
one, who opens the box, and it is perceived to be the origin of all of
our virtues.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 179
In
our
Third Step of TTDF, many of us made a God Box, which we used to perform
a physical action in connection with a desire to surrender a situation
to our Higher Power.
This
helped
us remind ourselves that we had turned a given problem over to our
Higher Power and needed to let go of our desire to have control over the
problem.
We
discovered
that as we took the time to observe what happened over time with the
problem we had turned over to our God Box, we slowly became more aware
of how our Higher Power was taking care of us.
This
allowed
our trust in our chosen Higher Power to grow, and this trust also
allowed us to see circumstances and other people as the means our Higher
Power took into use to help us.
Today’s
Contemplation
Today
I
will use my God Box to turn over a problem that I cannot find a
solution to to my Higher Power.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 4, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS WHO WALK ON THE EARTH, PAGE 371
"Two
thousand
years ago, you did not teach about Goddess the Mother."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 372
In
the
Fairy Tale about the Gods and Goddesses, who walk on the Earth we
learned that we expressed ourselves both in the seventh and the third
dimension as the same consciousness in two different expressions.
We
also
learned that we had put the masculine principle in focus for the last
two thousand years to liberate ourselves from the tribal culture,
because the action power of the masculine principle could advance our
individuality.
Now
time
is ripe to use our Holy Spirit with its unconditional mercy to give our
individuality the sovereign power, right and duty it requires for it to
be able to unfold freely.
Furthermore,
we
need that all of humankind achieve the sovereign power, right and duty
of their individuality in order to make space for our own freedom, so we
put our human fellowship up high in the TTDF.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will accept that I live in my individuality as a multidimensional
human being in a fellowship of multidimensional people on Earth.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 3, THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, THE SECTION THE POWER OF THE COBRA, PAGE 308
In Hinduistic posters of
archetypes, the cobra is often found with distended hood as a part of
the picture, because it is considered to be a powerful protector, and
it was thus a powerful protector who had come to me.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 309
Gradually
as
we work with the Rings of Pain and Joy and their Superstrings, we become
more and more aware that the Universe holds an infinite number of energy
fields.
Shamans
have
mapped out different energy fields for millennia that contain the
energies of different power animals, which shamans all over the world
can use to identify the energy composition of their power animals.
Many
of
us in TTDF have felt in touch with a power animal and protected in our
inner world, and here the cobra plays a special role as a protector both
in ancient Egypt and in esoteric science.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 1, THE EARTHLY WEDDING, THE SECTION THE NECESSITY OF PAIN, PAGE 203
When the acceptance
occurred, I realized that the pain of life is not only a necessary
part of existence but also an advantageous one.
What would otherwise prevent me from sitting down on a steaming hot
object?
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 203
Many
of
us had worked a lot with accepting illness, weakness, discomfort, and
pain before coming to TTDF because we had difficulty making these
conditions fit with our faith in God’s love for us.
In
TTDF,
we worked on acknowledging our personal responsibility for these
conditions because our Second Step helped us understand that our true
Self, our Spirit, had a higher purpose in taking on these challenges.
Furthermore,
we
realized that the physical pain helped us protect our physical body
because the pain gave us a brief action signal that showed us what
action we needed to take so as to protect our body from harm.
Sometimes
it
could happen that we resisted performing the actions that the pain
prescribed, and as a result, the pain turned into suffering, which was a
long-term discomfort in the area where the pain was located.
Today’s
Contemplation
Today
I
will choose to take care of the area that my physical pains point to.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 5, THE TUTU DOCTRINE, THE SECTION THE FERTILIZED EGG, PAGE 382
The
Masculine
Represents The Power of
Creation, which is The Power of Action, and which is found in The
Divine as God The Father and in The Mundane as God The Son, who
says: "The Truth is that The Truth is not The Truth."
The Feminine Represents The Power of Manifestation, which is The Fertile Soil – and which is found in The Divine
as Goddess the Mother and in The Mundane as Goddess the Daughter –
who
says: "Don’t Fear The Fear of Fear."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 382
It is a relief for most of us to learn in TTDF that the
masculine principle, God the Father and God the Son, and the feminine
principle, Goddess the Mother and Goddess Daughter belong together side
by side as equals.
Furthermore, it is a relief for us to discover how the
principles of the seventh dimension of the Divine and the third
dimension of humanity are expressions of our individuality in two
different dimensions.
Until we received this information, we had not even
imagined that our earthly existence and our divine existence were simply
expressions of our individuality in two different dimensions.
This new understanding gave us a connection between the
mundane of our earthly existence and the spiritual of our divine
existence, and this meaningfulness made our earthly life brighter and
easier.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will allow myself to get absorbed by and
rejoice in the richness of my life in all dimensions.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 5, CHAPTER 1, MY LIFE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION HONEYMOON, PAGE 392
The following three weeks, I saw TuTu in many
different places, where I either spoke with him or was just silently
together with him, while I rode on a wave of energy, which ascended to
ecstatic heights several times a day.
Then the energy wave slowly ebbed out and the honeymoon was over, but I
continued to get visions of TuTu.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 393
Many
of
us imagined that we had to meet the physical representation of our
Spirit Mate in order for the Four Weddings to take place in a way we
could have confidence in.
However,
we
were told in TTDF that we could use our Eleventh Step to connect with
our Spirit Mate in the higher realms if we had not yet met the physical
representation of him or her.
As
our
relationship with our Spirit Mate developed, we discovered that we could
both enter into the Four Weddings and we could experience blissful
honeymoons, even though we lived in each our dimension.
Gradually,
as
everyday life settled in in our Four Marriages with our Spirit Mate, we
discovered that our earthly lives became easier day by day in spite all
the earthly challenges we had to face.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will use my Eleventh Step to connect with my Spirit Mate in the higher
realms by the help of the Two-way Prayer.
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH
APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGUST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
October 14: The Holy Spirit
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE HOLY SPIRIT, PAGE 78
The Bible warns people against the formation of 6-6-6, because if you exclusively perceive God to be the creative male force, and exclude the manifesting female force, it will create and manifest problems in the perspectives on existence both for the individual and for society, because this formation of numbers put God the Father in all three places of The Holy Trinity and thus it excludes humanity in the form of God the son and it also excludes the Holy Spirit, which is the holy feminine principle Goddess the Mother and Goddess the daughter.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 78
Our
goal
in TTDF is to liberate ourselves from being ruled by our thinking
mind’s, our Ego’s thought system, which is based on fear, and instead
use our Godmind’s thought system, which is based on unconditional love.
The
Ego
perceives 13 as the number of misfortune that must be avoided at all
costs, but in Reality it represents the 13th letter M in the alphabet,
which stands for the sacred feminine principle, Goddess the Mother.
We
have
also been told that 6-6-6 stands for the ‘animal’ or the dangerously
primitive, and this is because letter 6 is F and stands for the holy
Masculine principle God the Father, which some consider to be the only
holy principle.
This
number
formation excludes God the Son and also Goddess the Mother and Goddess
the Daughter, and when the holy feminine and humanity are excluded from
the holy, it creates great sufferings for all of humankind.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
choose to take my sacred place to heart as God the Son or Goddess the
Daughter and claim the sovereign power and right of my individuality.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 2, THE ANGELIC WEDDING, THE SECTION PURIFICATION FOR SEXUAL JEALOUSY AND POSSESSIVENESS 2, PAGE 261
However, I only became able to accept that this
interaction took place at all when both my sexual jealousy and my
possessiveness, little by little, let go of their oppressing grip on me,
because thereby I reached a point where I thought that as long as I felt
fully satisfied with his interaction with me I did not have to take a
stand on whether his interactions with others robbed me of something,
which I did not know what was, and thereby I let go of my desire to be
in control of his interactions with other women and men.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 266
Before coming to TTDF, we had been on the spiritual
path for a long time, and we were still unsure of how we could relate to
ourselves and the World around us in a satisfying way.
In TTDF, we learned that our true Self, our Spirit is
residing in our heart, the throne of our life that holds our
individuality which is our sovereign power and right, and we began to
unconditionally surrender to our individuality.
We used Step Four to delve deeply into our childhood
traumatic experiences that caused us to assume patterns of behavior that
were not in accordance with our authenticity and Step Six to transform
them.
Then we used Step Eight to examine how our
inauthenticity had harmed ourselves and others and Step Nine to make
amends to ourselves and others for our mistakes, and thus we finally sat
on the throne of our lives.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will choose to follow my heart by doing what I
feel like, in the Blissful Flow of the Present Moment.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 1, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE MASTER OF THE UNIVERSE, PAGE 350
"How can I sit down on the throne?"
"By doing it."
"Yes, but where do I find the throne?"
"The throne is in the center."
"Where is this center?"
"The center is your heart. The heart is the center."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 352
Before coming to TTDF, we had been on the spiritual
path for a long time, and we were still unsure of how we could relate to
ourselves and the World around us in a satisfying way.
In TTDF, we learned that our true Self, our Spirit is
residing in our heart, the throne of our life that holds our
individuality which is our sovereign power and right, and we began to
unconditionally surrender to our individuality.
We used Step Four to delve deeply into our childhood
traumatic experiences that caused us to assume patterns of behavior that
were not in accordance with our authenticity and Step Six to transform
them.
Then we used Step Eight to examine how our
inauthenticity had harmed ourselves and others and Step Nine to make
amends to ourselves and others for our mistakes, and thus we finally sat
on the throne of our lives.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will choose to follow my heart by doing what I feel like, in the Blissful Flow of the Present Moment..
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 5, THE TUTU DOCTRINE, THE SECTION THE FERTILIZED EGG, PAGE 385
Together, we can get
Access to The Holy Grail Of The World, the Open, Pure, Loving, Caring,
Compassionate, Merciful and therefore Sanctified Heart, who Beats with
One Sound like One Heart in a Healed and Whole World.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 286
If we each choose to activate our personal Holy Grail
by the help of the Four Guidelines as described in the TuTu Doctrine
itself, we can simultaneously contribute to a united World.
Our World has four World corners, each of which has
their own to contribute with, and if we freely give what our corner of
the World can contribute and joyfully receive the gifts from the others,
the World unites.
If we skip pointing out each other’s faults and
shortcomings and instead rejoice in what we joyfully share with others
and appreciate what others have to share, our World lights up.
When the World lights up, it becomes easier for us to
look at everything and everybody everywhere through our Light of Love
and to be irradiated with the Light of Love from everything and everyone
everywhere.
Today’s Contemplation
Today I will contribute to a Unified World by using
Step Ten to clear my mind of that which causes me to see faults in my
neighbor.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 1, THE INITIATION, THE SECTION CHILDHOOD FAITH, PAGE 14
Hell was a place below the ground, and it was awful
to be there, because people were burnt with sulfur and fire all the
time, like the people in that city, which God burnt down.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 15
When we came to TTDF, most of us were still under the
influence of our thinking mind’s, our Ego’s thought system, which
belonged to the old world order, where we fundamentally viewed
everything through fear.
We learned from both the belief systems and actions of
our society and our family that there was a place after death where
there was eternal suffering, and where we could risk having to go if we
did not behave in ways that our society or our family taught us we must.
This meant that we chose to follow the instructions of
our society or our family at times when there was a conflict between
what we wanted and what our society and our family wanted us to want.
In the new world order, we learn that the most
important thing is that we do what we want, if we can do it without
harming others socially, mentally, emotionally, energetically or
physically.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will do what I want without harming others
socially, mentally, emotionally, energetically, or physically.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION ARROGANCE 2, PAGE 170
Now I could see that I was in an
endless swing in the pendulum of arrogance from more than to less than
others and back again.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 172
Many of us thought that arrogance meant feeling
superior to others, until we came to TTDF and began working with our
arrogance and discovered that it was much more complicated than that.
When we started working with the Small Ring of
Arrogance we discovered that it has four main characteristics, like all
the other Rings, and they consist in superiority, inferiority,
overcrowding and isolation.
We also discovered that we wanted to feel superior to
others because we hoped that it would be attractive to others that we
were better than them, so that they could learn from us to become just
as good as we were.
The response to our arrogance was not what we hoped
for, as they became angry at us, but repressed their anger, and
repressed anger belongs in the Small Ring of Hatred with its denial,
manipulation, disease and madness.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will learn to use the antidote to the Little
Ring of Pride, which is the Little Ring of Truth with its humility,
honesty, individuality and Fellowship.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 4, CHAPTER 4, THE
FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS WHO WALK ON THE EARTH, THE SECTION ,
PAGE
"How do I help my neighbor then?"
"By sharing about your own experience and thereby giving your neighbor strength and the hope that also he/she can get through the pain."
"Is that all?"
"It may appear to you to be little, but it is not
so.
It is important that you give that contribution to the solution that you
want to give, no matter how small you think it is."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 377
Many of us imagine that we should help our neighbor by
investing our time, our energy, our interest, and our money in solving
their problems if they ask us to.
However, in our Program we learn that their problems
are tasks they chose before they chose to come to Earth, so if we waste
our resources on their problems, we block their problem-solving
abilities.
Most of us come to TTDF from other Twelve Step
Fellowships and may be able to suggest that our neighbor join a
Fellowship that is working on the problem our neighbor is struggling
with.
Here he or she can meet others who have found many
solutions to the problem, and he or she can work out the Fellowship’s 12
Step Program and learn to change the thoughts and feelings that gave
rise to the problem.
Today’s Contemplation
Today I will help my neighbor by referring him or her
to a Fellowship that is working on his or her problem.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION ANGER AND REVENGEFULNESS, PAGE 170
If I discover that I was materially, physically, energetically, emotionally, mentally, socially or spiritually harmed by the mistakes made by another, I used this information to decide how to avoid getting myself into a similar situation in the future and then acted in accordance with that.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 170
Many of us have learned as children that we were
responsible for our parents' well-being, so if we behaved in ways that
angered our parents, it was our job to change ourselves so that they
would get to feel good again.
As children, we are in a state where we perceive
everything around us to be an expression of truth, and as a result of
our parents’ anger we contracted the disease of codependency as a
chronic state of people pleasing.
When we became familiar with the Sixth Step principle,
which is Transformation, and the accompanying slogan that says: I own my
hurts, we realized that not only we, but everybody is also responsible
for their hurts.
Thereby, we began to liberate ourselves from being
responsible for the hurts of others, and instead we spent our time,
energy, interest, and money on taking care of our own wounds.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will spend my time, energy, interest, and money
on taking care of myself in every way.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 4, CHAPTER 3, THE
FAIRYTALE ABOUT GOOD AND EVIL, PAGE
368
In
compassion with the ignorant limitation of her Ego, she used her
Soul Power, her power of love to manifest a sentry from the cosmic
streams of energy that is the nourishment of the all and thus she
put a protector at the disposal of the Ego so that nothing unknown
should take her by surprise.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 370
Our sufferings stem from our fear of death, which
manifests itself in illness, weakness, discomfort and pain, and when we
came to TTDF, most of us were not aware that this stemmed from our
Egomind.
As we work with our Program, we come to know the
thought system of our Egomind and realize that our thought body, like
all form identities, is a limited, ignorant, powerless and
mortal/changeable form.
Our thinking mind’s, our Ego’s thought system, is the
dominant thought system of the old world order, and in the thought
system of the new world order, it is our Godmind system that takes over.
Therefore, a spiritual awakening is currently taking
place everywhere on Earth, where we are learning to know ourselves as
multidimensional beings who are in Reality a Spirit who has taken on a
human experience.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use my TTDF Program to get to know both my Egomind and my Godmind.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION TO SEPARATE THE SHEEP
FROM THE GOATS, PAGE 79
In
the
Bible, the disciples have written that when Jesus comes back, he will
sit at the right hand side of God the Father, separate the sheep from
the goats and then pass judgment on them.
Those who are ready will follow him to the Kingdom of Heaven and those
who are not will be thrown into the lake of fire.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 79
When we take the content of the TuTu Doctrine – The
New World Order to heart, we learn to know our multidimensional
being by examining how the dimensions are expressed in our human selves.
We learn that 3D is our home as human beings, 4D is our
energetic home, 5D is our emotional home, 6D is our thinking mind’s, our
Ego’s home, 7D is our Soul’s, and 8D is our Spirit’s home.
As Spirit, we created and manifested ourselves as two
separate Souls, called God the Father and Goddess the Mother, who
created and manifested our thinking mind, our Ego.
When we no longer suffer from dimension confusion, the
opportunity opens up for us to gain the knowledge of our proper place as
humans, and the proper places of our Souls, as our Divine parents.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will take the dimensional teachings of the ToTo
Doctrine – The New World Order to heart.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE JUDGEMENT, PAGE 80
All the riches of the Earth are Mother Earth’s gift
to all of her children, but in their insanity those who fornicate with
the harlot, rape their own mother, the Earth, to acquire more and more.
As a result of these actions, they will be thrown into the lake of fire,
which consists of the great pain in their innermost heart, because they
cannot hear the desire of their heart.
In the lake of fire, they learn
to discern their innermost heart’s desire from all other
desires.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 80
When we came to TTDF, many of us were not aware that
the only reality that can give us the happiness we seek is a life lived
in love.
However, many of us know deep down that love is the
answer to everything, and if we are not living with our Spirit Mate, we
have a heartfelt desire that our great love, our Spirit Mate, will step
into our life.
We imagine that our eternal happiness will be ours at
this meeting, but the TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order,
describes this meeting of two, and we understand that this meeting leads
us to the purification of the Purgatory.
The reason for this is that we have been identified
with our thinking mind’s, our Ego’s dualistic thought system, which is
based on fear, and we enter the Purgatory to be cleansed of fear of any
type.
Today’s contemplation
Today, I will purify my thinking
mind, my Ego from all other desires but the desire to give and receive
the unconditional love, care, compassion and mercy.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 3, THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, THE SECTION THE COMING INTO BEING OF THE TUTU DOCTRINE, PAGE 302
Gradually, it became my perception that the Four
Guidelines are the peak of all that can be said in the spiritual field,
and that everything worth knowing exists in seed-form in one page that
comes after the fairy tales in part four of this book under the heading
‘The Seed of Love’
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 303
Our work with the TuTu Doctrine – The New World
Order ultimately leads us to want to make the Four Guidelines in
the Seed of Love a reality for ourselves.
The Four Guidelines consist of a Guideline for the
Nordic mentality, one for the Southern mentality, one for the Eastern
mentality and one for the Western mentality.
The masculine Guideline of the North says: The truth is
that the truth is not the Truth, and the feminine Guideline of the South
says: Do not fear the fear of fear.
The masculine Guideline of the East says: Be aware that
you are aware of your awareness and the feminine Guideline of the West
says: Be in the Flow.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will work on realizing the Four Guidelines and
thus achieving the happy life that they produce.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 3, SPIRITUAL EXPERIENCES, THE SECTION THE INITIATION TAKES PLACE WHEN THE DISCIPLE IS READY, PAGE 48
I was surprised to
discover that I was afraid of Self-realization.
After that day, I often tried to do away with my fear by recalling the
vision during contemplation and imagining that I jumped.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page
The contrast between our thinking mind’s, our Ego’s thought system, and the thought system of our true Self, our Spirit, is the greatest possible contrast we can experience in our lives as manifested creatures.
The dualistic thought system of our thinking mind, our
Ego, is fundamentally based on fear, and the oneness-based thought
system of our true Self, our Spirit, is based on love.
In TTDF, we work with both thought systems by creating
and manifesting enlightenment and wisdom in our thinking mind, our Ego,
by the help of the thought system of our true Self, our Spirit.
As we develop our ability to use both thought systems,
we need our Fellowship to help us integrate the contrast that at times
can frighten us because we are not used to using both thought systems.
Today's Contemplation
Today I choose to seek guidance from my TTDF if I feel
overwhelmed by new and unfamiliar thoughts and feelings.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 5, CHAPTER 1, MY LIFE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION THE DEAD AND THE LIVING, PAGE 396
In the end, I said to him: "I don’t want you to be
here if it is because I retain you here with my love that you are here."
"I’m here because I want to be here," he said.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 396
Some of us have experienced the death of a beloved
spouse, family member, or friend, and we have experienced the loved one
contacting us after death, and have wondered whether it was right to
maintain contact.
If we wish to maintain contact, we can seek guidance
from our society’s spiritual guides and may be told that we should allow
the deceased to move on rather than locking them down with our love.
As members of TTDF, we can also seek guidance from
other members who have had similar experiences, and they can help us
make a decision about how we best to handle the situation.
In addition, we can use our Tenth Step to clear our
minds of fear of harming our loved one and our Eleventh Step to seek
guidance from our Higher Power before we act on the situation.
Today’s Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 3, CHAPTER 3, THE
DIVINE WEDDING, THE SECTION PREPARATION FOR THE FULFILLMENT OF A
PROHIBIT DESIRE, PAGE 278
To my amazement, I discovered that
they sank away when they had smoked a certain amount like people who
went into deep meditation, and when I got around trying it myself, I
came to perceive it to be medicated meditation.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 278
For many of us, it was our heroin use that reached a
point where we needed to stop using, that led us onto the Twelve Step
path, which offers us fellowship with others who have given up their
use.
The knowledge they have about how to deal with the
physical, energetic, emotional, and mental effects that heroin has on us
can help us get through difficult points in our desire to stop using.
They also offer us new tools we can use to deal with
our withdrawals, and the most important tool we learn to use is prayer
and meditation, which helps us shift our focus from our withdrawals to
higher purposes.
Furthermore, prayer and meditation help us to
understand that our use felt similar to the state we achieve during
prayer and meditation, and thus we realized that prayer and meditation
are medicated meditation.
Today's Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 4, CHAPTER 3, THE
FAIRYTALE ABOUT GOOD AND EVIL, PAGE
368
She
had arrived at the outermost darkness, the Dark Night of the Soul,
together with the first wave of manifested creatures and when their
invocations for help stroke the Keynote, a wave of mercy arose in
The Ocean of Love, which is the Keynote of the Universe, and a huge
field of energy began to condense.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 371
As we develop our Eleventh Step, we expand our
understanding of our true Self, our Spirit, and we understand that the
only Reality that exists is the God Realm, the Absolute, which is our
true home.
As our true Self, our Spirit, we float around in the
Ocean of Love, which is the essence of God, our FatherMother, in our
own unique energy field that contains our individuality, which is the
essence of all our experiences.
In a desire to experience ourselves from a perspective
separate from our home in the God Realm, we created and manifested
various games in which we created and manifested an illusion of being
outside the God Realm.
All of these games began with the creation and
manifestation of our Souls, which were our first limited, ignorant,
powerless, and mortal form identity, to which we also gave free will to
create and manifest.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will love the first manifested creation of my
Soul, which is my thinking mind, my Ego.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 1, CHAPTER 2, FACE TO
FACE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION GOD’S WILL, PAGE
28
One day, another disciple asked the Master about it (that not
a sparrow falls to the ground without the will of God), and
laughingly he answered: "Yes, but the opposite is also true.
God’s
will does not move without the manifested creatures wanting it.".
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 28
Many
of us have imagined that we needed to do something we did not want to do
in order to serve God so we could have God on our side and thus a better
chance of having our desires fulfilled.
We could be led to do something we did not want to do
because religious authorities had told us that we had to do this to
please God so we could have an all-powerful God on our side.
However, in our TTDF work we learned that as
omnipresent, omniscient, omnipotent and immortal/unchangeable Spirits it
is our job to fulfill all desires of our created and manifested
formidentities.
Our limited, ignorant, powerless and mortal/changeable
thinking mind, our Ego has no understanding of following the heart and
thus of doing what we want in the Blissful Flow of the Present
Moment.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will surrender to the desires of my true Self,
my Spirit, by doing what I feel like doing in the Blissful Flow
of the Present Moment.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 3, THE DIVINE WEDDING, THE SECTION WITHDRAWAL SYMPTOMS, PAGE 280
The contrast between the discomfort
of withdrawal symptoms and the comfort of bringing it to an end was
the biggest emotional contrast I had yet experienced, and I got hooked
on the contrast.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 280
Most of us had realized that many things became clearer
to us by the help of contrast, and as we expanded our consciousness to
include the thought system of our true Self, our Spirit, we realized
that it applied to everything.
To intensify the bliss of the eternal lovemaking of our
true Self, our Spirit, we needed to experience the contrast to the
omnipresence, omniscience, omnipotence, and immortality/unchangeability
of our true Self, our Spirit.
With that purpose in mind, we crystallized a part of
ourselves into an illusion that consisted of a limited, ignorant,
powerless, and mortal/changeable solid form and into that we moved our
consciousness.
By taking on a life as a human, we could experience the
ultimate contrast, because we also took on the responsibility of
forgetting who we really are, thus enabling ourselves to have an
experience of what we are not.
Today's Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
.
FROM PART
3, CHAPTER 4, THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, THE
SECTION THE TRUE DISCIPLES OF JESUS, PAGE
298
"If now he has come to save them, then why is he an addict and an alcoholic himself?"
I said: “Should he be above them or should he share their circumstances?
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 299
Many of us have taken on the role of spiritual teachers and believe that we need to pretend that we are not subject to the same conditions as all other limited, ignorant, powerless, and mortal/changeable human beings.
We
believe
that others need us as an example of a human being, who does not suffer
under a human being’s conditions for them to want to hear how we can
help them recover from the pains and illnesses of their lives.
In
TTDF
we learn that this attitude leads us into the Miniring of Arrogance with
its condescension, intolerance, exaggeration, and seclusion, and the
seclusion cuts us off from others in our psychological landscape.
When
we
become aware of this, we choose to use the Miniring of Truth with its
equality, tolerance, accuracy, and belongingness, and in doing so we
gain enlightenment and wisdom and the ability to help for real.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will pair the Miniring of Arrogance with the Miniring of Truth to
achieve enlightenment and wisdom on how to best fulfill my desire to
help myself and others with our existential problems.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 4, PILGRIMAGE, THE SECTION PSYCHOTROPICS 2, PAGE 50
He explained that he was making a joint and asked
me if I wanted to smoke, so I took a couple of drags.
I got strongly affected and entered a high and clear altered state of
awareness.
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 51
Many of us chose to use various substances to achieve
different states of consciousness at that time of our earthly existence
when we could not achieve these states without ingesting these
substances.
In our TTDF Program we learn about the advantages and
disadvantages that approach has to offer us, and understand that even in
mythology such approaches are mentioned.
The Greek archetype Dionysus, also called the God of
Wine and Ecstasy, says that the path of excess leads to the Palace of
Wisdom, also called the path of the Buddha, because he achieved his
wisdom through exaggeration.
TuTu called heroin the Gods’ Gift to humankind to ease
our existential pain as human beings, because heroin gives us access to
medicated meditation, which many of us let go of when we learned how to
meditate without it.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will learn to use prayer and meditation in my
Eleventh Step to achieve my conscious contact with the joy of my true
Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION THE
BIG RING OF PAIN AND THE BIG RING OF JOY, PAGE
182
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 182
In
our
work with The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, we get to
know about the dimensions and in that connection we get to know our
thinking mind, our Ego.
Our
thinking
mind, our Ego exists in the sixth dimension, which is also called the
plane of wisdom, and in our work with our Sixth Step we work with the
dualistic thought system of the sixth dimension.
Here
we
have the opportunity, for example, to pair the above Big Ring of Pain
with the corresponding Big Ring of Joy and thus gain enlightenment and
wisdom about how we most advantageously can live our earthly life.
When
we
pair The Big Ring of Pain with its avarice, envy, hatred and arrogance
with The Big Ring of Joy with its faith, hope, love and truth, the pain
and joy out together melt into enlightenment and wisdom.
Today's
contemplation
Today
I
will pair the Great Ring of Pain with the Great Ring of Joy and thus
transform my pain into enlightenment and wisdom.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 3, CHAPTER 4, THE
SPIRITUAL WEDDING, THE SECTION THE SPIRITUAL WEDDING, PAGE
344
A jolt went through my
body, and I knew that this was The Ring
of the Love Power, The Sacred Altar of God. The ring formed a power
field, and the energies from the powers were
visible as various fields that stretched deep into it.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 346
THE RING OF SPIRIT/THE RING OF THE POWER OF LOVE
The
masculine ring: Evolution (The movement is
anti-clockwise)
Right symbolizes the illusion, and left symbolizes the Truth.
By turning anti-clockwise, spiral time, vertical time, illusion is
given off, and Truth is received.
Goddess the Mother says: “Become power” and God the Father becomes the
consciousness of the Spirit → Omniscience.
God the Father says: “Become force” and God the Son becomes the
nourishment of the Spirit → Omnipotence.
God the Son says: “Become oneness” and Goddess the Daughter becomes
the form of the Spirit → Immortality.
Goddess the Daughter says: “Become darkness” and Goddess the Mother
becomes the growth of the Spirit → Omnipresence.
Today's contemplation
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH
APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGUST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER
3, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT GOOD AND EVIL, PAGE
368
In the
last instance, he and she merged in the finest veils around the
Soul, which were the most difficult to remove.
And thereby the Souls, by his and her help, began to untangle
themselves out of the many entanglements of their Ego.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 371
When
we, as pure Spirit, created and manifested our Soul, fear arose in our
Soul, who isolated the fear in a dimension of its own, and thus began
the involution, which is the entanglement of our Soul in our Ego.
It
was a game we played, and we made many other games, but the Earth Game
is the most demanding because we take on forgetting who we are, and
furthermore to be born and die in our form to be able to participate.
When
we came to TTDF, we had begun to have a dawning understanding of that
we were not our physical body, but that we were a Spirit experiencing
what it was like to be in our physical body and forget ourselves.
As
we developed our TTDF Program, we had more and more experiences that
confirmed to us that our perception of ourselves was correct, and thus
we began to identify with our true Self, our Spirit.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I will use my Two-Way Prayer to communicate with my true Self, my
Spirit in my Eleventh Step, and thereby untangle my Soul from the
many entanglements of my Ego.
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH
APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGUST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 3, SPIRITUAL EXPERIENCES, THE SECTION CONSTANT REMEMBRANCE, PAGE 40
It was strange to
return to my usual surroundings, because they were the same as they
were ten days ago but I had changed.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 40
Many
of
us had attended spiritual retreats in our journey on the spiritual path
because our everyday lives were so full of distractions and demands that
it could be difficult for us to turn our focus inward at times.
When
we
returned to our everyday lives, we felt deeply rooted in our inner core
for a while, until we again needed to let go of everyday life to refocus
inward to our core.
As
we
developed our TTDF Program, we no longer needed to move out of our
everyday lives to be able to center ourselves in our core under all
circumstances.
We
did
this by using our daily Tenth Step to clear our minds of distractions,
our Eleventh Step to then re-center our awareness in our core, and the
Twelfth Step to yet again turn outward.
Today’s
Contemplation
Today
I
will use Steps Ten, Eleven, and Twelve to maintain my connection with
my core amidst the hustle and bustle of the world.
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH
APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGUST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER
4, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS WHO WALK ON THE EARTH, PAGE
373
The woman respectfully approached the Maintainer, who sat as a clear green light on his throne, which shone in all shades of red and blue, because of their mixture with the white light.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page124
As
our
understanding of our existential contexts became clearer by the help of
our maintenance of our TTDF Program, we discovered many details about
ourselves as our true Self, our Spirit.
We
took
help from the fairytales of The TuTu Doctrine – The New World to
put into words our intuitive understanding of our existential situation,
and thus our lives as human beings became easier.
We
discovered
that as our true Self, our Spirit, we decided for fun to project a
crystallized mirror image of ourselves into the Ocean of Love, and we
split our mirror image into two Souls, a ‘he’ and a ‘she’.
The
energy
field our manifested creatures lived their lives in became the seventh
dimension, and they were called Souls, demigods and demigoddesses, or
angels and avatars.
Today’s
Contemplation
Today
I
will use a fairytale from The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order to
achieve a better understanding of who and what I am in Reality.
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH
APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGUST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER
1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE CAMEL AND THE NEEDLE’S EYE,
PAGE 89
It is important that
money, property, power and prestige issues do not divert us from
taking our rightful places, because it is as difficult for the rich
to enter Paradise as it is for a camel to pass through a needle’s
eye.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 89
As human beings, we live our lives as multidimensional beings on Earth
in the third dimension, but our real life we live as our true Self, our
Spirit in the God Realm, which is the eighth dimension.
When
our
life ends on Earth we return to our true Self, our Spirit, and the only
thing we can take with us is that development of our love that we
carried out in the face of the opposite.
Our
purpose
with taking on a life in 3D is to experience the ultimate contrast to
ourselves as Spirit and thus intensify our lovemaking which is that
energy field, which is called the Holy Grail and which gives us eternal
bliss.
If
instead
we spend our lives working on acquiring earthly property, money, power
and prestige, we are trying to make ourselves happy in ways that cannot
make us happy, because only our lovemaking can do that for us.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will use my contact with my true Self, my Spirit, to make myself happy
through my Eleventh Step of TTDF.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION DEMONS, PAGE 178
Also, I realized that the outer
demons that is resistance and opposition from the outer World, are
not real.
They are projections of my own inner demons.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 179
As we came to know our character defects in Steps Four
and Six by the help of the Rings of Pain, we realized that they had the
same characteristics that we had encountered in the description of
demons.
For many of us, the word demons had been frightening
until we came to know our character defects, but now we found that we
could transform our demons into enlightenment and wisdom by pairing the
Rings of Pain with the Rings of Joy.
Before we began the work of creating and manifesting an
enlightened and wise Ego, we had felt helpless over our Ego and that of
others, but now we learned that the fear of the defects of character of
others were not needed.
We realized that when we looked at others through our
own defects of character, we saw the same in others, but that this was a
projection that had not necessarily got anything to do with the the
other person.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use Step Ten to inventory my own part in a
situation, where I felt scared of others’ use of their defects of
character.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 4, CHAPTER 4, THE SECTION THE FAIRYTALE OF THE GODS AND GODDESSES,
WHO WALK ON THE EARTH, PAGE 454
Our
true
Self, our Spirit was created and manifested as an individual Spirit by
God, our FatherMother in their image as the merged masculine and
feminine principle, called Ardhanarishvara.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 456
In
Step
Eleven we gradually teach ourselves to look at everything in the Light
of Love, which is the fundamental tone of the Universe and the true
state of our true Self, our Spirit.
By choosing to look at ourselves and everything and everybody everywhere
at all level of consciousness in the Light of Love, we bring ourselves
into harmony with the Universe.
Our
thinking
mind, our Ego, is unable to look at everything in the Light of Love
because of the built-in fear that is the fundamental characteristic of
our Ego's thought system.
Therefore,
when
we act on our Ego's thought system, it can happen that we act contrary
to the Light of Love, and this gives rise to existential pains that can
express itself as illness, weakness, discomfort and pain.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will use Step Ten and Step Eleven to teach myself to look at
everything in the Light of Love.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 5, THE SECTION THE FERTILIZED EGG, PAGE 385
If The World Chooses to Unite and Contribute, each one with his/hers, Together, we can Realize and thereby bring into our Daily Lives The Holy Grail of The World.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 386
The meeting amulets in our TTDF Program come in
different graphic versions, and we can choose ourselves how we want the
front side and the back side to look.
The first graph of our cosmic egg holds our personal
Ardhanarisvara in our assigned energy field as our true Self, our
Spirit, our merged masculine and feminine Self.
The next graph is our mutual heart, and the white and
black field is our individuality, where the masculine principle, who is
the darkness, is the creative power and the feminine principle, who is
the light, is the manifesting power.
The third graph is our Holy Grail, which is the holiest
of the holy, the heart of our heart, where we are one being in eternal
passionate lovemaking in the Eternity of Eternities just like God, our
FatherMother.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will take to heart that lovemaking is the
holiest of the holy.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 1, CHAPTER 2, FACE TO
FACE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION DEPARTURE, PAGE
37
I
often experienced the same condition, which I had had together with
the Master. When
the
condition was not there, I tried to bring it forth and
discovered that an efficient means to achieve it was to think of
him. Hence, I made it a habit to think of how it
had been to be together with him, and about what transpired while I
had been there. I
also began reading his books and in one of these it said that
what I was doing is called Constant Remembrance, and that this
was one of his suggestions for training one’s
capacity to focus spiritually.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 38
Our first experience of higher states of consciousness
often occurred in connection with the radiance of a spiritual teacher,
and from that time on we followed suggestions and found ways to recreate
the state.
As we came to know our true Self, our Spirit, in Step
Eleven, we discovered that the state of our true Self, our Spirit, was
the state we had experienced in glimpses and which we were now working
on making our daily state.
In this work, it helped us to use Step Two to develop
our trust in that our true Self, our Spirit, always and without
exception had an unconditionally loving intention behind even the
smallest experiences that happened for us.
Therefore, we used Step Two to constantly remember the
loving intention of our true Self, our Spirit, by working with
situations that caused us to experience illness, weakness, discomfort,
and pain until we found that loving intention.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use Step Two to constantly remember the
unconditionally loving intention of my true Self, my Spirit, behind my
illnesses, weaknesses, discomforts, and pains.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
4, CHAPTER 1, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE MASTER
OF THE UNIVERSE, PAGE 350
Throughout the day, you must constantly be attentive to your heart's desires and adjust your actions accordingly.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 352
Many of us thought that surrender to God meant that we
were to be of service to the spiritual development of others when we
came to TTDF, or that we were to give our resources to the poor, whether
we felt like it or not.
As we developed our Program, we learned that surrender
to God, our FatherMother, happened within, in our oneness in higher and
higher realms with our Spirit Mate.
This understanding came to us by taking to heart the
Four Weddings described in the TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order,
by entering into our Four Weddings ourselves with our own Spirit Mate.
God, our FatherMother, created and manifested us in
HisHer own image and by being true to our unconditional love for our
Spirit Mate, we surrendered to be as we were created and manifested in
Truth.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will surrender myself and my life to God, my
FatherMother, by surrendering myself to my true Self, my Spirit,
exactly as it was God, my Father’sMother's will for me.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 3, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT GOOD AND EVIL, PAGE 368
She
had been expelled from the cosmic womb through
several successive waves of movement, and when the
oneness between her and her Spirit Mate split into two Soul Mates, she
was seized by great fear of having lost her Eternal Beloved Spirit
Mate and this fear was the first pain of her created
formmanifestation.
Spontaneously, she used her power of love to put a light
crystallized veil of oblivion over the painful feeling and thus the
fear got isolated on an existence plane on its own and became the
thinking mind, the Ego, who were her Soul’s first created
form-manifestation, her personal inner child.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 371
Most of us had learned on our spiritual path that our
thinking mind, our Ego, was the obstacle to our oneness with our true
Self, our Spirit, and it had to be killed, suppressed, criticized, or
ignored.
We did not know that this very attitude was preventing
our progress towards oneness, for the Ego came into being at the
beginning of the manifested creation and cannot be killed, suppressed,
criticized, or ignored.
When we tried to follow these instructions anyway, our
existential pains were intensified because we were at war with the
powerful part of ourselves, which is our inner child, who contains our
childhood traumas.
That is why we work with our childhood in Step Four and
do our best to release the traumatic events with the help of Step Six,
thereby paving the way for being reunited with who we ARE in Reality.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use Step Four and Six to release a painful
situation from my childhood.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
3, CHAPTER 3, THE DIVINE WEDDING, THE
SECTION PREPARATION FOR THE FULFILLMENT OF A PROHIBIT DESIRE, PAGE
277
Now, however,
I had been with TuTu when he bought heroin in the black market, and
there we gradually got to know many creative and intelligent people,
and that had broken down the image of addicts and addiction that I
had formed from my reading.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 278
Most of us have read many books to get an idea of the
spiritual path, and this can lead many of us to believe that we have a
great knowledge about what it means to walk on the spiritual path.
As we practice different suggestions for practice, we
gain knowledge of which suggestions work for us and which we do not need
to include on our personal path.
As long as our knowledge is theoretical, we have a
preconceived idea of what it is like to walk the path, and the ring of
what we say based on a preconceived opinion is devoid of the authority
that wisdom gives.
Today's contemplation
Today I do not want to leave anyone in doubt whether
what I am talking about is theoretical knowledge or wisdom.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
4 , CHAPTER 4, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS
WHO WALK ON THE EARTH, PAGE 373
"When the hierarchy separates and shows the differences, doesn't the hierarchy separate brother from brother and sister form sister?"
"This only happens when brothers and sisters have forgotten their origin."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 376
We met many people who had developed greater knowledge
about and experiences with areas that we wanted to develop experience
with, and these people became our teachers if they were willing to take
on that task.
We had also developed knowledge about and experience
with areas that some of our fellow human beings wanted to get knowledge
and experience with, and we became their teachers if we were willing to
take on that role.
It was the role of the hierarchy both on Earth and in
the higher dimensions that we helped each other acquire knowledge and
experience in different areas that we wanted to familiarize ourselves
with.
In our work as teachers we and our student might be in
the Small Ring of Arrogance with it’s superiority, inferiority,
isolation and overcrowding, and this is our opportunity to learn to use
the Small Ring of Truth.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will apply the Small Ring of Truth with it’s
humility, honesty, individuality and fellowship if I discover I am in
the energy field of the Small Ring of Arrogance when I teach.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
1, CHAPTER 1, THE INITIATION, THE SECTION
CHILDHOOD FAITH, PAGE 14
I got the impression back then that there were many, like my parents, who believed that it was something the uncommon people invented because they were out to cheat the common people, but there were also many who believed in them, in particular, if they were able to perform miracles, like Moses did.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 14
As
we grew up, we learned to identify with our limited, ignorant,
powerless, and mortal/changeable human self, and little by little we let
go of our true Self, our Spirit and became earthbound.
This
identification
was very frightening, and we felt more and more unhappy without knowing
what it was that made us so unhappy, but we began to search for
happiness in many fruitless places.
Eventually
we
came across information about the spiritual path, and it seemed to
promise us that we could become happy if we followed it, and so we
sought out many spiritual teachers who had much to offer.
Eventually
we
turned away from external teachers and turned inward toward our true
Self, our Spirit, and that eventually lead us to TTDF where the purpose
is to move inward into identification with our true Self, our Spirit.
Today’s
contemplation
Today
I
will hold on to my identification with my true Self, my Spirit, by the
help of my TTDF Program and my
inner child.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 3, THE DIVINE WEDDING, THE SECTION WITHDRAWAL SYMPTOMS, PAGE 279
I decided that this
was the end of my career as an addict, but when I had gone through a
day and a half of withdrawal symptoms, I became willing to disregard
my decision so as to bring an end to my discomfort.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 280
Many of us had used various substances before we came
to TTDF to induce certain states of mind that we were unable to induce
ourselves due to lack of knowledge or training.
This could lead to addiction, and that led to that the
body's natural chemicals, which give a much more natural effect stopped
being produced by our bodies.
When we then wanted to stop our medicated state to
achieve it on our own power, we had to go through withdrawals, that
period of time it took for the body to resume its production of the
chemical and get used to the subtler state.
In TTDF we learned to induce the states of mind we
wanted without the use of chemicals, and therefore we became willing to
let go of our addictive use of the chemicals we had used to achieve
them.
Today’s
contemplation
Today I will learn to induce the states of mind I want
to be in, with the help of the Fellowship of TTDF.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION
THAT HUMAN BEING WHO LIVES ALONE, PAGE
89
That
human
being who has achieved his or her individual and personal
Self-realization, but who lives alone, must patiently wait to meet his
or her beloved to achieve his or her Absolute Self-realization and in
the meantime prepare for this meeting by using his or her personal
contact with his or her true Self as the head and his or her life and
will as the feet.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 89
When our existential experiences came to the point
where we understood our true Self, our Spirit, we understood that
Self-Realization and God-Realization are one and the same, because
Spirit and God are one and the same energy form.
When we are one with our true Self, our Spirit, we feel
joy in being, and we receive guidance from our true Self, our
Spirit, who is the Absolute Authority and Integrity in our lives.
Even though we may live without an earthly partner, we
connect with our true Self, our Spirit through prayer and meditation
and can thus live a whole and complete life, whether we are alone or
have a partner.
This is called drinking from the Holy Grail, which is
our merged masculine and feminine principle, Ardhanarishvara, while
maintaining our individuality like the graph of the Absolute Heart
shows.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use prayer and meditation to contact my
true Self, my Spirit, Ardhanarishvara by the help of my Eleventh
Step.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
2, CHAPTER 2, THE PERSONAL, THE SECTION
ARROGANCE 2, PAGE 170
Until then, I had connected humility with humiliation, and therefore I thought that I had to make myself small and submissive if I wanted to become humble.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 170
Most of us have experienced many humiliations in our
lives that hurt us so deeply that we became bitter about it, and thus
we activated the Microring of Hatred with its indignation,
vindictiveness, belligerence, and bitterness.
In Step Four in TTDF, we worked with these traumatic
experiences all the way from our earliest childhood to the present, and
we understood that we needed to transform these feelings into wisdom and
enlightenment.
In Step Six, we paired the Microring of Hatred with the
Microring of Love with its mercy, forgiveness, conciliatory, and
sweetness, and thus we achieved the transformation of our pain into
understanding and joy.
As we paired the Pain Rings with the corresponding Joy
Rings, our ability to handle our thinking mind, our Ego, with
unconditional love, care, compassion, and mercy grew.
Today's Contemplation
Today
I
will use the joy of the Small Ring of Truth with its humility,
honesty, individuality and fellowship to accept that no manifested
creature is inferior or superior to me.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
5, CHAPTER 1, MY LIFE WITH THE MASTER, THE
SECTION THE MORNING GIFT, PAGE 394
As I played all the numbers, it was as if my ears opened to some parts of the texts, and the images that these words conjured in me made my joy rise to ecstasy.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 394
Our Program states that God is everything; everything is God, and this
made us realize that there is nothing outside God’s unconditional
love, care compassion and mercy.
Many of us had a hard time understanding how our illnesses,
weaknesses, discomforts and pains could be an expression of God’s
unconditional love, care, compassion and mercy for us.
As the unconditional love,
care, compassion and mercy of our true Self, our Spirit became clear for
us, we understood we had chosen to come to Earth to experience, what we
are not.
We chose this ourselves to experience the unloving, uncaring,
hardhearted and merciless and meet that with our true Self's, our
Spirit's unconditional love, care, compassion and mercy.
Today’s
contemplation
Today I will refine my true Self’s, my Spirit’s essence
by meeting illnesses,
weaknesses,
discomforts and pains with unconditional love, care, compassion and
mercy.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER 5, THE TUTU DOCTRINE, THE SECTION THE FERTILIZED EGG, PAGE 385
The Feminine Represents The Power of Manifestation, which is The Fertile Soil – found in The Divine as Goddess the Mother and in The Mundane as Goddess the Daughter – who says: "Don’t Fear The Fear of Fear."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 385
We have been accustomed to the creative force, which is
the masculine force, being spoken of in appreciative terms, and the
feminine force, which is the force of manifestation, not being spoken of
with appreciation.
In our Program, however, we learn to appreciate both
sides of our true Self, our Spirit, because we realize that without the
force of manifestation, the creative force is useless.
We also realize that it is above as below, and below
the masculine releases the Seed of Love through lovemaking with the
feminine, who receives the Seed of Love in the Egg of Love, and new life
comes into being.
This helps us to understand that love is the power that
can create and manifest new life on Earth in the same way that God, our
FatherMother, creates and manifests the individual Spirits who are their
children.
Today's Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
4, CHAPTER 2, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT LOVE
WITHOUT LIMITS, PAGE 362
Like
each particle was different, each couple who sprang from the
particles or The Cosmic Eggs were different, and also he and she
were different but each one held an image of the total being, and
thus, they held both the inner condition of the uncreated and
unmanifested and the creative and manifestive power of love, which
brought forth the outer expression of the inner condition.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 363
As we purify ourselves of our childhood’s traumatic experiences with the
help of Steps Four and Six, we let go of acting on them unconsciously as
adults and discover that our joyful inner child holds our essence.
Our
essence
is our unconditional love at the root of our individuality, and to the
extent that our individuality was not respected as sacred by our parents
and others, we became traumatized.
We
also
discovered that we had chosen these challenges because we wanted to
learn to meet everything and everyone from our essence of unconditional
love, care, compassion, and mercy.
Being
aware
that we had chosen the challenges of our lives allowed us to not be
tempted to blame God or others for our choices, and instead we spent
that time and energy to purify ourselves of traumas.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will let go of blaming God or others for my choices of challenges that
I want to work on in this life.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
November 24: Namaste
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER 2, FACE TO FACE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION UNDER THE INFLUENCE OF THE MASTER’S RADIATION, PAGE 25
He passed by us with a
short greeting, by placing one palm of his hand against the other in
front of his chest and nodding lightly with his head.
This greeting is called Namaste or the God-greeting and it means: "I
greet God in you."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 25
On
the 12 Step Path we make many new friends from all over the world, and
they teach us many new things about how their daily lives happens,
both worldly and spiritually.
In
this connection, we discover a greeting called Namaste, which consists
of placing our palms together in front of our heart and make a slight
bow of the head towards the person we are greeting.
This
greeting contains a message without words that says: I greet God in
you and is an expression of respect for the other person's true Self,
his or her Spirit, whether his or her spirituality expresses itself
right now or not.
For
us as members of TTDF, the use of this greeting helps us to practice
Constant Remembrance of that the essence of our true Self, our Spirit
is in the same as God’s, our Father’sMother’s in Ardhanarishvara.
Today’s contemplation
Today, I will greet everything and everybody everywhere at all levels of consciousness with Namaste.JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 2, CHAPTER CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION THE HOLY SPIRIT, PAGE 79
TuTu explained that
Jesus veiled the feminine principle under the name The Holy Spirit,
because humankind at that time needed to step out of the flock
mentality by the help of the masculine principle.
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 79
In TTDF we learned that the masculine principle holds
the Seed of Love, and represents the outgoing creative power and the
accompanying initiative with it’s power of action.
The feminine principle holds the Egg of Love and
represents the ingoing manifesting power, and the accompanying openness
with it’s receptivity for inspiration from the Seed of Love.
Without the Seed of Love, the Egg of Love is useless,
and without the Egg of Love, the Seed of Love is useless, so we need
each other in lovemaking to create and manifest new life.
For the past two thousand years, the masculine
principle has been dominant because we, as humankind, needed to step out
of the flock mentality to make room for our individuality but now we
have to be side by side with equality.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will choose to use my feminine principle to
listen inwardly for inspiration from my masculine principle, who
together encompasses my individuality as my sovereign power, right and
duty before all else.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
Most of us who were not connected to the great eternal
love of our Spirit Mate felt lonely at the core and hoped that any day
would be the day we met him or her.
We correctly imagined that this meeting would make
everything become meaningful and fall into place in our lives, but many
of us were not aware that the habits that were not of love would be
uprooted.
This is a very painful process because we had formed
these habits for many reasons, all of which stemmed from the fear of
being traumatized for some reason that seemed to us to be beyond our
control.
In letting go of all our attempts to form habits that
would ensure that nothing painful could reach us, we simultaneously
closed ourselves off from being receptive to other people, and thus we
cut ourselves off from love.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use Steps Four and Six to cleanse myself
from fear and make room for love.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 5, CHAPTER 1, MY LIFE WITH THE MASTER, THE SECTION THE TREE OF LIFE, PAGE 404
The last couple
of days, something has become clear to me when I woke up, that I had
to write about in this book.
I was sure I would be able to remember it,
but as soon as I was fully awake, I could not get hold of it again.
Now, I have become more respectful, and so
I have been faster to react and write down immediately, and this
morning I finally got it: "Number files compress language files, and
language files translate number files."
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 404
Many of us kept a dream journal by our bedside table to capture and write down the dreams we had during the night before they slipped back into our subconscious.
We wanted to do this because we had become aware that many
of our dreams were intended to cleanse us of hurts or to give us
information that we might not ready to take to heart in our daytime
consciousness.
The understanding our dreams could help us become more aware
of ourselves in areas that might be difficult for us to face when we
were awake and to understand the depth of our hurts.
When we did our daily Tenth Step, we took a dream up for
interpretation and analysis, and if anything was unclear, we sought
guidance from our Higher Power in Step Eleven to incorporate our dream
into our lives.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 2, THE ANGELIC WEDDING, THE SECTION TUTU’S ILLNESS 1, PAGE 261
"How big must the sacrificial pyre become before
society comes to its senses and allows the individual access to the
pain treatment that he/she himself/herself feels a need for, whether
their pain is of a physical, psychological social or spiritual
nature?"
The TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page
Growing up, we had become accustomed to being coerced
by others before they would help us achieve our desires, but our Program
teaches us that this is maltreatment of us by our environment.
This maltreatment by our parents consisted of forcing
us to behave in ways that were not in accordance with our essence, which
was intact when we were born, but gradually became traumatized in this
way.
Just as our parents used coercion and even punishment,
our family and our society also used coercion and punishment if we were
not willing to override our essence to follow rules and laws.
We used our TTDF Program to heal ourselves from these
dysfunctions and claimed our right to act in accordance with our
essence, which we came to know in our Stepwork.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will claim to act in accordance with my
essence, who is my true Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
At meetings we introduce ourselves with our personal
name as our earthly identity and add our affirmation of who we are in
Reality by adding: I am unconditional love.
In our Program we work on acknowledging who we are in
Reality, which our human limitation, ignorance, powerlessness and
mortality/changeability have hidden from us in many ways.
Little by little we acknowledge the omnipresence,
omniscience, omnipotence and immortality/unchangeability of our true
Self, our Spirit, and this purifies us from our fear of life and death.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will acknowledge the unconditional love, care,
compassion and mercy of my true Self, my Spirit and let this
realization purify me from my fear of life and death.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 6, CHAPTER 1,
APPENDIXES, THE SECTION APPENDIX D, PAGE 412
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World
Order, page 412
Today’s
contemplation
Today
I
will use my Tenth Step to analyze how one of the Microrings of Pain is
affecting me in my life today.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World
Order, page 70
In the Fairytale about Good and Evil, we were taken all the way back to
the beginning of the manifestation of this creation, where we projected
a mirror image of ourselves, split in two, into the Ocean of Love.
The
pain
that arose in our manifested creation by being projected into two
separate form identities was the fear of having lost one’s eternally
beloved Spirit partner, and thereby love.
When
we
placed a light veil over the pain of fear, it became isolated in an
energy field of its own, which we now call our thinking mind’s, our
Ego's dualistic thought system.
In
TTDF,
we return to ourselves on the Spirit plane to heal and cure the fear and
pain of our Soul by meeting our Soul's child, our Ego, with the healing
power of our true Self, our Spirit.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will work on using the healing power of my true Self, my Spirit, to
heal my Soul and thus my Ego from the pain of fear.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World
Order, page 279
However,
the
teachings about the Four Weddings teach us that only after our Spiritual
Wedding do the conflicts slowly fade away, because the purification
after the Angelic Wedding enables us to let go of our fears.
We
prepare
for the encounter with the Great Love by replacing our Ego’s thought
system with our God-mind’s thought system by the help of the Rings of
Pain and Joy in our Program.
As
we
prepare ourselves for the Great Love, Divine intervention always takes
place if fear gets in our way in the form of new people or situations
that come to us to guide us back to love.
Today's
Contemplation
Today I will open myself for the Divine intervention that occurs all the time when I lose sight of love.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM
PART 2, CHAPTER 1, THE PRINCIPLES, THE SECTION TO BECOME LIKE CHILDREN
ANEW, PAGE 92
These attitudes are the right ones because we must become like
children anew to enter the Garden of Eden, that place in existence
where love, care, compassion and mercy for the beloved fill in all
emptiness.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 92
Little
by
little as we acknowledged our true Self, our Spirit to be our real self,
werealized that not only we, but everything and everyone comes to Earth
with the essence of our true Self, our Spirit intact.
We
also
realized that everything and everyone had the task of showing us what
weare not, while we are children and therefore defenseless, because we
receive everything as an expression of the love we are, also our
parents.
This
meant
that we came to perceive the unconditionally unloving,
uncaring,hard-hearted and merciless to be the unconditionally loving,
caring, compassionate and merciful and that it is not.
This
misunderstanding
became deeply rooted in us, and we used our TTDF Program tocleanse
ourselves of what we are not, even though it could be scary at times to
let go of the familiar and well established.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will use my Step Work to cleanse myself of all that I am not, by
acknowledging the sacredness of my individuality.
FROM PART 3, CHAPTER 2, THE
ANGELIC WEDDING, THE SECTION THE HELP OF THE CROWN PRINCE 2, PAGE 274
The revelation failed to
appear, and I looked up TuTu, but when I met him, I became so heavy from
fear that I could barely walk, and scared, I fled to the Crown Prince
He sat together with a group of disciples and answered questions, but I
had nothing to ask, so I did not participate in the conversation.
Suddenly, he turned around, looked straight at me and said: "What is the
princess without the prince other than a frustrated
female?"
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 275
Those
of
us who had experiences with the Great Love between our Spirit Mate and
us could share these experiences with other members and inform them
about the fears that arose at the meeting with the Great Love.
Our
stream
of consciousness mostly emerged from our limited, ignorant, powerless
and mortal thinking minds, our Egos, when we came to TTDF, and to our
Egos, love is an unknown energy field.
We
gave
our Ego the task of protecting our Soul from the fear of pain, and this
fear became the fear of the unknown that our Ego had been tasked with
protecting our Soul from.
Therefor
our
encounter with the Great Love alarmed our Egos, and the fear became
intense, but the stream of consciousness of the Great Love is
all-penetrating and purifies our stream of consciousness of the fear of
our Ego.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will open myself to be receptive to the stream of consciousness that
comes to me through my love.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World
Order, page 171
In
our
adult lives, this led many of us to try to help others do what was right
thing for ourselves by treating others as we ourselves had been treated
with scolding, criticism, ridicule, and punishment.
Our
parents
believed that this helped us to let go of our individuality, so that we
became more acceptable to ourselves and society, and they believed that
they thereby made our lives easier than it otherwise would have been.
However,
this
is a distortion of our individuality, which is our sovereign power,
right, and duty to live by, and this creates suffering so in TTDF we
cleansed ourselves of these distortions so as to become our true self.
Today's
Contemplation
Today
I
will use my Tenth Step to cleanse myself of a distortion of my
individuality that creates sufferings for myself and others.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 235
In
our
attempt to walk the spiritual path in accordance with spiritual
principles, it could seem daunting to many of us that we were
confronted with many tasks that did not seem to be spiritual to us.
We
imagined
that when we met our One and Only Spirit Mate, the love between us would
continue to flow, and this is also correct, but we did not know that it
would dissolve all that did not belong to this love.
We
had
met many who awoken our love and had made promises of eternal love that
we could not keep in the long rsn, and we needed to make amends to them
for our broken promises if they wanted it.
This
karma
became intense when we actually were face to face with our Eternal Love
for our Spirit Mate, and this could result in painful separations until
our relationship with our Spirit Partner stood pure.
Today’s contemplation
Today,
I
will accept that the homecoming to my true Self, my Spirit, which
the love for my One and Only brings forth is associated with a
painful purification from all that, which is not the love of my One
and Only.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The new
aspects of their knowledge, both the true and the false, were
achieved during their wandering, when they worked and acquired
knowledge, when they lived their everyday life and acquired habits,
and when they met a manifested creature, who showed some of the
characteristics of their Spirit Mate.
Then, a spontaneous recognition arose, and their love was aroused,
and therefore, they became willing to merge with the experiences
that this manifested creature had to share, and thus the love for
other manifested creatures brought them through many difficult
points, which they would otherwise not have had the power of action
to go through.
The
TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order, page 366
We had met many beings on our path who awakened our love,
both the platonic love for our children, family and friends and the
erotic love for our partner, and we wondered about what made it flow.
When our love flowed, we took on many new things, even
things that were demanding, but to our amazement, we accomplished them
effortlessly and easily and understood it was our love’s energy that
lifted our energy level.
We discovered many times that our love faded and made us to
let go of those circumstances and people that had awakened our love in
the first place and moved on on our individual path.
When we read the Fairytale of the Love Without Limits, we
understood that the Great Love does not fade but flows forever and
crosses the boundary of death and that it is the love for our One and
Only Spirit Mate.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use Step Eleven to connect with my One and Only
Spirit Mate, whether he or she is currently on Earth or not.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World
Order, page 397
Most of us were afraid of the physical death when we
came to TTDF, but gradually as we heard other members share their
connection with the deceased, our fear began to fade.
Many of us had dismissed our sensations and experiences
with our deceased loved ones as wishful thinking, but after having heard
about other members’ experiences, we began to take our own to heart.
Little by little, as we began to trust our own
experiences, we also became ready to acknowledge the dimensional
teachings from the TuTu Doctrine – The New World Order and thus
take our true Self, our Spirit, to heart.
In Step Eleven, we learned to communicate with our true
Self, our Spirit in the Absolute by the help of the Two-Way Prayer, and
thus we began to trust that physical death was merely a change of form.
Today’s Contemplation
Today I will use my Eleventh Step to communicate with
my true Self, my Spirit, by the help of the Two-Way Prayer.
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH
APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGUST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
The spiritual awakening, which both I and the others achieved by the help of the Twelve Steps in Narcotics Anonymous, made me perceive our previous condition as drug users as that spiritual phenomenon which is called The Dark Night of the Soul.
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World
Order, page 298
Most of us in TTDF are familiar with the Dark Night of
the Soul as that period of our lives when we felt abandoned by God and
humankind and could no longer find our way in life.
In the clear light of hindsight, we realized that this
period of our lives made us look at family, friends, and the world at
large in a new way, devoid of the illusion that we would not be
ostracized if we deviated from the norm.
This made us stop our attempts to find a solution to
our existential pains on the outside, and we began to go inward by
studying ourselves, our thoughts, feelings, and social interactions.
As we went inward, we discovered that our connection
with our true Self, our Spirit, was the connection we had been seeking
to achieve on the outside, and our awakening as our true Self, our
Spirit, made us happy.
Today's Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 92
Those of us who were successful in the eyes of society
knew that society's yard stick of if a person had a successful life was
shown in the areas that society rewarded and supported with power and
material wealth.
Even though we were successful in the eyes of society,
we knew at this point in time that although it was convenient for us to
have success and the benefits that came with it, there was still a
longing to find ourselves.
In TTDF we found this desire fulfilled for many both
successful and not successful people, and this gave us hope
that we too could achieve the happiness of being ourselves, as we are in
Truth.
Therefore we began to use our TuTu consciousness to the
best of our ability with its unconditional love, care, compassion and
mercy towards ourselves and everything and everyone everywhere on all
planes of consciousness.
Today's Contemplation
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 23
Most of us learned about good and evil in our childhood
without knowing that we acquired the thought system of our thinking
mind, our Ego, which was the reason we learned to fear life and death,
God and people.
We learned that we had to be vigilant about our own
thoughts and feelings and make sure that we thought good thoughts and
had good feelings, so when we got angry, we were told that we were not
good children.
When others were angry at us, we were not good children
either, but had to learn to be different from who we naturally were,
because otherwise we could risk that no other people would want to have
anything to do with us.
In TTDF, we learned to let go of our thinking minds,
our Ego thought system, and instead use our knowing minds, our God mind
thought system, and thus we recovered from our fear.
Today's contemplation
Today I will use the thought system of my God mind so I can recover from the pain of fear and find the unconditional joy in my life.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART
3, CHAPTER 1, THE EARTHLY WEDDING, THE SECTION PREPARATION FOR BHOG,
PAGE 232
The heaviest samskaras lay at the
bottom like the heaviest particles in a well, and therefore they
only came up for Bhog in the end, and it was this heavy winding up
of ties of destiny that TuTu was beginning to prepare me for.
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World
Order, page 232
Gradually, as we use our Eleventh Step to communicate
from our limited, ignorant, powerless, and mortal/changeable human self
with our true Self, our Spirit, we understand that all is well.
As our omnipresent, omniscient, omnipotent, and
immortal/unchangeable true Self, our Spirit, we have chosen to
experience what we are not in order to achieve a contrast that refines
our self-perception.
In TTDF, we integrate all that scares us such as
illness, weakness, discomfort, and pain by the help of our Second Step
by finding the purpose of our true Self, our Spirit, behind these
experiences.
In doing so, we discover that there is always and
without exception an unconditionally loving, caring, compassionate, and
merciful intention behind these scary experiences, and thus they become
meaningful to us.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will let go of feelings of guilt and shame
about my illnesses, weaknesses, discomforts, and pains by using Step
Two to make them meaningful and uplifting.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World
Order, page 383
Many of us have realized that the crucifixion of Jesus
of Nazareth was an expression of the extent to which we should show
mercy by unconditionally forgiving those who hurt us.
We have also understood that the cross that we were
called to take up is our physical body, which in Jesus' case was
stretched out and hung on a cross until he died.
In TTDF, we exactly work on identifying ourselves with
the unconditional mercy, compassion, care and love of our true Self, our
Spirit, instead of identifying ourselves with our fickle human self.
Gradually, as our identification with our true Self,
our Spirit, becomes powerful, we understand that taking up our cross
means that we accept our human self with unconditional mercy.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will take up my cross by accepting that
presently I live as a limited, ignorant, powerless and
mortal/changeable human being, even though I am an omnipresent,
omniscient, omnipotent and immortal/unchangeable Spirit in Reality.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 316
Gradually, as our inner life evolves, we discover that our true Self,
our Spirit, uses our imagination and visualization ability to create and
manifest events by the help of our vehicles in the dimensions.
In the third dimension, our physical body is our
vehicle, in the fourth, our etheric body is our vehicle, in the fifth,
our astral body is our vehicle, and in the sixth dimension, our causal
body is our vehicle.
In the seventh dimension, there are an infinite number
of energy fields that are so powerful that they are called Gods and
Goddesses, and in addition, there are various energy fields with animal
names.
These energy fields with animal names are also called
power animals or vehicles and are an expression of the energies that the
Gods and Goddesses use to move around in the seventh dimension and in
the underworld.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use Step Eleven to find out what my
vehicle is in the seventh dimension.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 42
On our spiritual path we meet many other spiritual
aspirants, and sometimes we also meet masters and masteresses who have
an unusually strong radiation that affects us in an uplifting way.
This can make us want to learn from the person in
question how he or she achieved this state, and that can lead to us
trying to become like our teacher or teacheress.
At some point, however, we realize that even though we
acquire the attributes that our teacher or teacheress has, it does not
necessarily give us the same radiation or the same insight as he or she
has.
Thus we become ready to go inward and find our own
authentic energy field, and we use the Program in TTDF to peel away
everything from us that is not true for us and is thus part of our
individuality.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use my Tenth Step to peel away an
inauthentic attribute from my individuality.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 191
Most of us were not aware that God’s individual and
personal love for us comes to expression through our sexual partner
when we came to TTDF.
We were used to perceiving God’s love for us as the
platonic and impersonal love of a parent, and we had not been aware
that we were made in the image of God, our FatherMother and with their
attributes.
Because of the demonization of loveless sexual desire,
which revolves around the release of sexual tension at any cost, fear
had prevented us from realizing that lovemaking is the holiest of the
holy.
In the same way as God, our FatherMother created and
manifested all of HisHer children as individual Spirits through
lovemaking, so man and woman manifest all of their children as
individual human beings through lovemaking.
Today’s Contemplation
Today I will look at lovemaking with my sexual partner
as the holiest of the holy, which gives my partner and me the
ability to create and manifest new life in the same way that God,
our FatherMother does.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
To
surrender to the spiritual principles a person has to take help from
his or her thinking, and to surrender to earthly principles
he or she has to take help from his or her feelings.
The
surrender takes place gradually as the person learns to see,
hear, feel and sense both his or her Spirit and his or her body,
and at the same time, acts confidently in accordance with what
he or she
sees, hears, feels or senses.
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 86
In the Step One tapping protocol, we came face to face
with the problems our human limitation, ignorance, powerlessness, and
mortality/changeability gave rise to in our daily lives.
Furthermore, we discovered that our etheric body,
astral body, causal body, and Soul body, in which we travel on our
dimensional journeys, were all limited, ignorant, powerless, and
mortal/changeable form-identities.
In the Step Two supplement, we came face to face with
our existential state when we denied our omnipresent, omniscient,
omnipotent, and immortal/unchangeable true Self, our Spirit.
Furthermore, we experienced how our existential state
changed when we took our unconditionally loving, caring, compassionate,
and merciful true Self, our Spirit, to heart, and thus became authentic.
Today's Contemplation
JANUARY
FEBRUARY
MARCH
APRIL
MAY
JUNE
JULY
AUGUST
SEPTEMBER
OCTOBER
NOVEMBER
DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 86
Most of us had been under the impression that our
sexual life and our spiritual life had got nothing to do with each other
and that we could achieve a better contact with our spiritual life by
the help of celibacy.
However, in TTDF we learned to communicate with our
true Self, our Spirit, and we understood that our true Self, our Spirit,
consists of the merged masculine and feminine principle, called
Ardhanarishvara.
We had learned that as it is above, so it is below, and
we know from experience that when we are in love below lovemaking is our
highest and most intense expression of love and is is also just like
that above.
When we looked at the graph of the Holy Grail, we
understood that in our innermost heart’s heart’s Holy Grail, lovemaking
is the holiest of the holy, and that development of our lovemaking is
development of our spiritual life.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will look at my development of my sexual life
with my Spirit Mate as an expression of the development of my
spiritual life.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 90
Most of us had been given the impression that success and
happiness could be achieved by acquiring many material benefits, and
preferably such abundance that we could pay for the helping hands of
others to manifest our ideas.
After achieving a certain measure of material success, we
realized that we did not feel happy or successful, and so we gave up
using our time, our energy, and our interest in acquiring more
material things.
Instead we began our search for happiness and success in
ways that had got nothing to do with the acquisition of material
benefits and advantages, and we discovered that the spiritual path was
the path to happiness.
In the work with our TTDF Program we finally acknowledged
the unconditional love, care, compassion, and mercy of our true Self,
our Spirit, and acted in conformity with this realization.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will identify with the joy without opposites called
happiness and is found in my true Self, my Spirit.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World
Order, page 38
Many of us believed that if we stood first in line to
have a wish fulfilled, we would get it more easily than if we patiently
took the place in the line that naturally opened up for us without
pushing to be first in line.
The impatience that makes us push to stand first in
line so as to have our wish fulfilled belongs to the Miniring of Hatred,
with its illwill, unkindness, irritation, and impatience.
We investigated how the situation might have played out
if we had instead used the energies of the Miniring of Love, with its
goodwill, kindness, calmness, and patience.
In doing so, we had gained the information we needed to
change our behavior, and by practicing this change, we gained that
wisdom we needed to be patient in the fulfillment of our wishes.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will work on developing my patience by the help
of the Mini Ring of Love with its goodwill, kindness, calmness and
patience.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World
Order, page 354
In our work with the Sixth Step, we work with the Ring
of Self-Centeredness and the Ring of God-Centeredness, and when we feel
into the energies that these two energy fields contain, it becomes clear
to us how they feel.
The Ring of Self-Centeredness shows us that
self-criticism leads to depression, and self-praise leads to euphoria,
which is artificial joy that is inevitably followed by self-criticism
and depression in a bipolar swing up and down.
The Ring of God-Centeredness shows us that when we open
our minds to a solution to our problems, help will come to us from
inside or outside, and this gives us the power to solve our problem.
We become grateful that our problem has found a
solution and as a result, we are filled with joy, because gratitude
always and without exception fills us with joy.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use the Ring of God-Centeredness to find joy in being, even when my life unfolds in ways that I have not consciously desired.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World
Order, page 33
After achieving identification with our true Self, our
Spirit, we understood that as Spirit we are omnipresent, omniscient,
omnipotent and immortal/unchangeable, which are the same attributes that
God has.
Thereby we also understood that Self-realization and
God-realization are one and the same, and that everything and everybody
everywhere on all planes of consciousness is God, and thus it became
easier for us to see God everywhere.
As a result of this development, our life became one
long conversation with God through our interaction with everything and
everybody everywhere, and our life as a human being thus became an
exalted journey on Earth.
A life journey of this kind became possible for us
because our Fellowship and our Program had led us to acknowledge our
unconditional love for ourselves and everything and everyone everywhere
on all planes of consciousness.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will acknowledge my unconditional love for
everything and everyone everywhere on all planes of consciousness.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World
Order, page 110
Most of us had difficulty evaluating which state of
mind we were in, and it helped us to look at the graph in The TuTu
Doctrine – The New World Order that describes their contents.
We are all familiar with the five states of
consciousness illustrated in this graph, and we recognize that we
alternate our states of consciousness between all five without
previously having used words to describe them.
It is important for us to have words to describe them
in order to better observe which of them we are in right here and now,
and thus we can also begin to find ways to evoke them at will.
In the Eleventh Step, we move through our daily
consciousness into reflection, into contemplation, into concentration.
into meditation, and this knowledge makes it possible to step back and
let the process take place.
Today’s Contemplation
Today I will step back and let the process take place
when I want to meditate.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 295
In the graphs illustrating God, our FatherMother and
our true Self, our Spirit as the merged masculine and feminine
principle, called Ardhanarishvara or the ManWoman, we got an impression
of ourselves as Spirit.
We understood that as individual Spirits we all have
our unique place in the essence of God, our FatherMother also called the
Ocean of Love or The Holy Grail, where we are located in the Eternity of
Eternities.
God, our FatherMother has created and manifested us in
HisHer own image, but has given us the ability to express our personal
and unique sides of God, our FatherMother HimHerself.
God, our FatherMother also gave us HisHer creation- and
manifestation power i the form af lovemaking so that we could create,
manifest and expand that unique aspect of God, our FatherMother
that had been entrusted us.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will trust that my Spirit Mate and I are one
being joined together by God, our FatherMother, and that no one can
separate that, which God has joined together.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 373
Many of us fear Shiva, the destroyer and his wife the
destroyeress Kali, because the meeting with these archetypal energy
field means that the familiar is being destroyed and that can bring our
the pain of fear in us.
Sometimes, it can happen that we voluntarily decide to
surrender to the destroyer and the destroyeress, because we feel a need
for change in our life so we no longer want to move around in the
familiar.
Our meeting with our Spirit Mate brings about an
overwhelming destruction of the familiar, because this encounter brings
us to the Purgatory, where we are liberated from all false perception of
Reality.
However, by the help of our Second Step, we discovered
that the destruction of the familiar always was to our advantage by us
finding the unconditionally loving, caring, compassionate, and merciful
intention behind it.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 18
Our perception of life as children is simple and
straightforward because we are in a state of theta where we are
receptive and trusting, so we believe everything we are told by the
adults around us.
However, we have chosen to be born into circumstances
where the information we receive brings into focus the existential
issues we have chosen to work with during our Earth Journey.
Therefore, as we work with our childhood experiences
and perceptions in our Fourth and Eighth Step, it is important for us to
remember that it is our own choice to experience the painful
circumstances that we experienced as children.
We also need to let go of the anger we may feel as
teenagers, as our thinking ability begins to develop, at seeing that
much of what we were told as children was misinformation.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will take full responsibility for my
experiences during my Earth Journey.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER
4, THE FAIRYTALE ABOUT THE GODS WHO WALK ON THE EARTH, PAGE 374
The diamond is their symbol.
It represents the power of discernment, which flashes ominously in
the impure heart, that heart which is in conflict with itself, and
it shines benevolently in the pure heart, that heart which is at
peace with itself.
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World
Order, page 379
As we used the Destructive and the Constructive Rings
to handle our thinking mind’s, our Ego’s dualistic thought system in
Step Four and Six, we slowly acquired an enlightened and wise Egomind.
Our true Self, our Spirit resides in our heart center and is the
sovereign ruler of our life, and our thinking mind, our Ego, our causal
body resides in our solar plexus center and can cause disturbance in
keeping our focus point on our heart.
Therefore it was so important for us in TTDF to create and manifest an
enlightened and wise Egomind, and thus become heart centered instead of
Ego centered and thus our diamond came to shine benevolently in our
life.
By creating and manifesting an enlightened and wise Egomind, we
experienced the Ego Death, where we have shifted using our Egomind’s
thinking thought system to using our Godmind’s knowing thought system.
Today’s
contemplation
Today I will work on creating and manifesting an
enlightened and wise Egomind by the help of the Destructive and the
Constructive Rings.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 4, CHAPTER
5, THE TUTU DOCTRINE, THE SECTION THE FERTILIZED EGG, PAGE 386
Four
Represents The Universal Love in Its Highest Aspect and in Its
Lowest Aspect The Balance.
Four is therefore The First Positive Power-factor in The
Spiritual Life of Humankind, because Four Contains the Soul
Realm and All the Soul’s manifested Creatures, as it
Contains both God The Father’s,
Goddess the Mother’s,
God The Son’s
and Goddess the Daughter’s
Eternally Merged unconditional Love, and thereby both the
Souls and all that the Souls created
and Manifested
that Came into Being as a Result of the Projection of Forms
by the Four Whole into all Formbased Planes of Consciousness.
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 391
By reading the part of the ToTo Doctrine itself called
The Fertilized Egg, it became clear to us that the Earth has been
elevated to the fourth dimension, also called cyberspace.
We understood this because we were read that the number
three was the holy number in the Old World Order, as expressed in fairy
tales, myths, spiritual systems and religions, but the number four is
the new holy number.
The number three is an expression of existential
suffering, because two form a pair and the third is an outcast, and the
outcast is an expression of all suffering, whereas four ends all
suffering, because it contains universal love and balance.
In the number four, no one is outcast if you pair the
points of the number, and four is also an expression of the Earth's
elevation to the fourth dimension, which is the first positive power
factor in the life of humankind.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will accept that the Sacred Quadrant consisting
of God the Father, Goddess the Mother, God the Son and Goddess the
Daughter is the sacred symbol of the New World Order expressed by the
help of the number four.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
FROM PART 1, CHAPTER
4, PILGRIMAGE, THE SECTION FIRST MEETING WITH TUTU, PAGE 63
A person's holy name is a designation of his or her spiritual
condition, and I have chosen to use this name for him where it is
possible without disturbing the context.
He wrote it himself in two ways, either as 22 or as TuTu, which was
his personal preference of the English ‘Two-Two’
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 64
In the Old World Order, it was common for us to speak
about
a person's presumed state of mind as being from a Buddhist, Islamic,
Jewish,
Taoist, Hindu or Christian school of thought.
Therefore, we referred to a person's state of mind
with terms such as Buddhist, Muslim, Jew, Taoist, Hindu or Christian,
and this
gave the outside world the impression of what was sacred to that person.
In the New World Order, many of us have achieved
Self-Realization and God-Realization, so we no longer call ourselves by
the
name of our religion, but by the state of mind we have achieved that is
sacred
to us.
Instead of asking our society's religion from a
Buddhist, Islamic, Jewish, Taoist, Hindu or Christian school of thought,
what
we need to do now, we ask our own heart about it and act on the answer
we get.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will ask for knowledge about my unconditional
love’s will for my next right action.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
The TuTu Doctrine - The New World Order, page 387
Our heart’s heart that is called the Holy Grail, is
the seat of our true Self, our Spirit, Ardhanarishvara, who consists of
the merged
masculine and feminine principle.
Since our true Self, our individual Spirit, is an
omnipresent, omniscient, omnipotent and immortal/unchangeable aspect of
God,
our FatherMother, Ardhanarishvara, our true Self, our Spirit is
eternally
young.
When we reach the existential stage where we are able
to be in oneness with our true Self, our individual and unique Spirit,
we are
truly eternally young, even though our physical bodies age.
This means that we have become like children anew and
therefore we experience life as a human being as new every moment of
every day
in the same way as a child, even though our physical bodies age.
Today's Contemplation
Today I will use my Eleventh Step in TTDF to achieve
eternal youth.
JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER
